JP2014108286A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To suppress deterioration of interest in a game by improving appearance of data display device.SOLUTION: When a result of a first lottery falls under a win, the game machine executes a first opening operation that changes a game state from a non-operation state where it is hard for a game ball to enter a winning hole to a state where it is easy for the game ball to enter the winning hole. On condition that a second lottery trigger is produced, the second lottery trigger being triggered by entry of the game ball in the winning hole during the first opening operation, the same machine executes a second lottery and, when the result of the second lottery falls under a win, executes a second opening operation that changes the game state from a non-operation state where it is hard for a game ball to enter a large winning hole to a state where it is easy for the game ball to enter the large winning hole. The game machine regulates a degree of a value that may be produced by the ball entry in the winning hole during the first opening operation to higher than a degree of a value that may be produced by the ball entry of the large winning hole during the second opening operation, when the first opening operation is executed, outputs information relating to the execution of the first opening operation as winning information, and transmits the output winning information to an external device.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine in which an upper limit is set to the number of times that a specific winning type can be successively applied among a plurality of winning types related to a special symbol, triggered by winning in an operation lottery related to a normal symbol. .

  Conventionally, when the result of the internal lottery regarding the special symbol corresponds to the big hit, the big hit game for opening the big winning opening is started. When the big hit game is started, a signal indicating that the big hit game is started is transmitted to the data display device provided for each gaming machine. In the data display device that has received the signal, a process of adding 1 to the number of jackpots is performed, and the player is informed of the number of jackpot games.

  In addition, a signal indicating that the big hit game has been started is transmitted to the hall computer that manages a plurality of gaming machines set in the game hall via the data display device. From the gaming machine, in addition to the jackpot signal indicating that the jackpot game has started, the signal of the number of times the special symbol has started to change, the special symbol probability signal indicating the lottery probability related to the internal lottery of the special symbol, the normal symbol A game probability signal indicating a lottery probability relating to the operation lottery, a normal electric accessory operating signal relating to the operation of the start winning opening, and the like were output from the gaming machine (for example, see Patent Document 1).

  According to the above prior art, the information displayed by the data display device and taught to the player includes the number of changes in the special symbol based on the change number signal, the number of times that the jackpot game is performed based on the jackpot signal, It was the number of times that the lottery probability state related to the special symbol or the normal symbol based on the figure probability signal or the normal figure probability signal was changed. It should be noted that the normal electric actor operating signal is output only for performing an operation test of the ordinary electric accessory, and information using the signal is not taught to the player.

JP 2000-334151 A

  Here, there is known a gaming machine that sets an upper limit on the number of times that can be successively applied to a specific winning type among a plurality of winning types related to a special symbol, triggered by a winning in an operation lottery related to a normal symbol. Yes. In this type of gaming machine, in order to realize continuous winning of special symbols, it is necessary to execute the internal lottery of special symbols for the number of times of winning, and for the execution of the internal lottery, the normal symbol operating lottery It is necessary to win in. In addition, the number of prize balls that can be won during the opening operation of the ordinary electric component (variable starting prize device, starting prize opening) won by the lottery related to the normal symbol and won by the internal lottery related to the special symbol. The number of winning balls that can be obtained during the opening operation of the winning device is set.

  However, after an upper limit is set for the number of times that can be consecutively applied to a specific winning type as described above, the winning is performed in the operation lottery regarding the normal symbol, and the ordinary electric accessory (variable starting winning device, starting winning port) ), The number of prize balls is paid out, and at that time, it is assumed that the result of the internal lottery of the special symbol corresponds to a non-winning (missed) due to winning at the starting winning opening. That is, since the data display device does not perform the process of incrementing the number of big hits by 1, this indicates that the winning ball can be obtained without adding the number of big hits of the data display device. Therefore, there is a risk that the player may feel uncomfortable by not adding the number of jackpots to the winning of the winning ball, and the appearance of the data display device is not good, so The decrease could not be suppressed.

  Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to provide a technique for appropriately controlling control of a signal output to a data display device on which the number of wins is displayed, improving the appearance of the data display device, and suppressing a decrease in interest in games.

The present invention employs the following means in order to solve the above problems.
Solution 1: The gaming machine of the present invention performs the first lottery by the first lottery execution means for executing the first lottery and the first lottery execution means on condition that the first lottery trigger occurs during the game. The first symbol is displayed in a variable manner according to the result of the first lottery, and the first symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the result of the first lottery after the variation is displayed. When the result of the first lottery by the symbol display means and the first lottery execution means corresponds to winning, and when the first symbol display means is displayed in a winning manner after the variation display of the first symbol, First opening operation means for performing a first opening operation for changing from an inoperative state where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the mouth to an operating state that facilitates entry of the game ball into the winning opening; The game ball is moved forward during the first opening operation by the first opening operation means. The second lottery execution means for executing the second lottery different from the first lottery on the condition that the second lottery opportunity triggered by entering the winning opening is provided, and the second lottery execution means A second lottery is executed, a variation display of the second symbol preset according to the result of the second lottery is performed, and the second symbol is stopped in a manner corresponding to the result of the second lottery after the variation display The second symbol display means for displaying and the result of the second lottery by the second lottery execution means correspond to winning, and the second symbol display means stops display in a winning manner after the variation display of the second symbol In such a case, the second opening operation is performed to change from the non-operating state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the grand prize opening to the operating state in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the grand prize opening. 2 opening operation means and the first opening operation means by the first opening operation means. When the operation is performed, a winning number information external output unit that outputs information related to the execution of the first opening operation as winning information, and a transmission that transmits the winning information output by the winning number information external output unit to an external device And a gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, for example, the game proceeds in the following flow.
(0) When a lottery opportunity (for example, passing through the start gate) occurs during the game, an operational lottery (for example, a lottery corresponding to a normal symbol) is performed.
(1) When winning in the operation lottery of (0) above, the opening operation of the variable start winning device is performed, and it becomes easy to win a start winning opening provided in the variable start winning device.
(2) An internal lottery (for example, a lottery corresponding to a special symbol) is performed when a further lottery opportunity is generated by winning a start winning opening associated with the operation of the variable start winning device of (1) above.
(3) When winning in the internal lottery of (2) above and the special symbol variation of (2) is finished (for example, after the special symbol variation stops), to the big prize opening provided in the variable prize winning device An opening operation (e.g., an opening operation of the variable winning device) that facilitates the generation of a prize is performed. A so-called jackpot game (special game) is performed.
(4) Here, the privilege at the winning of the starting winning opening in the variable starting winning device is defined as a setting advantageous to the player. For example, the setting is such that a considerable number of prize balls can be acquired during operation of the variable start winning device. Therefore, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a gaming property of acquiring more winning benefits (outing) by winning a lottery with respect to a normal symbol that will operate the variable start winning device. Represents.

(5) When the opening operation of the variable start winning device is performed in (1) above, information regarding the opening operation is generated as winning information.
(6) The winning information generated in the above (5) is transmitted to a data display device (external device) that is provided outside the gaming machine and displays information related to the gaming machine.

  In this way, since winning information related to the opening operation that will open the starting winning opening that can obtain an advantageous winning privilege is output, a game related to an advantageous winning privilege is performed in the data display device that has received the winning information. Can be taught to the player. For example, when winning is performed in the normal symbol operation lottery, the variable start winning device is released and the winning information is output, and the data display device represents 77 times in the data display device based on the winning information, the variable starting winning device The player can be informed that a prize at the starting prize opening has been acquired 77 times throughout the game so far.

  In addition, even if it is not winning in the internal lottery of the special symbol due to the lottery opportunity that occurred at the starting winning opening with the variable starting winning device opened, winning information will be output, so Regardless of the prize bonus, the player is instructed the number of times that the prize bonus advantageous to the prize bonus can be obtained. Therefore, winning information is output to the outside by winning the lottery for the normal symbol that will operate the variable start winning device without being affected by the result of the lottery regarding the special symbol that will operate the variable winning device. Therefore, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is not won, the winning information taught by the data display device can be updated. In this way, it is possible to improve the appearance when teaching winning in the data display device because information is output for each winning of the normal symbol rather than outputting information for each winning of the special symbol in the past. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games.

  Solution 2: The gaming machine according to the present invention determines whether the solution 1 corresponds to at least a normal winning type or a specific winning type when winning is obtained in the second lottery by the second lottery executing unit. When the winning type determining means to be determined and the winning type obtained by the second lottery are determined to fall under the specific winning type by the winning type determining means, the second opening operation means ends the second opening operation. Later, the second lottery execution state executed by the second lottery execution means is higher in probability than the second low probability state in which the winning of the second lottery is obtained with a normal probability. The second lottery high probability state setting means for setting the second high probability state where the lottery win is obtained, and the winning type obtained by the second lottery is determined to fall under the specified winning type by the winning type determining means. If the second lottery operation is completed, the lottery probability state of the first lottery executed by the first lottery execution unit after the completion of the second release operation by the second release operation unit is determined with the normal probability. The first lottery high probability state setting means for setting the first lottery state in which the winning of the first lottery is obtained with high probability as compared with the first low probability state in which If the winning is obtained in the second lottery, and the winning type determining means determines that it corresponds to the specific winning type, it is performed after setting the second high probability state by the high probability state setting means. A continuous number setting means for setting the maximum number of consecutive times that can be continuously determined that the winning type determination means corresponds to the specific winning type every time the winning is obtained in the second lottery; The second high accuracy If the winning is obtained in the second lottery performed while being set in the state, and the winning type determining means determines that the winning type corresponds to the specific winning type, the consecutive number of times for each winning time The consecutive number subtraction means for subtracting and setting the remaining number of one by one, and the winning of the second lottery obtained while being set in the second high probability state, the specific winning by the winning type determining means If the number of consecutive times does not remain as a result of subtraction by the continuous number subtraction means for each winning combination, the winning type determination is determined for the winning obtained in the second lottery. By restricting the winning type that can be determined by the normal winning type, the second lottery executing unit executes the second lottery executing unit after the second opening operation by the second opening operation unit. A gaming machine further comprising second lottery low probability state setting means for setting a lottery probability state of two lotteries to the second low probability state.

With the above configuration, for example, the following flow is added to the game.
(7) When winning in the internal lottery of (2) above, the winning type (for example, winning symbol) is further determined. Here, the winning types are roughly classified into a normal winning type (for example, a normal symbol) and a specific winning type (for example, a probable variation symbol), and one of them is determined. When the winning type is determined, the variation of the special symbol is executed over a predetermined variation time.

(8) In addition, when winning in the internal lottery of (2) above and it is determined that the winning type is a specific winning type in (7) above, the lottery of the special symbol internal lottery after the opening operation of (3) above The probability state is shifted from the “low probability state” to the “high probability state”, and the lottery probability state of the normal symbol operation lottery is shifted from the “low probability state” to the “high probability state”.

(9) In addition, if it is determined that the winning type is a specific winning type in (7) before the lottery probability state of the internal drawing of the special symbol is still shifted to the “high probability state”, the first ( The number of continuous times (number of limiters) is initially set in the first). For example, the limiter count is set to 17 times.

(10) When the lottery probability state of the special symbol internal lottery shifts to the “high probability state” according to (8) above, and the winning type is determined to be the specific winning type continuously in (7) above, The number of consecutive times is subtracted every time. For example, the limiter count is subtracted from 17 times to 16 times. In addition, when the lottery probability state of the internal lottery of the special symbol shifts to the “high probability state” and the above (1) to (3) and (7) are repeated, the remaining number of consecutive times is gradually reduced by subtraction between them. Decrease. Also during this repetition, a prize bonus at the start prize opening defined in (4) and a prize bonus at the big prize opening are granted.

(11) When the lottery probability state of the special symbol internal lottery is “high probability state”, the above (1) to (3) and (7) are repeated, and the remaining number of consecutive times eventually reaches a specified value (for example, 0 times). Then, it becomes impossible to determine that the winning type is the specific winning type in (2) above, and the normal winning type is forcibly determined as the winning type.

(12) When the normal winning type is forcibly determined in (11) above, the lottery probability state of the special symbol internal lottery after the opening operation in (3) is changed from “high probability state” to “low probability state”. Is returned to.

  Thus, when the lottery probability state of the special symbol internal lottery is set to “high probability state”, the lottery probability state of the normal symbol operation lottery is also set to “high probability state”. Therefore, even if a lottery with a normal symbol that continuously activates a variable start winning device will be won, and even if a special symbol lottery is not won during that time, information will be provided for each winning of a normal symbol. Since the data is output, it is possible to improve the appearance when teaching the winning in the data display device, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

  Solution 3: The gaming machine of the present invention, in the solution 2, when the winning obtained in the second lottery is determined to fall under the non-special winning type belonging to the normal winning type by the winning type determining unit. A first lottery low probability state in which the lottery probability state of the first lottery executed by the first lottery execution unit is set to the first low probability state after completion of the second opening operation by the second opening operation unit. Setting means, wherein the first lottery high probability state setting means determines that the winning type obtained by the second lottery corresponds to the specific winning type by the winning type determining means, or the normal When it is determined that it corresponds to the special winning type belonging to the winning type, the first lottery executing unit executes the second opening operation after the second opening operation by the second opening operation unit. A gaming machine and sets the lottery probability state of one lottery to the first high-probability state.

With the above configuration, the following features are added.
When winning in the internal lottery of (2) above, and when the winning type is determined to be a special winning type (normal symbol 1) of the normal winning types in (7) above, the lottery probability status of the normal symbol working lottery Is set to “high probability state”. On the other hand, when winning in the internal lottery in (2) above and it is determined in (7) that the winning type is a non-special winning type (normal symbol 2) of the normal winning types, The lottery probability state is set to “low probability state”.

  Therefore, as long as the winner is won by an internal lottery of special symbols, and the special winner type or special winner type continues to be selected as the winner type, the above limiter count will not reach zero. This means that a winning privilege at the winning opening is continuously given. Therefore, since information is output for each winning of the normal symbol rather than outputting information for each winning of the conventional special symbol, it is possible to improve the appearance when teaching the winning in the data display device. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest for the.

  Solution 4: The gaming machine of the present invention uses the winning type determination means for the winning obtained in the second lottery performed in the solving means 2 or 3 while the first low probability state is set. When it is determined that it falls under the specific winning type, or when it is determined that it falls under the special winning type belonging to the normal winning type, the remaining number that teaches the remaining number of consecutive times within a range up to a predetermined upper limit value A remaining number display effect executing means for executing a number display effect; and when the winning is obtained in the first lottery during execution of the remaining number display effect by the remaining number display effect executing means, teaching in the remaining number display effect And a remaining number display effect content update means for subtracting 1 from the number of remaining remaining times and updating the content of the remaining number display effect.

With the above configuration, the following features are added.
When the lottery probability state of the internal lottery concerning the special symbol is changed from the “low probability state” to the “high probability state”, the remaining number by the display corresponding to the number of times to teach the player how many times remain A display effect will be started. In addition, the upper limit is provided about the frequency | count of teaching to a player, for example, a frequency | count smaller than an actual frequency may be displayed. Specifically, when the number of consecutive times is initially set to 17 for the first time (first time), display corresponding to 14 times is performed for the player. Therefore, while the number of times managed by the gaming machine is 17, the number of times that the player can recognize is 14 times.

  In addition, the remaining number display effect is a remaining number display subtraction effect that subtracts the number of times that the normal symbol is won by the operation lottery and the variable start winning device performs the opening operation every time the opening operation is performed. For example, when the variable start winning device is opened, a remaining number display subtraction effect that subtracts 1 out of 13 from an effect representing 14 times is executed, or is subtracted once every 6 times from an effect representing 7 times. The remaining number display subtraction effect is executed.

  Here, as described above, every time the variable start winning device performs an opening operation, winning information is output to the outside, and the number of times the data display device teaches winning is updated (1 is added). ). Therefore, since the update of the number of times of teaching the winning in the data display device and the update of the number of times in order to teach the number of remaining continuous times are executed at the same time, the remaining number of continuous times taught to the player Consistency can be maintained with respect to the number of times, and a decrease in interest in games can be suppressed.

  Solving means 5: The gaming machine of the present invention is characterized in that, in the solving means 4, the remaining number display effect content updating means performs the remaining number display effect during execution of the remaining number display effect by the remaining number display effect executing means. The number of continuous times set by the continuous number setting means or the continuous number subtracting means is satisfied from the remaining number of the continuous numbers taught in the remaining number display effect while satisfying a predetermined condition for updating the contents. When the remaining number is larger, the gaming machine is characterized in that the remaining number display effect is updated by adding at least one of the remaining number of continuous times taught in the remaining number display effect.

With the above configuration, the following features are added.
If there is a difference between the actual number of consecutive times managed by the gaming machine and the number of times the remaining number display effect is taught to the player, a predetermined condition (whether or not to perform the extra effect is drawn If the player has won the game, etc.), an additional effect is executed to increase the remaining number of consecutive times taught to the player by the remaining number display effect. For example, when the number of times managed by the gaming machine is 10 times and the number of times to be taught to the player is 5, an extra effect that increases the number of times to be taught to the player to 7 times is executed.

  Accordingly, even if the number of times taught in the remaining number display effect is subtracted by 1 when the normal symbol is won and the special symbol is not won and the remaining number of actual continuous times is not decremented by 1, When the above condition is satisfied, an extra effect is executed, so that the consistency of the remaining number of continuous times taught to the player can be maintained, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

  Solution 6: The gaming machine of the present invention is the game machine according to any one of the solutions 1 to 5, wherein the winning count information external output means is from the time point when the stop display in the winning mode by the second symbol display means ends. The gaming machine is characterized in that the winning information is output until a time when the winning of the game ball at the winning opening is valid.

With the above configuration, the following features are added.
When winning in the operation lottery regarding the normal symbol, the stop display is performed in the winning manner after the normal symbol variation display ends. When the stop display of the normal symbol in the winning mode is finished, the opening operation of the variable start winning device is started, but an opening time is provided until the variable starting winning device is opened, during which the win is won. An opening effect or the like for teaching the player what has been done is performed. Therefore, the variable start winning device is opened after the opening effect. In addition, after the variable start winning device is closed, a payout valid time is provided in consideration of the case where there is a game ball that can enter the start winning port in the variable start winning device. An ending time in which an ending effect or the like is performed after the winning effective time has elapsed is provided, and when the ending time ends, a series of opening operations of the variable start winning device ends.

  Thus, when the opening time set until the variable start winning device is opened, the winning information is output. Therefore, since the number of winnings taught in the data display device is updated at the start of opening (at the end of the stop display in the normal symbol winning mode), the data display is performed without giving the player a sense of incongruity. It is possible to improve the appearance at the time of teaching the winning in the apparatus, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Solution 7: The gaming machine of the present invention is the game machine according to any one of solutions 1 to 6, wherein the transmission means includes the winning information including information obtained by adding 1 to the number of winnings representing the total number of winnings in the gaming machine. A gaming machine that transmits to the external device.

  If it is the said structure, if a data display apparatus receives winning information, it can add 1 to the frequency | count of winning and can update a display. For example, if the number of wins displayed so far is “76”, the number of wins can be updated to “77” and displayed when the winning information is received.

  Solution 8: The gaming machine according to the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 6, wherein the winning is obtained in the second lottery. When it is determined by the type determination means that the specific winning type is determined, or when it is determined that the special winning type belongs to the normal winning type, the lottery probability state of the first lottery is the first high probability state. Further includes state transition information external output means for outputting, as state transition information, information relating to the fact that the winning obtained in the second lottery corresponds to the winning type to be set to, the transmitting means includes the state transition A gaming machine, wherein the state transition information output by the information external output means is transmitted to the external device.

  In the case of the above configuration, when winning in the internal lottery of the above (2), and when the winning type is determined to be a specific winning type (probable variation symbol) or a special winning type (normal symbol 1) in the above (7), After the opening operation of the variable winning device of (3), the lottery probability state of the normal symbol operation lottery is shifted from the “low probability state” to the “high probability state”. That is, it is determined that the game state is shifted to a game state advantageous to the player. When the special symbol stop display is completed in a manner corresponding to the winning type, state transition information is output. Based on the output information, the data display device determines the number of transitions to a gaming state advantageous to the player. The number of state transitions to be displayed is displayed. When the special symbol internal lottery is not won, the state transition information is not output.

  In this way, in the data display device, the number of wins related to the number of operations of the variable start winning device performed in the normal symbol winning and the number of state transitions in which the lottery state related to the normal symbol winning is shifted to the high probability state is displayed. The Rukoto.

  Solution 9: The gaming machine of the present invention is a state in which the first release operation is being performed by the first release operation means in any of the solution means 2 to 8, with respect to the currently played gaming state. That the second opening operation is being performed by the second opening operation means, or that the lottery probability state of the first lottery is set to the first high probability state. , If the special state confirmation means for confirming whether or not it is a special state satisfying at least one of the conditions, and when the special state confirmation means confirms that the current gaming state is the special state, Special state transition information external output means for outputting information relating to the special state as special state transition information, and the transmission means is output by the special state transition information external output means A gaming machine and transmits the special state transition information to the external device.

  If it is the above configuration, the winning state (the normal symbol is won and the variable start winning device is operating), the consecutive resort state (the normal symbol winning state is continuous), and the time shortened state (normal symbol lottery) An external information signal relating to the number of times of transition to a special state indicating that the game state corresponds to any one of the game states advantageous to the player (a state in which the probability state is a high probability) is output. The external information signal regarding the number of times of transition to the special state is transmitted to the data display device, and the data display device determines the number of times of transition to the special state and whether the current gaming state is in the special state based on the output information. Is displayed. In addition, since signals are not separately transmitted for the winning state, the consecutive resort state, and the time shortening state, the data display device is prevented from malfunctioning or the external information signal is handled (for example, the data display device and the pachinko machine). The signal connection method with the machine can be simplified. Also, the output port of the external terminal board in which only a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 8) is provided by combining each information related to the winning state, consecutive resort state, and time reduction state into one special state information. It can be used effectively without increasing the upper limit number.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the appearance of a data display apparatus can be improved and the fall of the interest with respect to a game can be suppressed.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows a game board unit independently. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of game board unit. It is a block diagram which shows the various electronic devices with which the pachinko machine was equipped. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an interruption management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a security management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a switch input event process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a normal symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a normal symbol game process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a normal symbol change pre-process. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of loss. It is a figure which shows an example of a hit time fluctuation pattern selection table. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a variable start prize-winning apparatus management process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a normal symbol operation condition setting table. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a special symbol memory | storage process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a special symbol game process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol change pre-processing. It is a figure which shows the structure row | line | column of the big hit stop symbol selection table. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol stop display process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of external information processing. It is a front view which shows an example of a data display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a normal symbol fluctuation frequency information management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a normal symbol winning number information management process. It is a figure explaining the output specification of the external information signal regarding the number of times of normal symbol winning. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of special state transfer frequency information management processing. It is a figure explaining the output specification of the external information signal regarding the special state transfer frequency (1/4). It is a figure explaining the output specification of the external information signal regarding the special state transition frequency (2/4). It is a figure explaining the output specification of the external information signal regarding the special state transfer frequency (3/4). It is a figure explaining the output specification of the external information signal regarding the special state transition frequency (4/4). It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a display output management process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a variable winning apparatus management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an end process. It is a game flow figure which shows the flow of the game by a pachinko machine as an example. FIG. 49 is a game flow diagram showing a game flow when the “limiter count” reaches the remaining zero. It is a conceptual diagram which classify | categorizes and shows the pattern of a game flow. It is a conceptual diagram which classify | categorizes and shows the pattern of a game flow. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of an effect performed at the time of normal symbol non-winning. It is a continuation figure showing an example of an effect performed at the time of hitting a normal symbol. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect performed at the time of variable start prize-winning apparatus action | operation. It is a continuation figure (1/2) which shows the example of the presentation performed at the time of special symbol change (within change time). It is a continuation figure (2/2) which shows the example of the presentation performed at the time of special symbol change (within change time). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the production performed at the time of special symbol change when not entering the chance zone. It is a continuation figure (1/14) which shows the example of the production performed during a chance zone. It is a continuation figure (2/14) which shows the example of the production performed during a chance zone. It is a continuation figure (3/14) which shows the example of the production performed during a chance zone. It is a continuation figure (4/14) which shows the example of the production performed during a chance zone. It is a continuation figure (5/14) which shows the example of the production performed during a chance zone. It is a continuation figure (6/14) which shows the example of the production performed during a chance zone. It is a continuation figure (7/14) which shows the example of the production performed during a chance zone. It is a continuation figure (8/14) which shows the example of the production performed during a chance zone. It is a continuation figure (9/14) which shows the example of the production performed during a chance zone. It is a continuation figure (10/14) which shows the example of the production performed during a chance zone. It is a continuation figure (11/14) which shows the example of the production performed during a chance zone. It is a continuation figure (12/14) which shows the example of the production performed during a chance zone. It is a continuation figure (13/14) which shows the example of the production performed during a chance zone. It is a continuation figure (14/14) which shows the example of the production performed during a chance zone. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect design management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an effect design change pre-process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the aftereffects management process of a normal symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the production | presentation process after a big character start. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a limiter number management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the limiter number management process at the time of limiter remaining number command reception. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a limit symbol number management process at the time of a special symbol shift. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the limiter number management process at the time of meter extinction presentation execution. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the limiter number management process at the time of a meter addition lighting production execution. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the limiter number management process at the time of meter maximum addition lighting production execution. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an addition limiter value reset process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of prefetch superimposition effect scenario setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of prefetch addition production | presentation lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of pre-reading addition Gase production | presentation lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of the main production | presentation management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the main addition production | presentation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the maximum addition production execution lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an addition production | presentation execution lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an effect setting process at the time of limiter arrival. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a meter effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a meter consumption effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a meter update effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a meter addition lighting effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a meter maximum addition lighting effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of meter prefetch addition production | presentation setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the time-shifting frequency | count information management process in another embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and a player borrows a game ball from a game hall operator to play a game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each game ball is a medium having a game value, and a privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, a game ball acquired by the player Based on the number of games, it can be converted into a game value. The overall configuration of the gaming machine will be described below with reference to FIGS.

[Overall configuration of gaming machine]
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (a plastic frame, a gaming machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the foremost side when viewed from the front facing the player. An inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is disposed so as to surround the outer side of the inner frame assembly 7.

  The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape. The outer frame unit 2 has a fastener such as a screw attached to an island facility (not shown) in the game hall. It is used and fixed. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for a portion corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and a metal material is used for a portion corresponding to the left and right long sides.

  The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the tray unit 6 is integrated at a lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island facility via the outer frame unit 2, and these operate in an openable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). An opening / closing axis of a hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

  A unified lock unit 9 is provided on the inner side of the right edge (the left edge in FIG. 2) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. Correspondingly, a locking tool (not shown) is also provided on the right side edge (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2. As shown in FIG. 1, in the state where the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly together with the locking device. 7 cannot be opened.

  A cylinder lock 6 a with a key hole is provided on the right edge of the tray unit 6. For example, when an administrator of the game hall inserts a dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. . If these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

  On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the locking of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 remains locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game hall can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the tray unit 6 is also opened to the front side.

  The pachinko machine 1 includes the game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. The integrated door unit 4 is formed with a vertically oval window 4a at the center thereof, and a glass unit (no reference numeral) is attached in the window 4a. The glass unit is a combination of, for example, two transparent plates (glass plates) cut in accordance with the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and this game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space in which a game ball can flow down is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface.

  The saucer unit 6 has a shape protruding from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to a player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. In the tray unit 6, a lower tray 6c is formed at the lower position of the upper tray 6b. The lower tray 6c stores game balls that are further paid out when the upper tray 6b is full. The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a so-called CR machine (model connected to the CR unit), and the game balls borrowed by the player are separately received from the payout unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize balls. 6b or lower pan 6c).

  A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When a player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a storage IC built-in medium, etc.) inserted in a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 degrees). (For example, 125) game balls are lent out. For this reason, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the remaining frequency of the valuable medium put in the CR unit is displayed on this frequency display unit. The player can receive the return of the valuable medium with the remaining frequency by operating the return button 12. Although the CR machine is taken as an example in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the CR unit) different from the CR machine.

  Further, on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, an upper dish ball removal button 6d is provided in front of the upper dish 6b in the upper position, and a lower dish ball removal lever 6e is provided in the center of the lower dish 6c. Is installed. The player can cause the game balls stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c by, for example, pressing the upper plate ball removing button 6d. Further, the player can drop the game balls stored in the lower tray 6c downward and discharge them by sliding the lower tray ball removal lever 6e to the left, for example. The discharged game ball is received by, for example, a ball receiving box (not shown).

  A handle unit 16 is installed on the lower right side of the tray unit 6. The player operates the handle unit 16 to operate the launch control board set 174 and can launch (shoot) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge portion of the game board unit 8 along the left edge portion, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the drawing) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown-in game balls flow down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill. The configuration of the game area 8a (board surface) will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

[Configuration of the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for production. Among these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decoration lamp 48, and the upper right electrical decoration unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decoration lamp 50. In addition, left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 are installed in the integrated door unit 4 so as to be connected to the lower part of the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the front surface of the tray unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46 and the left and right glass frame decoration lamps 48, 50, 52, and the like are arranged so as to surround the glass unit (no reference symbol).

  The various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above perform effects by, for example, the light emission of the built-in LEDs (lighting and blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.). Further, on the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, speakers on the glass frame 54 and 55 are incorporated in the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. On the other hand, an outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, voice, etc. (sound in general) and execute effects.

  In the center of the tray unit 6, an effect switching button 45 is installed at a position in front of the upper plate 6b. The effect switching button 45 has, for example, a combination of a push-type circular button and a rotary jog ring (jog dial) around it. The player switches the contents of the effect (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42) by pushing or rotating the effect switching button 45, or for example, while the symbol (ordinary symbol or special symbol) is changing, Various effects (notice effect, expectation suggestion effect, etc.) can be generated in accordance with various situations such as a fixed display per normal symbol and a game in a high probability state.

[Configuration on the back side]
As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a dispensing device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a dispensing control board unit 176. A back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer not shown) constituting the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), and the like are installed. The electronic devices will be further described later based on another block diagram (FIG. 5).

  The payout device unit 172 includes, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (no reference symbol), and the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. In this state, game balls replenished from a replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to a prize ball case through an upper prize ball basket (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

  The external terminal board 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device 270, a hall computer, etc.). From the external terminal board 160, the game of the pachinko machine 1 is performed. Various external information signals (for example, award ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start opening information, etc.) indicating the progress state and maintenance state are output to an external electronic device. ing. The specific contents of the data display device 270 will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  The power cord 164 secures a power source (electric power) necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power source device (for example, AC 24V) installed in an island facility of a game arcade. The ground wire 166 is also connected to a ground terminal installed in the island facility to secure the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

[Configuration of the board]
FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left part, a right part and a lower part with the effect unit 40 as the center. Further, in the game area 8a, the middle start gate 20, the right start gate 21, the normal winning ports 22, 24, 25, the variable start winning device 28, the variable winning device 30 and the like are distributed around the effect unit 40. ing. Among these, the middle start gate 20 is located in the center of the lower part of the game area 8a, and the right start gate 21 is located near the upper part in the right part of the game area 8a. In addition, the three normal winning holes 22 are positioned on the lower side of the left side of the game area 8a, and the other one normal winning hole 24 is positioned below the middle start gate 20. The remaining ordinary winning opening 25 is located on the right side of the game area 8a, and is located below the right start gate 21, and the variable winning device 30 is arranged directly below the right starting gate 21. The variable start winning device 28 is located on the lower side of the right side of the game area 8a and is arranged side by side to the right of the middle start gate 20.

  The game ball thrown into the game area 8a passes through the middle start gate 20 and the right start gate 21 in the process of flowing down, enters the normal winning holes 22, 24, 25 (wins), or The player enters (wins) a ball in the variable start winning device 28 during operation or the variable winning device 30 during opening operation. Note that the game balls flowing down the left area of the game area 8a may pass through the middle start gate 20 or may enter the normal winning holes 22 and 24 (win). The game balls flowing down the right area of the game area 8a mainly pass through the right start gate 21, enter the normal winning opening 25 (win), or operate the variable start winning device 28 and the opening operation. There is a possibility of winning (winning) a ball in the variable winning device 30 at the time. The game balls that have passed through the middle start gate 20 and the right start gate 21 continue to flow down in the game area 8a, but enter the normal winning holes 22, 24, 25, the variable start winning device 28, and the variable winning device 30 (winning) The collected game balls are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through through holes formed in the game board (plywood material, transparent board, etc. constituting the game board unit 8).

  In the present embodiment, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when a normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined stop display time in a winning manner), and accordingly. A ball can be entered (winning) into the start winning opening 28a (ordinary electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 has, for example, one open / close member 28b, and this open / close member 28b reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. As shown in the drawing, the opening / closing member 28b is in the closed position (closed state) along the board surface, and at this time, it is impossible to enter the start winning opening 28a (the starting winning opening 28a is closed). When the variable start winning device 28 is actuated, the opening / closing member 28b is displaced so as to fall forward with its lower end edge as a hinge, thereby opening the start winning port 28a (open state). During this time, the variable start winning device 28 is in a state in which the inflow of game balls is not impossible, that is, in an open state in which it is possible to enter a ball, and can generate an event (lottery opportunity) of winning a start winning opening 28a (variable winning) means). At this time, the opening / closing member 28b also functions as a member for guiding the inflow of the game ball into the start winning opening 28a. In addition, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically an aspect that does not extremely impede the flow of the game ball toward the variable start winning device 28 (start winning port 28a at the time of operation). However, the game ball does not necessarily flow into the variable start winning device 28 at the time of operation, but the flow is generated randomly.

  The variable winning device 30 operates when the specified condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed for the specified stop display time in a mode other than non-winning) and enters the big winning opening 30b. Enables a ball (winning) (special electric accessory). The variable winning device 30 has, for example, a pair of left and right opening / closing members 30a, and these opening / closing members 30a also reciprocate in the left-right direction along the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. That is, as shown by the solid line in FIG. 3, the left and right opening / closing members 30a are in the closed position with their tips facing upwards, and at this time, it is impossible to enter (win) the big winning opening 30b (game). (There is no gap through which the sphere can flow). On the other hand, when the variable winning device 30 is activated, the left and right opening / closing members 30a are displaced (expanded) from the closed position toward the open position, and the opening width is enlarged to the left and right to open the large winning opening 30b. During this time, the variable winning device 30 is in a state in which game balls can flow in, and can generate a winning (winning) to the big winning opening 30b (variable winning means). Here, similarly, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically an aspect that does not extremely impede the flow of the game ball toward the variable winning device 30 (the large winning opening 30b at the time of opening). However, the game ball does not necessarily flow into the variable winning device 30 (large winning port 30b) at the time of the opening operation, and the inflow is generated randomly.

  In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8 a, and game balls that have not won a prize are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out port 32. In addition, the game areas 8a including the game balls that have entered the normal winning holes 22, 24, 25, the variable start winning device 28 (start winning port 28a), and the variable winning device 30 (large winning port 30b) are driven into the game area 8a. All the game balls are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged out of the frame from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 through an out passage assembly (not shown), and further join a supply path of an island facility (not shown).

  FIG. 4 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (lower right position in the window 4a). That is, the game board unit 8 is provided with, for example, a normal symbol display device 33 and a normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a at the lower right position in the window 4a, and a special symbol display device 34 and a game state display device 38. ing. Among these, the normal symbol display device 33, for example, turns on two lamps (LEDs) alternately to display the normal symbols variably, and stops and displays the normal symbols when the lamps are turned on or off. The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 memory numbers depending on, for example, a combination of turning off, lighting, or blinking of two lamps (LEDs). For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are extinguished, a memory number of 0 is displayed, in a display mode in which one lamp is lit, a memory number of 1 is displayed, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two stored numbers are displayed, and in addition to blinking one lamp, the other lamp is lit, three stored numbers are displayed, and in the display mode in which the two lamps are flashed together, the stored number is four. For example, the individual is displayed. Here, although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a may be configured using four lamps (LEDs). In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps to be lit.

  The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a changes to the display mode after being incremented one by one in the sense of memorizing the occurrence of an operation lottery trigger each time a game ball passes through the start gate 20. Then, every time a change of the normal symbol is started with the passage (up to 4) as a trigger, the display mode is changed by one by one. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the game ball passes through the start gate 20 in a state where the normal symbol can already start to change (during stop display). The display mode does not change. That is, the memorized number (maximum 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a represents the number of passages at which the variation of the normal symbol has not started yet.

  Further, the special symbol display device 34 can display the variation state and the stopped state of the special symbol by, for example, a 7-segment LED (with dots) (symbol display means). Since one special symbol is used in this embodiment, it is sufficient to provide one 7-segment LED as the special symbol display device 34. However, as shown in FIG. By mounting, the same hardware configuration (integrated display substrate 89) can be applied to other models using two special symbols. In the present embodiment, the working memory lamp and the working memory number display device corresponding to the special symbol are not provided. One special symbol may be displayed by two 7-segment LEDs. In addition, the special symbol display device 34 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

  The game state display device 38 includes, for example, three LEDs corresponding to a high probability state display lamp 38c, a time-short state display lamp 38d, and a launch position designation display lamp 38e. In FIG. 4, other lamps (LEDs) not particularly denoted by reference numerals are unused (blank). In the present embodiment, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the special symbol display device 34, and the game state display device 38 described above are mounted on the game board unit 8 in a state where they are mounted on one integrated display board 89. It is attached.

[Other configuration of game board unit: see FIG. 3]
The effect unit 40 has an upper edge portion 40a that functions as a guide member that changes the flow direction of the game ball, and includes various decorative parts 40b, 40c, 40k, 40m, and the like inside. The decorative parts 40b, 40c, 40k, and 40m improve the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by three-dimensional modeling and, for example, emit transmitted light by a built-in light emitter (LED or the like), thereby performing a stunning operation. can do. A liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the effect unit 40, and various effect images including an effect symbol corresponding to the normal symbol are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. In this way, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the configuration of the board surface (design of a cell plate (not shown)) and the decoration of the effect unit 40.

  A ball guide passage 40d is formed at the left edge of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed at the lower edge thereof. The ball guide passage 40d is opened obliquely upward to the left in the game area 8a. When a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide path 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. Released onto the stage 40e. The rolling stage 40e is formed, for example, in two upper and lower stages, of which the upper stage is located at the back as viewed from the player and the lower stage is located at the front as viewed from the player. In both the upper and lower stages, the upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface. Here, the game ball can roll in the left-right direction. The game ball that rolls on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down from the lower stage into the lower game area 8a.

  An inflow passage 40g is formed at a substantially central position of the rolling stage 40e, and game balls can randomly flow into the inflow passage 40g from the upper rolling stage 40e. The inflow passage 40g is formed by extending the lower edge portion of the effect unit 40 downward and then bent in an L shape toward the front side, and a ball discharge port 40h is formed at the end thereof. The ball discharge port 40h is opened toward the front surface, and the opening position is located directly above the middle start gate 20. For this reason, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow passage 40g from above the rolling stage 40e is released from the ball discharge port 40h and easily passes through the middle start gate 20 directly below it (however, it does not always pass). .)

  In addition, the effect unit 40 is provided with a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, and the like) (not shown) together with a movable body 40f (for example, a heart-shaped ornament) for effect. The effect movable body 40f can execute an effect accompanied by an operation of a tangible object in addition to an effect using an image by the liquid crystal display 42 and an effect by a light emitter. Due to such an effect using the movable body 40f, an appealing power different from the effect using a two-dimensional image can be exhibited. A production example using the movable body 40f will be described later.

[Control configuration]
Next, a configuration related to control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices equipped in the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 that serves as the center of the control operation. The main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The main controller 70 is built in the main control board unit 170 described above.

  The main controller 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72 as a central processing unit is mounted. The main control CPU 72 includes a ROM 74 and a RAM (RWM) together with a CPU core and registers (not shown). ) This is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as 76 are integrated. The main controller 70 is equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77. Among these, the random number generator 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for the big symbol determination of the special symbol lottery or the normal symbol lottery, and the random number generated here is generated. Is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77. In addition, the main controller 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as an input / output (I / O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), a counter / timer circuit (CTC), etc., and these are circuited together with the main control CPU 72. It is mounted on the board. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or the inner layer portion).

  The middle start gate 20 and the right start gate 21 described above are integrally provided with a middle gate switch 78 and a right gate switch 80 for detecting the passage of a game ball, respectively. In addition, the game board unit 8 is provided with a start winning port switch 82 (detection means) and a count switch 84 (detection means) corresponding to the variable start winning device 28 and the variable winning device 30, respectively. Among these, the start winning port switch 82 is for detecting a winning of a game ball to the variable start winning device 28 (start winning port 28a). The count switch 84 is for detecting the winning of a game ball to the variable winning device 30 (large winning opening 30b) and counting the number. Similarly, the game board unit 8 is equipped with a winning port switch 86 for detecting a winning of a game ball to the normal winning ports 22, 24, 25. In addition, a common winning opening switch 86 may be used for all the normal winning openings 22, 24, and 26, or separate winning opening switches 86 may be provided for the normal winning openings 22, 24, and 25, respectively. Good. For example, separate winning port switches 86 are installed on the left and right and center of the board, respectively, and the left winning port switch 86 detects the winning of a game ball with respect to the normal winning port 22 located on the left side of the board, and the center winning port switch In 86, the winning of the game ball to the normal winning port 24 located in the center of the board surface is detected, and in the right winning port switch 86, the winning of the game ball to the normal winning port 25 located on the right side of the board is detected. Good.

  In any case, the winning detection signals of these switches 78 to 86 are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). In the present embodiment, the winning board detection signal from the middle gate switch 78, the right gate switch 80, the count switch 84, and the winning opening switch 86 is transmitted via the panel relay terminal board 87 due to the configuration of the game board unit 8. It has become a thing. The panel relay terminal board 87 is provided with a wiring pattern, a connection terminal, and the like for relaying each winning detection signal.

  The display operation of the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the special symbol display device 34, and the game state display device 38 described above is controlled based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, and 38 and the lamp 33a in accordance with the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. The display devices 33, 34, and 38 and the lamp 33a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on the single integrated display substrate 89 as described above. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 through the panel relay terminal board 87.

  Further, the game board unit 8 is provided with a normal electric accessory solenoid 88 and a big prize opening solenoid 90 corresponding to the variable start winning device 28 and the variable winning device 30, respectively. These solenoids 88 and 90 are operated (excited) based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72 to operate (open) the variable start winning device 28 and the variable winning device 30 respectively. The solenoids 88 and 90 also transmit control signals from the main control CPU 72 through the panel relay terminal plate 87 described above.

  Although not specifically shown, the game board unit 8 is also provided with a magnetic sensor and a vibration sensor. Among these sensors, the magnetic sensor detects a magnetic flux flying to the game board unit 8 at the installation position, and A detection signal corresponding to the density (magnetic intensity) is output. The vibration sensor detects an acceleration (vibration) applied to the game board unit 8 at the installation position, and outputs a detection signal corresponding to the magnitude. The detection signals of these magnetic sensors and vibration sensors are input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72) through the panel relay terminal board 87, for example.

  In addition, a glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the integrated door unit 4, and a plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the inner frame assembly 7. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened alone, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72), and when the inner frame assembly 7 is opened from the outer frame unit 2. The contact point signal from the plastic frame opening switch 93 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the integrated door unit 4 or the inner frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door open information signal as the external information signal.

  On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a payout control device 92 is provided. The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which a payout control CPU 94 is mounted. The payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 96 and a RAM 98 is integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

  In a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, a payout device substrate 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor). The payout device substrate 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. Yes. The payout device substrate 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (the payout control CPU 94), and pays out the designated number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let it come out. The paid-out game balls are sent to the tray unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

  Further, for example, a payout path ball cut switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. When a prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a count signal from the payout count switch 106 is input to the payout device substrate 100 each time. Further, when a ball break occurs at an upstream position of the prize ball case, a contact signal from the payout path ball break switch 104 is input to the payout device substrate 100. The dispensing device substrate 100 transmits the input count signal and contact signal to the dispensing control device 92 (dispensing control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual payout number and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device substrate 100.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a full switch 161, for example, inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the bowl as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) that are actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the flow path unit 173. When the upper plate 6b is full of game balls, As described above, it flows into the lower plate 6c. When the lower tray 6c is filled with game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned ON, and a full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, even if the payout control CPU 94 receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, it temporarily suspends further prize ball operations, and stores the unpaid prize ball remaining number in the RAM 98. Note that the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is cut off, so that even if a power failure (including momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the number of remaining unsold prize balls will not be lost. .

  On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with the firing control board 108. In addition, a ball feeding solenoid 111 is provided in the tray unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above, and the launch control board 108 is provided with drive circuits for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Among these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of sending out the game balls stored in the tray unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. Moreover, the launch solenoid 110 hits the game ball sent to the launch position, and performs the operation of firing game balls one by one continuously (intermittently) toward the game area 8 as described above. The game ball is emitted at intervals of, for example, about 0.6 seconds (within 100 per minute).

  On the other hand, the handle unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Among these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the operation amount (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. The touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the handle unit 16 (launching handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs a detection signal. The firing stop switch 116 generates a firing stop signal (contact signal) in accordance with the player's operation.

  The above receiving tray unit 6 is provided with a launch relay terminal plate 118, and each signal from the launch lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the launch stop switch 116 is sent via the launch relay terminal plate 118. Sent to. The drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal board 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the operation amount, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. Thereby, the strength of launching a game ball is adjusted according to the operation amount of the player. The drive circuit of the firing control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the firing stop signal is input from the firing stop switch 116. . In addition to this, the launch relay terminal plate 118 is connected with a lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, and when the above-mentioned CR unit is not connected to this lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, the launch is similarly performed. The drive circuit of the control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

  The tray unit 6 includes a frequency display board 122 and a rental / return switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with the display of the frequency display unit (7-segment LED for 3 digits). The lending / return switch board 123 has switch modules connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12, respectively. When the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lended and It is transmitted from the return switch board 123 to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connecting terminal board 120. Further, a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted from the CR unit to the frequency display board 122 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display unit based on the frequency signal, and displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium as a numerical value. If no valuable medium is inserted in the CR unit or the remaining frequency of the inserted valuable medium becomes zero, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display device to display a demonstration (of the valuable medium). (Display for prompting input) can also be performed.

  The pachinko machine 1 includes an effect control device 124 as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect accompanying the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which an effect control CPU 126 that is a central processing unit is mounted. The effect control CPU 126 includes a CPU core (not shown) and a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 128 and a RAM 130 as a main memory. The effect control CPU 126 can be of a type that is faster (high clock frequency) than the main control CPU 72 and has a wide data bus width (for example, 64 bits). The production control device 124 is provided at a position covered by the back cover unit 178 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The effect control device 124 is equipped with an input / output driver (not shown) and various peripheral ICs, as well as a lamp driving circuit 132 and an acoustic driving circuit 134. The production control CPU 126 performs production control based on the production command transmitted from the main control CPU 72, gives a command to the lamp driving circuit 132 and the acoustic driving circuit 134, and various lamps 46, 48, 50, 52 and the board surface. Processing is performed to cause the lamp 53 to emit light or to actually output sound effects, voices, or the like from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  The lamp driving circuit 132 includes a switching element such as a PWM (pulse width modulation) IC or a MOSFET (not shown). The lamp driving circuit 132 switches driving voltages (or duty switching) applied to various lamps including LEDs. ) And manage the operation such as light emission and flashing. In addition to the glass frame top lamp 46 and the glass frame decoration lamps 48, 50, 52, the various lamps include a decoration / production board lamp 53 installed in the game board unit 8. The panel lamp 53 corresponds to an LED incorporated in the above-described effect unit, or an LED incorporated in the variable start winning device 28, the variable winning device 30, or the like.

  The acoustic drive circuit 134 is, for example, a sound generator that includes a sound ROM, an acoustic control IC, an amplifier, and the like (not shown). The acoustic drive circuit 134 drives the upper speaker 54 and the lower speaker 56 to perform acoustic output.

  In the present embodiment, a glass frame lighting board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integrated door unit 4, and drive signals from the lamp driving circuit 132 and the acoustic driving circuit 134 pass through the glass frame lighting board 136 and various lamps 46. , 48, 50, 52 and speakers 54, 55, 56. In addition, the above-described effect switching button 45 is connected to the glass frame electric decoration board 136, and when the player pushes or rotates the effect switching button 45, a contact signal (during the push operation) or a rotation angle signal ( (At the time of rotation operation) is input to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame lighting board 136.

  In addition, a panel board 138 is installed in the game board unit 8, and a movable body solenoid 57 is connected to the panel board 138 in addition to the panel lamp 53. The movable body solenoid 57 drives the movable body 40f, for example, via a link mechanism (not shown). A drive signal from the lamp drive circuit 132 is applied to the panel lamp 53 and the movable body solenoid 57 via the panel illumination board 138, respectively.

  The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display screen through the substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8 is visible. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power source that is applied to a backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42. When an LED array is used for the backlight, an LED drive board (not shown) can be installed instead of the inverter board 158. Further, an effect display control device 144 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144. The effect display control device 144 is equipped with a display control CPU 146 that is a general-purpose central processing unit and a circuit board (effect display control board) on which a VDP 152 that is a display processor is mounted. Among these, the display control CPU 146 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as a ROM 148 and a RAM 150 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). The VDP 152 is configured as an LSI in which a semiconductor core such as an image ROM 154 and a VRAM 156 is integrated with a processor core (not shown). The VRAM 156 can use a part of the storage area as a frame buffer.

  The ROM 128 of the effect control CPU 126 stores a basic program related to effect control, and the effect control CPU 126 executes effect control according to this program. The production control includes production control using the various lamps 46 to 53, the speakers 54, 55, and 56, and the movable body 40f as described above, and the production by the image display using the liquid crystal display 42. Includes control. The effect control CPU 126 transmits basic information (for example, effect number) related to the effect to the display control CPU 146, and the display control CPU 146 that receives the information transmits a specific effect image based on the basic information. Control the display.

  The display control CPU 146 outputs a more detailed control signal to the VDP 152. Receiving this, the VDP 152 accesses the image ROM 154 based on the control signal, reads necessary image data therefrom, and transfers it to the VRAM 156. Further, the VDP 152 expands the image data in the frame buffer for each frame (still image per unit time) on the VRAM 156, and each pixel (for example, 24-bit color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 based on the buffered image data. ) Individually.

  In addition, a power supply control unit 162 is provided on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit. When external power (for example, AC 24V) is taken from the island facility through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V) can be generated therefrom. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Furthermore, power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and power is supplied to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. The low voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 162 is grounded (grounded) to the island facility through the ground wire 166.

  The external terminal plate 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) pass through the payout control device 92 to the external terminal plate 160. Is output to the outside. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are collected by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in a game hall. Here, the configuration via the payout control device 92 is taken as an example, but a configuration in which an external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal board 160 may be used.

  The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1. Next, control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 starts a reset start process. The reset start process restores the gaming state based on the backup information saved at the previous power shutdown (so-called power recovery) or conversely clears the backup information, thereby adjusting the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 Process. The reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing a stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

  6 and 7 are flowcharts showing a procedure example of the reset start process. Hereinafter, the process performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

  Step S101: First, the main control CPU 72 sets the top address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

  Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the vector-type interrupt mode (mode 2) and corrects the default RST-type interrupt mode (mode 0). Thus, thereafter, the main control CPU 72 can refer to an arbitrary address (however, the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute a designated interrupt handler.

  Step S103: The main control CPU 72 executes a standby process at reset. This process is for securing a certain standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) at the time of reset start (for example, power-on) and checking the main power-off detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the waiting time, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power-off detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power-off detection signal is input from, for example, a power monitoring IC that is a peripheral device. If the input of the main power-off detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter reaches 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the process from the beginning. As a result, for example, the system can be protected when a main power switch (not shown) is turned on and off repeatedly within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

  Step S104: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value in the work area is reset (00H). As a result, thereafter, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

  Step S105: Also, the main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of a mask register in order to set an interrupt mask. Specifically, a value for enabling the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

  Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the previously cleared RAM clear switch and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON). If the RAM clear switch is not operated (No), step S107 is executed next.

  Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not a backup validity determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed in the previous power-off process and the backup validity determination flag (for example, “A55AH”) is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

  Step S108: The main control CPU 72 executes a sum check on the backup information in the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sum-checks all areas of the work area of the RAM 76 (a user work area including a use-prohibited area and a stack area) except the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer. If the result of the sum check is normal (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup validity determination flag (for example, “0000H”).
Step S110: The main control CPU 72 clears the command waiting for transmission immediately before the occurrence of the previous power interruption.

  Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect control return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends a command for returning to the effect control device 124 (for example, a model designation command, a time shortening state designation command, a special symbol probability state designation command, a normal symbol operation memory count command, a remaining number cut counter remaining number). Command, special gaming state designation command, etc.). In response to this, the effect control device 124 performs the effect state that was being executed at the time of the previous power shutdown (for example, the effect state corresponding to the time reduction state, the effect state corresponding to the internal probability state, the display mode of the effect symbol, and the operation It is possible to restore the production display mode of the stored number, the sound output content, the light emission state of various lamps, and the like.

  Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes state return processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the gaming state (for example, the display state of special symbols, the internal probability state, Time reduction function operation / non-operation state, jackpot gaming state / non-hit gaming state, operation memory content, various flag states, random number update state, etc.) are restored. The main control CPU 72 restores the backed up PC register value.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated at power-on (step S106: Yes), when the backup validity determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or when the backup information is not normal. (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to Step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the use prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, the contents are erased.
Step S114: The main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of the RAM 76.

  Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs a command (command necessary for effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after the initial setting.

  Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes a payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command for starting the payout of prize balls to the payout control device 92.

  Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes CTC initial setting processing, and performs initial setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) that is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an interrupt vector register and sets an interrupt count value (for example, 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, when a CTC interrupt occurs next time, the main control CPU 72 can continue the processing from the program address of the PC register that has been backed up.

  When the above procedure is executed in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 7 (connection symbol A → A).

  Step S118, Step S119: The main control CPU 72 executes the power interruption occurrence check process after prohibiting interruption. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs bit check on the input port of the main power-off detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power-off (decrease in supply voltage). When the power shutoff occurs, the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 and the special winning opening solenoid 90, and the entire area excluding the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer in the work area of the RAM 76. Back up the contents and save the sum result value in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the valid value (for example, “A55AH”) in the backup validity determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops (NOP) the process. On the other hand, if the power shutoff does not occur, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S120. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU executes the process at the time of the occurrence of power interruption as a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) process.

  Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes an initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) initial values of various software random numbers. In the present embodiment, various random numbers (for example, a winning symbol random number, a jackpot symbol random number, a reach group) excluding a bonus symbol random number (hardware random number) corresponding to a special symbol and a winning symbol random (hardware random number) corresponding to a normal symbol. (Determined random number, reach mode determined random number, variation pattern determined random number, etc.) are generated on the program. Note that the reach group determination random number and the reach mode determination random number corresponding to the special symbol can be generated as necessary, and if not used, the random number generation process can be omitted. In any case, these software random numbers are updated by a loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 8), but each time the random number value makes one round in this process, the loop counter The initial value (not all random numbers need to be targeted) is changed. The initial value updating random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S120, the initial value updating random number is updated. Note that the reason why step S120 is executed after the interruption is prohibited in step S118 is that the same process is executed in another interrupt management process (step S202 in FIG. 8), and therefore overlap (conflict) ) To prevent the above). As described above, in the present embodiment, the big hit decision random number and the hit decision random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number generator 75, and the update cycle is faster than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms) ( For example, it is not necessary to update the big hit determined random number and the initial value of the hit determined random number.

  Step S121, Step S122: The main control CPU 72 permits the interrupt and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this processing are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among software random numbers. This process is performed in the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 8). The contents of the interrupt management process will be described later.

[Interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing)]
Next, interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing) will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of interrupt management processing. The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt management process every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request signal from the counter / timer circuit. Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the registers (accumulator A, flag register F, and general-purpose registers B to L) used during execution of the main loop in the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written in the registers (A to L) after the value is saved in the interrupt management process.

  Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a lottery random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the random number counter area of the RAM 76 and loops within a specified range. The various random numbers include, for example, jackpot symbol random numbers, normal symbol random numbers determined, and the like.

  Step S202: The main control CPU 72 executes the initial value update random number update process also here. The content of the process is the same as described above.

  Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes input processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from an input / output (I / O) port 79. Specifically, the detection signal from the middle gate switch 78 and the right gate switch 80 and the input state (ON / OFF) of the winning detection signal from the start winning port switch 82, the count switch 84, and the winning port switch 86 are read. .

  Step S204: Here, the main control CPU 72 executes a security management process. In this processing, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not to treat the ball as valid based on the input state (ON / OFF) of the winning detection signal read in the previous input processing (step S203) (the winning is valid). Whether or not there is) is determined (winning validity determination means). When the main control CPU 72 determines that the winning is valid, the main control CPU 72 retains a winning detection signal. However, when the main control CPU 72 determines that the winning is invalid, the main control CPU 72 generates an illegal winning error command or due to an illegal winning. The bit of the winning detection signal is rewritten from ON to OFF. In the security management process, the main control CPU 72 monitors for illegal acts by the above magnetic sensor and vibration sensor (not shown), and excessive winning or passing through the middle start gate 20 or the right start gate 21 occurs. It is determined whether or not. The details of the security management process will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S205: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous input process, events that occurred during the game based on the passage detection signal from the middle gate switch 78 or the right gate switch 80 and the winning detection signal from the start winning opening switch 82 And further processing is executed in accordance with each event that has occurred. The specific contents of the switch input event process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In this embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the start winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event serving as an internal lottery trigger (lottery trigger) corresponding to the special symbol has occurred. When a passage detection signal (ON) is input from the middle gate switch 78 or the right gate switch 80, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event that becomes a lottery trigger corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. If it is determined that any event has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes a process corresponding to each event. The processing executed when the passage detection signal is input from the middle gate switch 78 or the right gate switch 80 and the processing executed when the winning detection signal is input from the start winning port switch 82 are further different. This will be described later with reference to the flowchart.

  Step S206, Step S207: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol game process and a normal symbol game process during the interrupt management process. These processes are for specifically proceeding with the game in the pachinko machine 1. Among these, in the special symbol game process (step S206), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the special symbol described above, controls the variable display and stop display by the special symbol display device 34, The operation of the variable winning device 30 is controlled according to the display result. Details of the special symbol game process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In the normal symbol game process (step S207), the main control CPU 72 controls the variable display and stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and controls the operation of the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. To do. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (determined random number per normal symbol) acquired in response to the passage of the middle start gate 20 or the right start gate 21 in the previous switch input event process (step S205). In the normal symbol game process, a random number value is read from the memory, and it is determined whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (operation lottery execution means). When the random number value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol display device 33 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner, and after stopping the normal symbol in a predetermined hit state, the main control CPU 72 switches the normal electric accessory solenoid 88 on. Excitingly activates the variable start winning device 28 (lottery trigger generation operation means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a normal symbol stop display in a manner of deviation after the variable display. The details of the normal symbol game process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes prize ball payout processing. In this process, based on the winning detection signals input from the various switches 80, 84, 86 in the previous input process (step S203), a prize ball instruction command for instructing the number of prize balls is output to the payout control device 92. .

  Step S209: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above-mentioned external information signals (for example, award ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start-up port, etc.) to the game display data display device and hall computer through the external terminal board 160. Information etc.) is stored in the port output request buffer. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S210: The main control CPU 72 executes test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various test signals representing its internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, jackpot, probability variation function in operation, time reduction function in operation). These are stored in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main controller 70.

  Step S211: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a display output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting state of the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the special symbol display device 34, the game state display device 38, and the like. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer is output to the port in the previous special symbol game process (step S206) or the normal symbol game process (step S207). The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data to be applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode of performing symbol variation display, stop display, working memory number display, game state display, etc.).

  Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information processing (step S209) to the port. Further, the main control CPU 72 outputs the drive signals, test signals, and the like of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 and the special prize opening solenoid 90 stored in the port output request buffer together.

  Step S213: The main control CPU 72 executes effect control output processing. In this processing, it is confirmed whether or not there is a command (command necessary for presentation control) that the main control CPU 72 should transmit to the presentation control device 124 in the command buffer. Output port.

  Step S214: The main control CPU 72 clears the port output request buffer stored by the current CTC interrupt.

  In the present embodiment, an example is given in which the processing (game control program module) of step S206 to step S213 is executed as a timer interrupt processing. However, these processings are incorporated and executed in the main loop of the CPU. There is also a programming example.

  Step S215: When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 stores a value (01H) for designating the end of interrupt in the interrupt program counter, and ends the CTC interrupt.

  Step S216, Step S217: The main control CPU 72 restores the saved values of the registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. Thereafter, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

[Security management processing]
FIG. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the security management process executed in the interrupt management process. The contents of the security management process will be described below along with an example procedure.

  Step S220: First, the main control CPU 72 executes a winning validity determination process. In this process, for example, it is determined whether or not the winning is valid for the case where the input state of the winning detection signal read in the previous input process is “ON” (winning validity determining means). The validity determination is made for each of the start winning opening 28a and the big winning opening 30b.

[Significance of “entering ball” and “winning”]
Here, the meaning of “entering ball” and “winning” in the present embodiment will be described.
With respect to the variable start winning device 28 and the variable winning device 30, each “open ball” means that the game ball flows into the start winning port 28a or the big winning port 30b in an open state.

  When the game ball that has entered the ball passes through the through hole (detection unit) of the start winning opening switch 82 or the count switch 84, the winning detection signal of each switch 82, 84 is turned "ON", and the starting winning opening 28a or large This means that “entering ball” into the winning opening 30b is detected.

  However, some detected “entrance balls” are not appropriate. As an example in which the detected “pitch” is not appropriate, there is a case where a game ball flows into the variable start winning device 28 or the variable winning device 30 by some unauthorized means. For this reason, in the winning validity determination process (step S220), it is determined whether or not the detected “entering ball” is treated as effective for security.

  Then, when the main control CPU 72 determines in the winning validity determination process that the “winning” is treated as valid, the “winning” is generated for the first time, and the winning detection signals of the switches 82 and 84 are the following. It is still used as effective in the control process. On the other hand, if “entry” is detected, but the main control CPU 72 determines that the “entry” is not treated as valid (invalid), no “winning” has occurred in the first place. . In this case, the winning detection signals of the switches 82 and 84 are invalidated and are not used for subsequent control processing (lottery or prize ball processing).

  In this embodiment, for the sake of convenience, “determining that the detected“ pick ”” is treated as valid ”in the winning validity determination process is also expressed as“ determining that the winning is valid ”, and“ detected “ “Determining that“ entering ball ”is not treated as valid” is also expressed as “determining that the winning is invalid (invalid)”.

[Criteria]
In the winning validity determination process, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the winning is valid based on the following conditions.

[Effectiveness determination for the start winning award 28a]
(1) To the start winning port 28a detected during a series of operations related to the variable start winning device 28 (ordinary electric accessory) and during a period other than a period until a predetermined time (for example, about 4 seconds at the longest) elapses after the operation ends. It ’s not a ball.

[Validity determination for the big prize opening 30b]
(2) Entering the prize winning opening 30b detected during a series of operations related to the variable prize winning device 30 (special electric accessory) and during a period other than a period until a predetermined time (for example, about 15 seconds) elapses after the operation ends. Not a sphere.

  In the determination using the above condition (1), for example, the value of the normal game management status and the values of various winning valid timers are obtained in the interruption period in which the winning detection signal (ON) from the start winning opening switch 82 is input. Can be done with reference. When the condition (1) is satisfied, the main control CPU 72 determines that the “winning” to the start winning opening 28a is treated as valid, and the winning detection signal from the start winning opening switch 82 is also valid in the subsequent control processing. Used for. On the other hand, when the condition (1) is not satisfied, the main control CPU 72 determines that the ball entering the start winning port 28a is not treated as valid, and performs a process of invalidating the winning detection signal from the start winning port switch 82. Do. The normal game management status is internal information that is set on the control by the main control CPU 72 in accordance with the progress of the game corresponding to the normal symbol. The value of the winning valid timer is set in consideration of stagnation of the game ball (so-called ball biting) after the closing time of the variable start winning device 28 has elapsed (for example, about 2 to 4 seconds).

  The determination using the condition (2) is performed with reference to the value of the special game management status or the value of the winning valid timer in the interruption cycle in which the winning detection signal (ON) from the count switch 84 is input, for example. be able to. When the condition (2) is satisfied, the main control CPU 72 determines that the “winning” to the big winning opening 30b is treated as valid and effectively uses the winning detection signal from the count switch 84 in the subsequent control processing. To do. On the other hand, when the condition (2) is not satisfied, the main control CPU 72 determines that the winning ball 30b is not treated as valid and performs a process of invalidating the winning detection signal from the count switch 84. The special game management status is internal information that is set on the control by the main control CPU 72 in accordance with the progress of the game corresponding to the special symbol. The winning valid timer here is also set in consideration of the ball biting after the closing time of the variable winning device 30 has elapsed (for example, about 2 to 4 seconds).

  In the process of invalidating the winning detection signal, determination is made for each of the conditions (1) and (2) for each interrupt cycle, and the value of the invalid winning counter is incremented each time the winning detection signal is invalidated. When the value of the invalid prize counter reaches a specified value (for example, five) for each condition (1) and (2), the main control CPU 72 turns the illegal prize error flag ON (= 1) as internal information. As a result, an “illegal prize error” occurs in the pachinko machine 1.

  Step S222: When the above winning validity determination process is completed, the main control CPU 72 then executes a magnetic detection process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not there is an illegal act (so-called “magnet goto”) based on a detection signal from the magnetic sensor (not shown). As a result, when a magnetic flux corresponding to an illegal act is detected, the main control CPU 72 sets the security error flag to ON (= 1). As a result, another “security error” occurs in the pachinko machine 1.

  Step S224: The main control CPU 72 executes vibration detection processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not there is an illegal act (so-called “drilling”) based on a detection signal from the vibration sensor (not shown). As a result, when a vibration that is recognized as an illegal act is detected, the main control CPU 72 also turns on the security error flag.

  Step S226: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a winning excess detection process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning occurrences per fixed time (for example, 1 minute), and determines whether or not an excessive winning amount equivalent to an illegal act has occurred. If it is determined that the winning is exceeded, the main control CPU 72 also turns on the security error flag.

  Step S228: The main control CPU 72 executes a passage excess detection process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of occurrences of passage of the start gate 20 per fixed time (for example, 1 minute), and determines whether or not an excess corresponding to an illegal act has occurred. If it is determined that it exceeds the limit, the main control CPU 72 also turns on the security error flag.

  Step S230: The main control CPU 72 checks the values of the “illegal prize error flag” and the “security error flag”. When any error flag is set to ON (= 1) (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes the next step S232. If none of the error flags is set to ON (No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S232.

  Step S232: In this case, the main control CPU 72 executes error command processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates an error command (error state designation command) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 (effect control CPU 126), and transfers the value to the command transmission buffer. The error command can set a different value for each error that has occurred. For example, when the “illegal prize error flag” is ON, a value that can be identified as “illegal prize error” is set in the error command, and when the “security error flag” is ON, a value that can be identified as “security error”. Set to error command. The error command generated here is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subsequent effect control output process (step S213 in FIG. 11).

Step S234: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes an illegal winning mask process here. In this process, the main control CPU 72 rewrites all the winning detection signals determined to be invalid from ON to OFF, regardless of whether or not it is determined that the illegal winning error is determined in the previous winning validity determination process (step S220). As a result, the winning detection signal is treated as “OFF (no winning has been generated)” within the same interruption period, and the special symbol change, winning ball payout, etc. are not performed.
When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process.

[Switch input event processing]
Next, FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the switch input event process (step S205 in FIG. 8). Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the start winning port switch 82 corresponding to the special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S11 and executes a special symbol storing process. The specific contents of the special symbol storage process (step S11) will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S12.

  Step S12: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the count switch 84 corresponding to the big winning opening. When the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S13 and executes a large winning mouth count process. In the big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the variable winning device 30 every round during the big hit game. On the other hand, when no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

  Step S14: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a passage detection signal is input from the middle gate switch 78 or the right gate switch 80 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 and executes the normal symbol memory update process. Specific contents of the normal symbol memory update process (step S16) will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when there is no input of the passage detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 8).

[Normal symbol memory update processing]
Next, the normal symbol memory update process (step S16 in FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the normal symbol storage update process. Hereinafter, the procedure of the normal symbol memory update process will be described in order.

  Step S20: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the normal symbol operating memory number counter to check whether or not the operating memory number is less than the maximum value of 4. The working memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of random numbers determined per ordinary symbol stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. That is, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into four sections (for example, 1 byte each) for the normal symbols, and one random number determined per normal symbol can be stored in each section. At this time, if the value of the working memory number counter reaches the upper limit value (maximum value) (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 10). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter is less than the upper limit value (maximum value) (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21.

  Step S21: The main control CPU 72 adds one normal symbol operation memory number. The normal symbol operation memory number counter is stored in the operation memory number area of the RAM 76, for example, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the counter value added here, the lighting state of the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a is controlled by the display output management process (step S211 in FIG. 8).

  Step S22: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires a determined random number value per ordinary symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 described above. The random value is acquired by specifying the pin address of the random number generator 75. When the main control CPU 72 has a data bus width of 8 bits, the address designation is performed twice for each upper byte and lower byte. When the main control CPU 72 reads the determined random number value per ordinary symbol from the designated address, it saves it as the determined random number per ordinary symbol in the address of the transfer destination (random number storage area). Note that the determined random number value per symbol may be acquired from the hit random number counter area of the RAM 76, for example. In this case, when the main control CPU 72 reads the determined random number value per ordinary symbol from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it at the transfer destination address as a per-decided random number corresponding to the ordinary symbol.

  Step S23: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved determined random number per normal symbol to a random number storage area corresponding to the normal symbol, and stores it in an empty section in the area. The order (for example, first to fourth) is set in the plurality of sections. If all the first to fourth sections are empty at this stage, the determined random numbers are stored in order from the first section. . Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, the determined random numbers are stored in order from the second section. Note that the random number storage area is read in the FIFO format.

  Step S24: The main control CPU 72 executes a normal symbol effect command output setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs a setting for transmitting, for example, a normal design start sound control command to the effect control device 124. The main control CPU 72 may perform, for example, a prefetch determination process before this process. In this case, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the lottery is successful in the pre-reading determination process, and generates a normal destination determination effect command based on the result. And main control CPU72 can perform the setting for transmitting a universal destination determination production | presentation command with respect to the production | presentation control apparatus 124 by step S24.

  When the above procedure is completed or the normal symbol operation memory number has reached 4 (maximum value) (step S20: Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 10).

[Normal design game processing]
Next, the details of the normal symbol game process (step S207 in FIG. 8) executed during the interrupt management process will be described.
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the normal symbol game process. Normal symbol game processing includes execution selection processing (step S1001), normal symbol variation pre-processing (step S2001), normal symbol variation processing (step S3001), normal symbol stop display processing (step S4001), variable start winning device management. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S5001). First, the basic flow of the normal game management process will be described along each process.

  Step S1001: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects a jump destination of a process to be executed next (any one of steps S2001 to S5001). For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address and sets the end of the normal symbol game process in the “jump table” as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination differs depending on the progress of the process performed so far (the value of the normal game management status). For example, if the normal symbol has not yet started to be changed, the main control CPU 72 selects the normal symbol change pre-process (step S2001) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the normal symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the normal symbol variation processing (step S3001) as the next jump destination, and if the normal symbol variation processing has been completed, For example, the normal symbol stop display process (step S4001) is selected as the jump destination. In this embodiment, the jump destination address is specified by the “jump table” and the process is selected. However, apart from such a selection method, a “process flag”, a “process selection flag”, or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects a process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU CALLs each process in a single way, and at the top step, the conditional branch (continuation / return) is performed by referring to the flag one by one. However, in the selection method of this embodiment, the main control is performed. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

  Step S2001: In the normal symbol variation pre-processing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation for preparing conditions for starting the variation display of the regular symbol. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S3001: In the normal symbol changing process, the main control CPU 72 controls the normal symbol display device 33 while counting the change timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal is output to each of the two LEDs constituting the normal symbol display device 33. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, whereby a normal symbol variation display is performed. In this embodiment, since the two symbols are alternately lit and extinguished to perform normal symbol variation display, the drive signal pattern can be configured simply (for example, in two patterns), and the main control accordingly. The load on the CPU 72 can be reduced.

  Step S4001: In the normal symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the driving of the normal symbol display device 33. Similarly, an ON or OFF drive signal is output to each of the two LEDs, but the pattern of the drive signal is constant, whereby a normal symbol stop display is performed. In the present embodiment, among the two upper and lower LEDs, for example, a stop display at the time of winning is performed with the upper LED lit, and a stop display at the time of non-winning is performed with the lower LED lit. Yes (upper and lower logic may be reversed).

  Step S5001: The variable start winning device management process is selected when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning manner (for example, the upper LED is lit) in the previous normal symbol stop display process. When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a winning manner, in this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the variable start winning device 28 on the assumption that the operation condition is satisfied. The operating conditions for the variable start winning device 28 will be described later.

  While the variable start winning device 28 is in operation, the jump destination is set in the variable start winning device management process (step S5001) in the previous execution selection process (step S1001), and the normal symbol variation display is not performed. In the variable start winning device management process, the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 is energized a predetermined number of times (for example, once) so that the variable start winning device 28 operates in a set pattern, and the start winning port is set. It is possible to generate a prize for 28a (lottery opportunity generation operation means). In the present embodiment, the special symbol game process also proceeds with the occurrence of the winning at the start winning opening 28a. However, for the sake of convenience, the normal symbol game process will be explained in advance below. .

[Normal pattern change pre-processing]
Next, FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of normal symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S6100: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the normal symbol operation memory number remains (is greater than 0). This confirmation can be made with reference to the value of the normal symbol operation memory number counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes a demo setting process in step S6500.

  Step S6500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a demonstration effect command. The demonstration effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S213 in FIG. 8). When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the normal symbol game process.

  On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol operation memory number counter is greater than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S6200.

  Step S6200: The main control CPU 72 executes a normal symbol storage shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 reads a random number for lottery (normal random number determined per symbol) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 and stores it in, for example, another common storage area. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 sequentially reads the random numbers from the first section, and moves (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. Each random number stored in the common storage area is used for the operation lottery in the subsequent hit determination process.

  Step S6250: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a normal symbol operating memory number subtraction process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts one value of the normal symbol operation memory number counter stored in the RAM 76, and sets the value after subtraction to the “normal symbol fluctuation start operation memory number”. As a result, the display mode of the number stored by the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33 changes (decreases by 1) in the display output management process (step S213 in FIG. 8). When the procedure so far is completed, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S6300.

  Step S6300: The main control CPU 72 executes a hit determination process (operation lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets a range of normal symbol value and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (operation lottery execution means). The range of normal symbol values set at this time is different between the non-time shortened state (when the time shortening function is not activated) and the time shortened state (when the time shortening function is activated). In addition, since the range of the winning value is expanded, the winning probability of the operation lottery is set extremely high as compared with the non-time shortened state. If the random value read at this time is included in the range of the winning value, the main control CPU 72 sets the normal symbol winning flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S6400. In the present embodiment, the hit determination is performed by setting a range of the hit value on the program. However, the hit determination table is written in the ROM 74 in advance, and the hit determination is read and compared with the random number value. There are also programming examples. Further, the specific winning probability for each state will be described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S6400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) is set for the hit flag in the previous hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the hit flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S6404.

  Step S6404: The main control CPU 72 executes a stop symbol determination process upon disconnection. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the normal symbol display device 33. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol designation command and a lottery result command (at the time of loss) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S213 in FIG. 8).

  In this embodiment, since two LEDs are used for the normal symbol display device 33, for example, as described above, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is only the lighting display of one of the LEDs (lower side). The stop symbol number data can be fixed to one value. In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load on the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved. Such a way of thinking can be similarly applied to a case where a 7-segment LED is used for the normal symbol display device 33.

  Step S6406: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a deviation variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the fluctuation pattern number at the time of deviation for the normal symbol. The variation pattern number is used to distinguish the type of variation pattern or to define the variation time at that time, and is determined, for example, by random number lottery by the main control CPU 72. That is, in this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to, for example, a later-described variation pattern determination table and selects a variation pattern number corresponding to a random number per symbol (non-winning one) on this table. In the table, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern number (for example, 6.0 seconds to 180 seconds) is preset, and the main control CPU 72 acquires the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern number from the table. Can do.

  In the present embodiment, except for the case where the deviation reach fluctuation is performed, the fluctuation time at the time of deviation is set based on, for example, “the number of operation memory at the time of start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)” set in step S6250. . The variation time is set differently in the non-time shortened state and the time shortened state. In the non-time shortened state, the variable time is set based on the variation pattern number selected as described above, but is fixed in the time shortened state. A value (for example, 0.6 seconds) is set. The setting of the variation time for each state will be further described later using another drawing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery is a non-winning result, for example, a control that causes a “reach effect” to be generated and a “reach effect” to occur without causing a “reach effect” is performed. To do. The “variation pattern selection table at the time of loss” preliminarily defines variation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of effects such as “non-reach effect” and “reach effect”. One of the fluctuation patterns is selected from the inside. The reach production includes various reach production such as normal reach production, long reach production, super reach production, story reach production, and the like.

[Example of variation pattern selection table for loss]
FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an example of the deviation variation pattern selection table.
This selection table is a table to be used at the time of a loss (when it corresponds to non-winning) (variation pattern defining means, varying time defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “1” to “8” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  Fluctuation pattern numbers “1” to “5” correspond to fluctuation patterns that are out of reach without performing a reach effect, and fluctuation pattern numbers “6” to “8” are fluctuation patterns that are out of reach after reaching. It corresponds. Among these, for variation patterns 7 and 8 (variation pattern numbers “7” and “8”), a relatively long variation time (for example, 1 minute or more) is set, and is defined as “a specific type of variation pattern”. For example, a super reach effect that is relatively longer than a normal reach effect is executed. Note that such a variation pattern selection table is not used at the time of this process, but also in a prior determination process for determining whether or not to hit in advance before the variation (for example, when a game ball passes through the start gate 20). Used (same for big hits).

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “2” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

[See Figure 13: Normal symbol variation pre-processing]
The above steps S6404 and S6406 are control procedures when the hit determination result is out of order, but when the determination result is hit (step S6400: Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure.

  Step S6410: The main control CPU 72 executes a hit stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines a winning stop symbol number. However, in this embodiment, since a plurality of winning symbols are not provided for the normal symbol, the main control CPU 72 basically selects one type of stop symbol number at all times.

  Step S6412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a hit variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to a hit fluctuation pattern selection table to be described later, and acquires, for example, a reach group determination random number, a reach mode determination random number, and a fluctuation pattern determination random number from the counter area of the RAM 76, and based on those values. To determine the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol. In the game by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, basically, the hit reach variation pattern including the symbol effect is performed at the time of hitting the normal symbol, so the hit reach change pattern is finally selected here. In general, in the case of the reach fluctuation at the time of hit, the fluctuation time longer than that at the time of the normal fluctuation is determined. In addition to the acquisition of the reach group determination random number, the reach mode determination random number, and the variation pattern determination random number in step S6412, for example, the reach group determination random number, the reach mode determination random number, and the variation pattern determination random number may be acquired in the normal symbol memory update process (FIG. 11). In this case, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired normal symbol variation random number as a set with the winning random number in step S23 of the normal symbol memory update process. In addition, if the reach group determination random number, the reach mode determination random number, and the variation pattern determination random number are stored, it is possible to generate a notice effect based on the prefetching of the variation pattern before the variation using the stored contents. Is possible.

[Example of the variation pattern selection table for hits]
FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating an example of a hit variation pattern selection table.
This selection table is a table used when winning in a win. In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “13” to “20” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “13” to “20” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the reach effect is performed.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “14” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

[See Figure 13: Normal symbol variation pre-processing]
Step S6413: The main control CPU 72 executes a hit and other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (win symbol) by the normal symbol display device 33 based on the hit symbol number. However, as described above, since the stop symbol number is always one type in the present embodiment, the main control CPU 72 always determines one display mode (lights the upper LED on). The main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (winning time) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S213 in FIG. 8).

  Step S6414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes normal symbol variation start processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects the fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (out of time / hit), and sets the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets a normal symbol variation start flag in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a change start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This variation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the normal symbol game process.

[Figure 12: Normal symbol change processing, normal symbol stop display processing]
When returning to the normal symbol game process, the main control CPU 72 sets the normal symbol changing process (step S3001) as the next jump destination. In the normal symbol fluctuation processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the fluctuation timer from the register to the timer counter as described above, and thereafter, according to the passage of time (clock pulse count number or interrupt counter count number). Decrement the timer counter value. Then, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the timer counter and controls the normal symbol fluctuation display as described above until the value becomes zero. When the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the normal symbol stop display process (step S4001) as the next jump destination.

  In the normal symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the stop display of the normal symbol based on the stop symbol determined in the hit stop symbol determination process (steps S6404 and S6410 in FIG. 13). The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. If the stop symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the normal symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 deletes the symbol changing flag.

[Variable winning device management process]
Next, the variable start winning device management process will be described.
FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating a configuration example of the variable start winning device management process. The variable start winning device management process includes a subroutine group of a game process selection process (step S5101), an opening pattern setting process (step S5201), an opening / closing operation process (step S5301), a closing process (step S5401), and an end process (step S5501). It is the structure containing.

  Step S5101: In the game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects a jump destination of a process to be executed next (any one of steps S5201 to S5501). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable start winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation of the variable start winning device 28 has not been started yet, the main control CPU 72 selects an opening pattern setting process (step S5201) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the opening / closing operation process (step S5301) as the next jump destination, and if the opening / closing operation process has been completed, it closes as the next jump destination. A process (step S5401) is selected. When the opening / closing operation process and the closing process are executed, the main control CPU 72 selects an end process (step S5501) as the next jump destination. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Open pattern setting process]
Step S5201: In the opening pattern setting process, the main control CPU 72 sets, for example, an operating time (opening time) and the number of operations (opening frequency) as the opening pattern of the variable start winning device 28. In the present embodiment, the operating time and the number of operations of the variable start winning device 28 are set in common in both the non-time shortening state and the time shortening state. The main control CPU 72 sets an opening / closing operation process (step S5301) as the next jump destination.

  Step S5301: In the next opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 drives the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 212 based on the operation time set in the previous step S5201. Thus, the variable start winning device 28 is actually actuated (opened). The main control CPU 72 sets a closing process (step S5401) as the next jump destination.

  Step S5401: In the closing process, the main control CPU 72 counts the elapsed operating time based on the timer counter value. When the value of the timer counter becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 switches the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 212 to the non-operating state (OFF). Then, the main control CPU 72 sets an end process (step S5501) as the next jump destination.

  Step S5501: In the end process, the main control CPU 72 sets conditions for ending the operation of the variable start winning device 28. For example, the main control CPU 72 resets the value (01H) of the ordinary electric accessory operation flag. The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1001 in FIG. 12) in the normal symbol game process to the normal symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable start winning device management process.

[Normal symbol operating condition setting table]
FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a normal symbol operating condition setting table. In this normal symbol operating condition setting table, the normal symbol hit probability and variation time are set differently in the non-time shortened state (during normal time) and the time shortened state (during time short), and the variable start winning device 28 for hitting is set. This is for setting an opening pattern (operation time and number of operations).

  As shown in the upper part excluding the heading line in FIG. 17, in this embodiment, in the operation lottery performed in the non-time shortening state (when the time shortening function is not operated), a normal hit probability (for example, 1 / 99) applies. In addition, for the normal symbol variation display performed in the non-time shortened state, the variation time set using the normal symbol variation random number as described above is applied.

  On the other hand, as shown in the lower part excluding the heading row in FIG. 17, in the operation lottery performed in the time shortening state (when the time shortening function is activated), a higher hit probability (for example, 98 / 99≈1 / 1.01) applies. Thereby, in the time shortening state, the operation lottery is won (the operation condition is satisfied) more frequently than in the non-time shortening state, so that the variable start winning device 28 is more likely to be won. Further, for the normal symbol variation display performed in the time shortening state, a fixed variation time (for example, 0.6 seconds) set in advance as described above is applied. However, in this embodiment, the operating time is set to be common (for example, 6.0 seconds) in both the non-time shortened state and the time shortened state, and the number of times of operation (one time) is also set in common. ing.

  The above is the outline of the control method for operating the operation lottery and variable start winning device 28 performed through the normal symbol game process (step S207 in FIG. 8). Next, a special symbol storing process (step S11 in FIG. 10) accompanying the winning to the variable start winning device 28 (start winning port 28a) and a special symbol game process (in FIG. 8) that proceeds with the occurrence of the winning. The contents of step S206) will be described.

[Special symbol memory processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special symbol storing process. Hereinafter, the special symbol storage process will be described along with a procedure example.

  Step S30: First, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the special game management status is “00H”. The special game management status is separately set by the main control CPU 72 as follows according to the progress of the game corresponding to the special symbol.

[Special Game Management Status]
That is, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the special game management status (in the brackets) according to the game progress statuses (1) to (8) corresponding to the special symbol as follows, for example.
(1) Special symbol change waiting state: “00H”
(2) Special symbol fluctuation display state: “01H”
(3) Special symbol stop display state: “02H”
(4) Variable winning device (special electric accessory) waiting to be opened: “03H”
(5) Variable winning device (special electric accessory) open state: “04H”
(6) Variable winning device (special electric accessory) Closed after opening: “05H”
(7) Variable winning device (special electric accessory) closed state: “06H”
(8) Variable winning device (special electric accessory) during operation end state: “07H”

  When the value of the special game management status is other than “00H”, that is, when the current game progress status is other than the special symbol change waiting state (00H) (step S30: No), the main control CPU 72 performs switch input event processing (FIG. Return to 10). On the other hand, if the value of the special game management status is “00H” (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S32.

  Step S32: The main control CPU 72 obtains the jackpot determined random number value from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 described above. The random value is acquired by specifying the pin address of the random number generator 75. When the main control CPU 72 has a data bus width of 8 bits, the address designation is performed twice for each upper byte and lower byte. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determined random number value from the designated address, it saves it as a jackpot determined random number at the address of the transfer destination (random number storage area).

  Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a big hit symbol random number value from the big hit symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The acquisition of the random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, it saves it as a jackpot symbol random number at the transfer destination address.

  Step S34: Further, the main control CPU 72 acquires, for example, a variation pattern determination random number from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 as a random value related to the variation condition of the special symbol. Similarly, the acquisition of the random number value is performed by designating the address of the random number counter area for variation. When the main control CPU 72 acquires the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it in the transfer destination address.

  Step S36: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number and the variation pattern determination random number to a random number storage area corresponding to the special symbol (at this time, an empty state), and stores these random numbers as a set. .

  Step S38: The main control CPU 72 executes a production command output setting process for the special symbol. This process is for performing setting for transmitting a start opening winning tone control command to the effect control device 124, for example.

  When the above procedure is completed or the special symbol operation memory has already been stored (step S30: Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 10).

[Special design game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game process executed in the interrupt management process (FIG. 8) will be described.
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the special symbol game process. The special symbol game process includes an execution selection process (step S1000), a special symbol change pre-process (step S2000), a special symbol change process (step S3000), a special symbol stop display process (step S4000), and a variable winning device management process. This is a configuration including a subroutine (program module) group of (Step S5000). First, the basic flow of the special symbol game process will be described along each process.

  Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S2000 to S5000) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special symbol game process as the return destination address in the stack pointer.

  Which process is selected as the next jump destination differs depending on the progress of the process performed so far (special game management status). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started changing display (special game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol change pre-processing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol change pre-processing has already been completed (special game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol changing process. Is completed (special game management status: 02H), the special symbol stop display in-progress process (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In this embodiment, the jump destination address is specified by the “jump table” and the process is selected. However, apart from such a selection method, a “process flag”, a “process selection flag”, or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects a process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU CALLs each process in a single way, and at the top step, the conditional branch (continuation / return) is performed by referring to the flag one by one. However, in the selection method of this embodiment, the main control is performed. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

  Step S2000: In the special symbol variation pre-processing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation to prepare conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbol. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S3000: In the special symbol variation processing, the main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol display device 34 while counting the variation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (0th to 7th) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, whereby a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  Step S4000: In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the special symbol display device 34. Similarly, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED. However, the pattern of the drive signal is constant, whereby a special symbol is stopped and displayed. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the “limiter count” for the probability variation function or performs a subtraction process. The specific contents of the process and the significance of the “limiter count” will be further described later.

  Step S5000: The variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning mode (a mode other than non-winning) in the previous special symbol stop display process. For example, when a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a big hit mode, an opportunity to shift to a big hit gaming state (a special gaming state advantageous to the player) occurs. During the big hit game, the jump destination is set in the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the special symbol variation display is not performed. In the variable winning device management process, the large winning opening solenoid 90 is excited for a certain period of time (for example, up to 6.0 seconds or until one winning is counted) for a predetermined number of continuous operations (for example, twice). As a result, the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern (variable winning means). During this period, the game ball is entered (winned) into the variable prize winning device 30, thereby giving the player an opportunity to win a prize ball (for example, 6 prize balls are paid out for one prize). (Winning privilege grant means). Note that the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30 at the time of a big hit is referred to as “round”, and if the number of continuous operations is two, these may be collectively referred to as “2 rounds”. However, in this embodiment, since the opening time per time is relatively short (6.0 seconds) and the number of counts in one round is the minimum (for example, one), the general 15 rounds Compared with big hits (for example, 1 round 29 seconds open, number of counts 9), the number of prize balls that can be obtained with one big hit (2 rounds) is smaller.

  In any case, when the main control CPU 72 sets the large winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the variable winning device management process, the variable winning device 30 for one round Each time the release operation is completed, the value of the round number counter is incremented by one. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example. When the value of the round counter reaches the set number of continuous operations (in this example, 2 times), the main control CPU 72 ends the big hit game (main role) only for that round.

  When the big hit game (opening operation of the variable winning device 30) is finished, the main control CPU 72 determines the state (high probability state) after the big hit game based on the game state flag (probability changing function operating flag or time shortening function operating flag). , Change the time reduction state). In the “high probability state”, the probability variation function operates, and the winning probability in the internal lottery becomes higher than usual (high probability state transition means). In the present embodiment, even if the probability variation function is in a “low probability state” in which the probability variation function is not activated, the winning probability in the internal lottery is set to a high value of about one half (for example, about 32768/65536). When shifting to the “high probability state” from here, the winning probability is set to a higher probability (for example, about 65535/65536).

  Also, in the “time reduction state”, the time reduction function is activated and the normal symbol operation lottery has a high probability (for example, 1/99 → 98/99), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is reduced. It is set (for example, fixed at about 0.6 seconds). In addition, the variation time of the special symbol is also set to be shorter than the non-time shortened state (for example, fixed at about 0.6 seconds). Note that the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state” may be transferred to only one of them in terms of control, or may be transferred in accordance with both of them. Also, regarding the mechanism of internal state change such as “low probability state” or “high probability state”, “non-time shortening state” or “time shortening state”, the winning symbol (winning type) of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 1 This will be further described later together with the game system.

[Special symbol change pre-treatment]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not there is a special symbol operation memory in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Alternatively, the main control CPU 72 may refer to the value of the working memory number counter to confirm whether the working memory number corresponding to the special symbol is other than 0 (= 1). Note that the operation memory of the special symbol is generated when a winning is made to the variable start winning device 28 (start winning port 28a) in the switch input event process as described above. At this time, if it is confirmed that there is no working memory of the special symbol that should start changing (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process (FIG. 19). On the other hand, when it is confirmed that there is a special symbol working memory (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2300.

  Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit determination process (internal lottery). In this process, first, the main control CPU 72 reads a lottery random number (a jackpot determined random number, a jackpot symbol random number) stored in a random number storage area of the RAM 76. The read random number is stored, for example, in another temporary storage area, and the working memory is erased (consumed) from the random number storage area. Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a range of the big hit value and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (internal lottery execution means). The range of the jackpot value set at this time is different between the low probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated). In any case, if the random value read at this time is included in the range of the big hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the big hit flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400.

  Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) is set for the big hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2404.

  Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes an off-time stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the special symbol display device 34. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of loss) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S213 in FIG. 8).

  In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the special symbol display device 34, for example, the display pattern of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is always set to display only one segment (center bar “-”). The stop symbol number data can be fixed to one value (for example, 64H). In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load on the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

  Step S2406: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a deviation variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the fluctuation pattern number at the time of deviation for the special symbol. The variation pattern number is used to distinguish the variation display type (pattern) of the special symbol or to correspond to the variation time required for the variation display. Since the fluctuation time at the time of loss differs depending on whether or not it is the above “time reduction state”, in this process, the main control CPU 72 loads the gaming state flag and the current state is “time reduction state”. Check if it exists. In the “time shortening state”, the fluctuation time at the time of deviation is basically set to a shortened time (for example, about 0.6 seconds). If it is not “time shortening state”, the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is determined based on, for example, a fluctuation pattern determination random number. Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined variation time (at the time of disconnection) in the variation timer and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

  The above steps S2404 and S2406 are control procedures when the big hit determination result is out of place (in the case other than non-winning), but when the determination result is big hit (step S2400: Yes), the main control CPU 72 performs the following procedure. Run. In this embodiment, even in the low probability state, the winning probability is a high value of 1/2, and even in the low probability state, the following processing is selected once every two times at the time of change.

  Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the current winning symbol type (successful symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table. For this reason, the main control CPU 72 can determine the type of winning symbol based on the big hit symbol random number from the stored contents by referring to the big hit symbol stop selection table in the big hit symbol stop determination process.

  Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit hour variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number read in the previous step S2300. The main control CPU 72 sets the determined variation time value in the variation timer, and sets the stop display time value in the stop symbol display timer. The fluctuation time at the time of big hit also differs depending on whether or not the above-mentioned “time reduction state”. Therefore, the main control CPU 72 loads the gaming state flag and checks whether or not the current state is the “time reduction state”. In the “time shortening state”, the fluctuation time is basically set to a shortened time (for example, about 0.6 seconds) even at the big hit time. If it is not “time shortening state”, a variation pattern corresponding to a certain long variation time (for example, about 30 seconds to 90 seconds) is set in order to secure a time for performing the effect during variation at the time of big hit. Further, in this embodiment, even when the “non-time shortened state” is off, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to a certain long fluctuation time is set in order to execute “out of reach reach” during the fluctuation of the special symbol. The In any case, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of big hit) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of big hit in the stop symbol display timer.

  Step S2413: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the value of the probability variation function activation flag (for example, as a gaming state flag) when the type of winning symbol (hit stop symbol number) determined in the previous step S2410 corresponds to any probability variation symbol, for example. 01H) is set in the flag area of the RAM 76, and a count counter value (for example, 10,000 times) is set together. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value (01H) of the time shortening function operation flag as the gaming state flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 when the time shortening function operation count corresponding to the winning symbol determined at that time is added. At the same time, the count counter value (100 times or 10,000 times) is set. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a time shortening function operation number command (or a count cut counter number command) based on the value of the time shortening function operation number added corresponding to the winning symbol. The time reduction function activation number command generated here is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. The addition of the type of winning symbol and the number of times the time shortening function is activated will be described later with a specific example.

  In step S2413, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the special symbol display device 34 based on the big hit time stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of the big hit) together with the stop symbol command (at the time of the big hit). The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes special symbol variation start processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects the fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (out of time / hit), and sets the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the stop symbol display time corresponding to the variation pattern in the display timer. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets a special symbol variation start flag in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a change start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This variation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Fig. 19: Special symbol change processing, special symbol stop display processing]
In the special symbol fluctuation processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the fluctuation timer from the register to the timer counter as described above, and then the timer according to the passage of time (clock pulse count number or interrupt counter value). Decrement the counter value. The main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol variation display as described above until the value becomes 0 while referring to the value of the timer counter. When the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display in-progress process (step S4000) as the next jump destination.

  In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol stop display based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (steps S2404 and S2410 in FIG. 20). The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the stop symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 deletes the symbol changing flag. The special symbol stop display in-progress process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

[Winning pattern at the time of big hit]
Next, the types of winning symbols determined in the previous big hit stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 20) will be described. In this embodiment, the following three types are roughly prepared as winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a big hit. The three types of breakdown are, for example, “2-round normal symbol 1”, “2-round probability variable symbol 1”, and “2-round probability variable symbol 2”. In the present embodiment, since winning symbols having different numbers of rounds are not provided, hereinafter, the number of rounds is not described, and “normal symbol 1”, “probability variation symbol 1”, “probability variation symbol 2”, and the like are appropriately omitted. . Moreover, these are only preferable examples, and the above three types of winning symbols are not exhaustive.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a configuration column of the big hit stop symbol selection table. The main control CPU 72 can determine the type of winning symbol with reference to the big hit stopping symbol selection table shown in FIG. 21 in the previous big hit stopping symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 20) (winning type) Decision means). Further, the main control CPU 72 can determine the number of times the time shortening function is activated according to the determined gaming state (non-time shortening state, time shortening state, low probability state, high probability state) for each determined winning symbol.

  In the big hit stop symbol selection table shown in FIG. 21, the leftmost column shows the distribution value for each winning symbol, and each of the distribution values “2”, “55”, and “43” indicates the denominator. This corresponds to a ratio (selection ratio) when 100 is set. In the second column from the left, “normal symbol 1”, “probability variation symbol 1” and “probability variation symbol 2” corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of the big win in the internal lottery, the ratio that “normal symbol 1” is selected is 2/100 (= 2%), and the rate that “probable variation 1” is selected is 55/100 ( = 55%), and the rate at which “probability pattern 2” is selected is 43/100 (= 43%). The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using a jackpot symbol random number. Here, “normal symbol 1” is a winning symbol (non-probable variation symbol) that does not activate the probability variation function after the big hit. Therefore, in this embodiment, the selection ratio of the probability variation symbol is 98% as a whole, and the “probability variation symbol” is selected at a very high ratio at the time of big hit.

[First-time limiter]
Next, in the table shown in FIG. 21, the third column from the left shows the number of times (upper limit number) of “first limiters” set for each winning symbol at the time of big hit. “Initial limiter” is set when it corresponds to either “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2”. In this embodiment, for “probability variation symbol 1” and “probability variation symbol 2” Is also “17 times”. Of course, the “first limiter” is not set for “normal symbol 1” (indicated as “none” in the figure).

[Time reduction function operation count (time reduction count)]
Next, a description will be given of the difference in the number of times the time shortening function is activated, which is added for each winning symbol (winning type) and each winning state. In the present embodiment, the three types of winning symbols described above differ in the number of times the time shortening function is activated depending on the state at the time of winning. This will be specifically described below.

(1) Low probability non-short-time medium As shown in the third column from the left in FIG. 21, the special symbol (internal lottery) is “low probability state” and the normal symbol (operation lottery) is “non-probable”. It is assumed that the time is in a “time shortening state” (normal time that is neither probabilistic nor time-saving). In this case, when the winning symbol corresponds to “normal symbol 1”, 100 times of the time shortening function activation number are added. In addition, when it corresponds to "normal symbol 1", the state after the big hit ends becomes a "low probability state".

  Further, when the winning symbol corresponds to either “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2”, 10,000 times of time reduction function activation times are added. It should be noted that the state after the jackpot is a “high probability state” regardless of whether the “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” is met.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when winning in the internal lottery corresponding to the special symbol from the low probability non-short time (probability of 1/2), it becomes “time reduction state” after the end of the big hit game regardless of the winning symbol. . Therefore, the state does not shift to the “high probability non-short-to-medium” state, and is always in the “time reduction state” after the big hit. Further, the difference in the number of time reductions added in the “time reduction state (short time and medium)” is set as follows.

[Limiter count setting]
First, in the present embodiment, with respect to the special symbol (internal lottery), the internal state at the time of winning is “low probability state”, and from there, winning either “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” (first winning) Then, as described above, the “limiter count (initial limiter)” is set (continuous count setting means). This “limiter count” is a limit (continuous count) that can be determined continuously when the main control CPU 72 corresponds to either “probability variation 1” or “probability variation 2” when winning in the “high probability state”. Means.

[Selection of initial limiter count]
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, “17 times” is selected as described above when setting the “number of limiters (initial limiter)”. This selection can be determined depending on whether the “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” is met when winning from the “low probability state”. That is, when winning (first winning) with either “probability changing symbol 1” or “probability changing symbol 2” from “low probability state”, in the special symbol stop display processing (step S4000 in FIG. 19), When the “limiter (limiter number)” is set, 17 times (including the first time) are selected (continuous number selection means).

[Subtraction of limiter count]
In any case, the “limiter count (first limiter)” set at the first hit from the “low probability state” is the “probability pattern 1” or “probability pattern 2” following the winning in the “high probability state”. 1 (other than “normal symbol 1”), one is subtracted each time, and the remaining number decreases. However, while the “limiter count” does not reach the remaining zero (there is one or more remaining), the main control CPU 72 performs the “high probability state” in the previous big hit stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 20). It is possible to determine that it corresponds to either “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” continuously when winning. Therefore, first, a case where there is one or more remaining “limiter count” (before reaching the limiter) will be described.

(2) High probability before and after reaching the limiter For example, as shown in the third column from the right in FIG. 21, the special symbol (internal lottery) is “high probability state” and the normal symbol ( It is assumed that the “operating lottery” is in the “time reduction state”. That is, when the probability probability symbol 1 or the probability variation symbol 2 is met during the low probability non-time reduction in (1) above, the high probability time reduction state is reached after the big hit. Even in this case, the number of times the time shortening function is activated is added regardless of the winning symbol. Specifically, when the winning symbol corresponds to “normal symbol 1”, 100 times of the time shortening function operation are added. In addition, when the winning symbol corresponds to either “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2”, in any case, the time reduction function operation count of 10,000 times is added. In this case, since either “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” is continuously won in the “high probability state”, “limiter count” is decremented by 1 as described above. In addition, regardless of whether it is “probability variation 1” or “probability variation 2”, the state after the big hit is a “high probability state” and a “time reduction state”. On the other hand, in the case of “normal symbol 1”, the state after the big hit ends returns to the “low probability state” with respect to the special symbol (internal lottery), but the “time reduction state” is maintained with respect to the normal symbol (operation lottery). The following is “(3) Low probability time short and medium”.

(3) Low probability during short time For example, as shown in the second column from the right in FIG. 21, the special symbol (internal lottery) is “low probability state” and the normal symbol (operation lottery) Assuming the case of “time reduction state”. If it falls under “Normal Symbol 1” during the low probability non-time reduction in (1) above, or if it falls under “Normal Symbol 1” during the high probability time short before reaching the limiter in (2) above, It becomes a state. In this case as well, the time reduction function operation count is always added to any of the three types of winning symbols. Specifically, when the winning symbol corresponds to “normal symbol 1”, 100 times of the time shortening function operation are added. In addition, when the winning symbol corresponds to either “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2”, in any case, the time reduction function operation count of 10,000 times is added. In this case, since “low probability state” to “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” is selected first, “limiter count” is reset. In this resetting, if the winning symbol is “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2”, 17 times is selected. And even if it corresponds to either "probability variation symbol 1" or "probability variation symbol 2", since the state after the big hit is a "high probability state" and a "time reduction state", as a result, the above (2) The high probability before and after reaching the limiter will be resumed. On the other hand, in the case of “normal symbol 1”, the state after the big hit ends returns to the “low probability state” with respect to the special symbol (internal lottery), but the “time reduction state” is maintained with respect to the normal symbol (operation lottery). The

[When reaching the limiter]
In the “high probability state”, either “probability variation 1” or “probability variation 2” is won (selection ratio 98%), and “limiter count” is subtracted each time. Assume that the “limiter count” reaches the remaining zero.

  When the “limiter count” reaches the remaining 0, the main control CPU 72 cannot determine that either of the “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” is met when winning in the “high probability state”. . Specifically, even if the jackpot symbol random number corresponds to either “probable symbol 1” or “probable symbol 2”, the final winning symbol is “normal symbol 1” or “normal symbol 2”. It is forcibly changed to (Winning type restriction means).

(4) High probability when the limiter is reached Short and medium The forced change of the winning symbol is shown in the rightmost column in FIG. That is, when the remaining “limiter count” reaches 0 in the “high probability state” and the “time shortening state”, even if it corresponds to “probability variation 1” (selection ratio 55%) on the table, The final winning symbol is forcibly changed to “normal symbol 1” (composite selection ratio is 57%). Or even if it is a case corresponding to “probability variation 2” (selection ratio 43%) on the table, the final winning symbol is forcibly changed to “normal symbol 2”. As a result of the forced (restriction) of the winning symbol, the “high probability state” after the remaining “limiter count” reaches zero is not continued, and once the big hit ends, it becomes “low probability state”. It will be forcibly restored. In addition, when “normal symbol 1” is normally selected as the winning symbol and when “normal symbol 1” is forcibly selected (composite selection ratio 57%), the time reduction function is 100 times. The number of times of operation is added, but when “normal symbol 2” is forcibly selected (selection ratio 43%), the number of times of time shortening function operation is not added (0 time = no time reduction). This means that when the “limiter count” reaches zero, it always returns to the “low probability state” with respect to the special symbol (internal lottery). This means that the rate of return is 43% of the total, and the remaining 57% is maintained in the “time reduction state”.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it can be seen that the number of times the time shortening function is added is different depending on the state at the time of winning and the number of remaining limiters (before arrival / when reaching). In particular, in the present embodiment, “(4) High probability when the limiter is reached” becomes “non-time shortened state” only when “normal symbol 2” is forcibly selected, and otherwise “ It turns out that it becomes a "time shortening state". In the present embodiment, the case where the number of times the time shortening function is activated is added is “normal symbol of the first category (normal winning type)”, and the case where the number of times of time shortening function is activated is not added is the “normal symbol of the second category ( Normal winning type) ”.

[Special symbol stop display processing]
Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol stop display process (step S4000 in FIG. 19). A method for setting the above “limiter count” (selecting the first limiter 17 times) and performing a subtraction process will be described below along with a specific procedure for the special symbol stop display process.

  Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (for example, decrements by the interrupt period).

  Step S4200: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has ended based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not yet ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 19), and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop display process in the next interrupt cycle.

  On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4250.

  Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. Further, the main control CPU 72 deletes the symbol changing flag here.

  Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set. When the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4310.

  Step S4310: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current winning symbol is a probability variation symbol. This confirmation can be made based on the big hit stop symbol number. That is, if the current big hit stop symbol number corresponds to either “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S4320.

[When probability variation is selected]
Step S4320: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current winning time is the “high probability state”. When the current winning time is the “low probability state” (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4332.

  Step S4332: When the winning symbol is either “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2”, the main control CPU 72 sets 17 as the “limiter count (first limiter)” (continuous count selection means and continuous count) Processing as setting means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 saves 17 times (remaining limiter number = 17) as the value of the “limiter count”, for example, in the remaining number counter area of the RAM 76.

  Step S4340: The main control CPU 72 subtracts 1 from the first “limiter count” set in the previous step S4332. This is because the “limiter count” includes the time of the first chance variation winning from the “low probability state”. In this embodiment, the “limiter count” including the first chance variation winning (first time) is set. However, when the “limiter count” is set not to include the first limit (for example, 16 times), step S4340 is performed. You may adopt the logic which skips.

  The above is an example of the procedure when the current winning time is the “low probability state”, but when the current winning time is the “high probability state” (step S4320: Yes), the main control CPU 72 Perform the procedure.

[Subtraction of 17 initial limiters]
Step S4340: When the initial limiter is 17 times, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the "limiter count" and saves (updates) the value after the subtraction in the remaining number counter area. That is, when the “high probability state” after the “limiter count” is set to 17 times for the first time, and the current winning is the second consecutive of “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2”, Since the “limiter count” has already been subtracted to 16 at the time of the first winning, the main control CPU 72 subtracts one more “limiter count” at the second time and updates the “limiter count” to the remaining 15 times. To do. Or, if this time's winning is “Continuous Variation 1” or “Continuous Variation 2”, the “Limiter Count” subtracted 15 times in the 2nd time is subtracted by 1 in the 3rd time. The “limiter count” is updated with the remaining 14 times. As a result, when the first “limiter count” is set to 17 and the “high probability state” is a big hit, if either of the “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” is consecutively met, Each time the “limiter count” is decreased, the continuous count subtraction means.

  After this, if it falls under either “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” up to the 17th time every winning, the “limiter count” subtracted to the remaining one time in the 16th time is further increased to 17 If one is subtracted at the second time, the rest reaches zero. In this case, when the main control CPU 72 executes the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 20) at the next winning, the “limiter count” remains 0 when determining the winning symbol using the table of FIG. Since the number of times has been reached, as described above, “probability symbol 1” is forcibly changed to “normal symbol 1”, and “probability symbol 2” is forcibly changed to “normal symbol 2”. .

[Normal design selected]
On the other hand, in the previous step S4310, the current big hit stop symbol number corresponds to the above-mentioned “normal symbol 1”, or “normal symbol 1” or “normal symbol 2” forcibly determined. If this is the case (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4345.

  Step S4345: In this case, the main control CPU 72 clears the value of “the number of limiters” to 0 (remaining number of limiters = 0). Note that the main control CPU 72 selects “normal symbol 1” or “normal symbol 2” as the current winning symbol in the previous big hit stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 20) (including forcing). Therefore, the value of “the number of limiters” may be cleared.

  Step S4346: In any case, when the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 next generates a limiter remaining number command based on the current “number of limiters”. The limiter remaining number command generated here is output to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S213 in FIG. 8).

  Step S4350: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to “variable winning device management processing”.

  Step S4355: Further, the main control CPU 72 resets the flag at the time of cut-off function operation. Thereby, when at least one of the time reduction function or the probability variation function is activated before the big hit game is started, the function is deactivated.

Step S4400: The main control CPU 72 sets “start of big role (during big hit game)” as an internal state flag for control. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command representing a big hit. The state command representing the big hit is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.
When the above procedure is completed at the time of the big hit, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, the following procedure is executed in cases other than the big hit.
That is, if the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the big hit flag (01H) is not set (No), it next executes step S4600.

  Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol variation pre-processing address as the jump destination address of the jump table.

  Step S4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the number cut counter. In the “counting counter”, the counter value is set in the probability variation count area or the time-short count area of the RAM 76 in the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state”. Here, although “number of times cut” is used, the value of the number of times counter in the “high probability state” is set to an extremely large value (for example, 10,000 times or more). Also, in the case of the “time reduction state”, the number of times of operation may be added 10,000 times depending on the winning symbol as described above. By setting such an enormous value, it is possible to probabilistically guarantee that the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state” will continue until the next winning is substantially obtained. In addition, when 100 times is added as the number of times of operation in the “time reduction state”, the value of the count cut counter is set to 100 times, but in this embodiment, the normal symbol in the “time reduction state” (operation lottery) Since the winning probability is approximately one-tenth (98/99), it is probabilistically guaranteed that the “time reduction state” will continue until the next time even 100 times.

  Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the loaded counter value is zero. At this time, if the count cut counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, when the count-down counter value is not 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4630.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (subtracts 1) the count-down counter value.
Step S4640: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result is not zero. As a result of the subtraction, when the value of the number cut counter is not 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, if the value of the number cut counter becomes 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

  Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 erases the flag at the time of turning off the number of times function. The probability variation function activation flag or the time shortening function activation flag is erased, but the value of the count-down counter is not substantially zero in the “high probability state” as described above, and similarly In the “time shortening state”, the value of the count-down counter is substantially zero. However, since it may occur theoretically, if the value of the count-down counter actually becomes 0, the corresponding probability variation function activation flag or time reduction function activation flag is deleted. As a result, the “high probability state” or the “time reduction state” ends after the special symbol stop display. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process.

[External information processing]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of external information processing. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S700: The main control CPU 72 executes a normal symbol variation number information management process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes processing for outputting, as external information, that the normal symbol variation display has been completed, that is, that the normal symbol has been stopped and displayed in a winning or losing manner. For example, it controls the output state (set ON or OFF) of the external information signal related to the normal symbol fluctuation count. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S702.

  Step S702: The main control CPU 72 executes a normal symbol winning count information management process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes a process for outputting, as external information, that the variable start winning device 28 has been activated by winning a lottery for a normal symbol. For example, it controls the output state (set ON or OFF) of the external information signal related to the number of normal symbol wins. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S704.

  Step S704: The main control CPU 72 executes special state transition frequency information management processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the winning symbol in which the lottery result of the special symbol corresponds to the winning symbol, and the gaming state after the jackpot game to be performed after the winning is completed is a time-saving state. Is executed to output as external information. For example, it controls the output state (set ON or OFF) of the external information signal related to the special state transition count. Here, the number of special state transitions represents the number of transitions to a gaming state advantageous to the player. For example, a state in which the variable start winning device 28 is activated by winning a lottery for a normal symbol (winning state) ), Transition to at least one state (special state) in the state of consecutive winning in the lottery related to the normal symbol (continuous state), or the state that the lottery probability state related to the normal symbol is high probability (short-time state) Represents the number of times The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S706.

  Step S706: The main control CPU 72 executes other information management processing. The main control CPU 72 outputs, for example, “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” as the big hit information among other external information signals to the outside, so that an external electronic device (data display device 270) connected to the pachinko machine 1 is output. Can provide various jackpot information (external information signal output means). In other words, the jackpot information is divided into a plurality of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” and output, so that the type of jackpot (winning type) from these combinations can be tabulated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) or internal Recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or shortened state of symbol variation time, or generate a small hit (a hit where the condition device does not work) that is not classified as a “big hit” even if it is not winning Can be tabulated and managed (however, in this embodiment, the small hit is not used). Based on the jackpot information, for example, the data display device 270 (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past several business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each jackpot is currently hit Or can recognize whether or not each symbol is currently in a shortened state of the symbol variation time. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls each output state (set of ON or OFF) of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” in detail.

[Data display device]
FIG. 24 is a front view showing an example of the data display device. The data display device 270 is connected to the external terminal board 160 of the pachinko machine 1 and relates to a game performed in the pachinko machine 1 based on an external information signal input by a built-in CPU, ROM, RAM, etc. (not shown). Information is displayed. Specifically, the data display device 270 is provided with lamps 272 at both ends, a digital display at the center, and a speaker 274 and a switch 279 at the bottom.

  The digital display unit of the data display device 270 includes, for example, a start number display unit 276 that displays information about the number of start times, a winning number display unit 277 that displays information about the number of winning times, a special state (winning state, consecutive resort state, It is composed of a state transition number display section 278 that displays information related to the number of transitions to any one of the short time states. In addition to these, history information that collectively displays the number of fluctuations at the time of the first hit in the past, the total number of wins one day or two days ago, the total number of state transitions, and the like may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, information related to the number of fluctuations of the normal symbol is displayed on the start number display part 276 of the data display device 270. Specifically, when the data display device 270 receives an external information signal related to the number of normal symbol fluctuations in the ON state, the count number of the start number display unit 276 is incremented by 1 assuming that the normal symbol fluctuation display is performed. Displayed. It is to be noted that once the lottery with respect to the normal symbol corresponds to a win once and the variable start winning device 28 is activated, it is reset to “0” times. In the illustrated example, since “177” is displayed on the start number display section 276, after the variable start winning device 28 is activated and reset to “0” times, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is 177 times. Indicates what has been done. Therefore, the greater the number of times displayed in the start number display section 276, the easier it is for a game ball to pass through the middle gate 20 in order to display a normal symbol in the pachinko machine 1 in a variable manner.

  In the present embodiment, information related to the number of wins for the normal symbol is displayed on the number-of-wins display 277 of the data display device 270. Specifically, when an external information signal related to the number of times of normal symbol winning in the ON state is received by the data display device 270, it is determined that the variable start winning device 28 is activated by winning the normal symbol lottery and the winning number display unit 277 is selected. The count number is incremented by 1 and displayed. In the illustrated example, “77” is displayed on the winning number display portion 277, which indicates that the variable start winning device 28 has been operated 77 times. Accordingly, as the number of times displayed on the winning number display section 277 is larger, the variable start winning device 28 is operated in the pachinko machine 1 on that day, and the variable start winning device 28 (start winning port 28a) is awarded. This means that a large number of prize balls have been generated, that is, a lot of prize balls have been paid out.

  In this embodiment, the number of times of transition to a gaming state (special state) advantageous to the player (special state transition count) is displayed in the state transition count display section 278 of the data display device 270. Here, the special state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is a state in which the variable start winning device 28 is activated by winning a lottery regarding a normal symbol (winning state), and is continuously won in a lottery regarding a normal symbol. It represents a state satisfying at least one of a state (long-run state) or a state in which a lottery probability state related to a normal symbol has a high probability (short-time state). Further, as to whether or not the current gaming state is a special state, specifically, information on the operation of the variable start winning device 28 (opening time, opening time, winning valid time (Tz time), ending time), Information regarding the operation of the variable winning device 30 (opening time, opening time, winning time (Tz time), ending time), and whether or not the lottery probability state for the normal symbol is a high probability state (time shortening state) Whether or not) is determined. Then, an external information signal relating to the number of times of transition to the special state is formed based on these information (operation information of the variable start winning device 28, operation information of the variable winning device 30 and normal symbol lottery probability state information).

  Therefore, when the data display device 270 receives an external information signal regarding the special state transition count in the ON state, the count number of the state transition count display section 278 is incremented by 1 and displayed, assuming that the transition to the special state has occurred. In addition, when the external information signal regarding the number of times of transition to the special state in the ON state continues to be transmitted to the data display device 270, for example, the normal symbol lottery probability state and the variable winning device 30 are operating. When the state is continuous, the increment display of the count number in the state transition number display section 278 is not performed, but the current gaming state is shifted (set) to the special state by flashing the number. Can be taught to the player. In the illustrated example, “7” is displayed in the state transition number display section 278, and further, since it is in a blinking state, it represents that the state has been changed to the special state seven times and that the current state is the special state. ing. Therefore, the greater the number of times displayed in the state transition number display section 278, the more the number of times that the pachinko machine 1 of the day has entered the special state and the gaming state has become advantageous to the player. That is, the player can be informed that a lot of prize balls have been paid out. Furthermore, whether or not the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 is in a special state can be taught to the player based on whether or not the state transition number display unit 278 is blinking.

  In addition, the lamp 272 of the data display device 270 is turned on and blinked in response to a predetermined signal or process. For example, the lamp 272 is turned on or blinked when winning or when the switch 279 is pressed. Similarly, a sound effect is emitted from the speaker 279 triggered by a predetermined signal or process. The switch 279 is composed of, for example, a call switch and a history information switch. When the call switch 279 is pressed, a game attendant is informed that the player has pressed the call switch. When the history information switch 279 is pressed, history information relating to the game of the pachinko machine 1 connected to the data display device 270 (for example, the total number of rotations of normal symbols, the number of winnings several days ago, etc.) is displayed on the digital display unit. Is displayed.

  Next, in the digital display unit of the data display device 270, the number of fluctuations related to the normal symbol displayed on the start number display unit 276 and the number of wins related to the normal symbol displayed on the winning number display unit 277 (the variable start winning device 28 is activated). The number of times of transition to a special state, which is a game state advantageous to the player displayed on the state transition number display unit 278, is specifically described for processing that the main control CPU 72 controls when outputting an external information signal Explained.

[Normal symbol fluctuation frequency information management processing]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the normal symbol variation number information management process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S710: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the external information signal related to the normal symbol fluctuation count is set to ON. Here, the external information signal related to the normal symbol variation number represents a signal corresponding to the variation number related to the normal symbol displayed on the start number display unit 276. This external information signal is represented by a binary value in the ON or OFF state. When the data display device 270 receives an external information signal related to the number of normal symbol fluctuations in the ON state, one count is added. . When the pachinko machine 1 is activated, the external information signal related to the normal symbol fluctuation count is set to OFF.

  Specifically, in this process, the main control CPU 72 accesses the port output request buffer and confirms whether the state of the stored external information signal related to the normal symbol fluctuation count is ON or OFF. It is confirmed whether or not the external information signal related to the normal symbol fluctuation count is set to ON. As a result of this confirmation, when the external information signal related to the normal symbol fluctuation count is set to ON (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S716. On the other hand, if the external information signal related to the normal symbol variation count is not set to ON (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S712.

  Step S712: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the normal symbol stop display has been completed. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the normal symbol variation display has been completed, and the stop display in a manner representing the winning or losing after that has been completed. As a result of this confirmation, when the normal symbol stop display is completed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S714. On the other hand, when the normal symbol stop display has not ended (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the external information processing (FIG. 23).

  Step S714: The main control CPU 72 sets the external information signal related to the normal symbol fluctuation count to ON. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the port output request buffer, and sets the state of the stored external information signal regarding the number of times of normal symbol fluctuation to ON. When this process is finished, the main control CPU 72 returns to the external information processing (FIG. 23).

  Step S716: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the external information signal related to the number of times of normal symbol variation was set to the ON state in the previous process (step S714). Check. If the predetermined time has elapsed as a result of this confirmation (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S718. On the other hand, when the predetermined time has not elapsed (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the external information processing (FIG. 23).

  Step S718: The main control CPU 72 sets the external information signal related to the normal symbol fluctuation count to OFF. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the port output request buffer and sets the state of the external information signal related to the stored number of normal symbol fluctuations to OFF.

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the external information processing (FIG. 23). Note that the processing after the external information signal is set to ON, that is, the processing in step S716 and step S718, may not be executed when the I / O driver is installed. This is because the external information signal transmitted by the I / O driver is controlled from ON to OFF. Therefore, since the main control CPU 72 does not have to execute the process of setting whether or not the external information signal is ON in step S710, step S716 and step S718 and setting the external information signal from ON to OFF. The increase in capacity for the purpose can be suppressed.

[Normal symbol winning count information management process]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the normal symbol win count information management process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S730: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the external information signal regarding the number of times of normal symbol winning is set to ON. Here, the external information signal related to the normal symbol winning count represents a signal corresponding to the winning count related to the normal symbol displayed on the winning count display section 277 (the number of times the variable start winning device 28 has been operated). This external information signal is represented by a binary value in the ON or OFF state, and when the data display device 270 receives the external information signal related to the number of normal symbol wins in the ON state, one count is added. . When the pachinko machine 1 is activated, the external information signal related to the number of normal symbol wins is set to OFF.

  Specifically, in this process, the main control CPU 72 accesses the port output request buffer and confirms whether the state of the stored external information signal related to the number of times of normal symbol winning is ON or OFF. It is confirmed whether or not the external information signal regarding the number of times of normal symbol winning is set to ON. As a result of this confirmation, when the external information signal regarding the number of times of normal symbol winning is set to ON (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S736. On the other hand, when the external information signal related to the normal symbol winning count is not set to ON (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S732.

  Step S732: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the variable start winning device 28 has started operation. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 stops and displays the normal symbol representing winning, and then confirms whether or not the operation of the variable start winning device 28 has started. As a result of the confirmation, when the variable start winning device 28 starts operating (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S734. On the other hand, when the variable start winning device 28 has not started operation (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the external information processing (FIG. 23).

  In this process, whether or not the variable start winning device 28 has started operation is confirmed by checking whether or not the variable start winning device 28 has been opened and whether or not the opening time for the variable start winning device 28 has been started. Or confirmation of whether or not the stop display in the normal symbol winning mode has been completed may be replaced with confirmation.

  Step S734: The main control CPU 72 sets the external information signal regarding the number of times of normal symbol winning to ON. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the port output request buffer and sets the state of the stored external information signal regarding the number of times of normal symbol winning is ON. When this process is finished, the main control CPU 72 returns to the external information processing (FIG. 23).

  Step S736: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the ending relating to the variable start winning device 28 has been started. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening of the variable start winning device 28 is finished and the ending is started. As a result of this confirmation, when the ending regarding the variable start winning device 28 is started (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S738. On the other hand, when the ending regarding the variable start winning device 28 is not started (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the external information processing (FIG. 23).

  Step S738: The main control CPU 72 sets the external information signal relating to the number of normal symbol wins to OFF. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the port output request buffer and sets the state of the stored external information signal related to the number of normal symbol wins to OFF.

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the external information processing (FIG. 23).

  Next, the external information signal set in the normal symbol win count information management process will be described based on specific examples.

[External information signal output specifications regarding the number of normal symbol wins]
FIG. 27 is a diagram for explaining the output specification of the external information signal related to the number of times of normal symbol winning. Hereinafter, specific contents will be described in time series. Note that (A) in FIG. 27 indicates whether the normal symbol is in a variable display state or a stop display state. Moreover, about (B) in FIG. 27, the state regarding the action | operation of the variable start prize-winning apparatus 28 is shown. Further, (C) in FIG. 27 shows the state of the external information signal regarding the number of normal symbol winnings to be transmitted to the data display device 270.

  Time t0: For example, normal symbol variation display is started ((A) in FIG. 27). Specifically, the operation lottery regarding the normal symbol is executed, the change display is executed based on the result of the operation lottery, and the operation ends after a predetermined change time. In addition, the case where it corresponds to winning as a result of this operation | movement lottery is assumed.

  Time t1: The normal symbol variation display ends, and the stop display in the winning mode is started ((A) in FIG. 27). For example, the stop display is performed for 0.5 seconds.

  Time t2: The stop display in the normal symbol winning mode ends ((A) in FIG. 27), and preparations for the operation (opening) of the variable start winning device 28 are started ((B) in FIG. 27). Specifically, an opening time TA is provided for executing an effect (opening effect) or the like that tells the player that the variable start winning device 28 will be released.

  Further, based on the start of the operation (opening) of the variable start winning device 28 ((B) in FIG. 27), specifically, based on the start of the opening time related to the variable start winning device 28, The external information signal regarding the number of symbol wins is set by changing from the OFF state to the ON state ((C) in FIG. 27).

  In addition, when the data display device 270 receives the external information signal (ON state) related to the normal symbol winning number, the count number of the winning number display unit 277 is incremented by one. For example, the notation is changed from “76” to “77”.

  Time t3: The opening time (TA) related to the variable start winning device 28 ends, and the operation (opening) of the variable start winning device 28 is started ((B) in FIG. 27). Specifically, a game ball can be entered into the variable start winning device 28 (start winning port 28a).

  Time t4: The operation (opening) of the variable start winning device 28 ends, and a countdown of the ball sweep time of the game ball that has entered the variable start winning device 28 is started ((B) in FIG. 27). Specifically, the countdown of the winning effective time (TB) after the variable start winning device 28 is closed is started. The winning valid time represents the time during which the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 28a is valid. For example, when a game ball closed before the variable start winning device 28 is detected by the start winning opening switch for a while after closing, the winning is valid if it is within the winning effective time, whereas the winning is valid. If it is out of time (when the winning valid time is exceeded), the winning is invalid.

  Time t5: The winning effective time (TB) related to the variable start winning device 28 ends, and the ending related to the variable start winning device 28 is started ((B) in FIG. 27). Specifically, an ending time TC is provided for executing an effect (ending effect) for instructing the player that the opening of the variable start winning device 28 has ended.

  Further, based on the fact that the ending time for the variable start winning device 28 has started (the winning effective time has ended) ((B) in FIG. 27), the external information signal related to the number of normal symbol wins changes from the ON state to the OFF state. It is changed and set ((C) in FIG. 27).

  After that, when the ending time TC ends, normal symbol variation display can be executed.

  Time t6: Normal symbol operation lottery is executed, and variable display is started according to the result of the operation lottery.

  Time t7: The normal symbol variation display over a predetermined variation time ends, and the stop display in the winning mode is started. For example, the stop display is performed for 0.5 seconds.

  Time t8: The stop display in the normal symbol winning mode ends, and preparations for the operation (opening) of the variable start winning device 28 are started. Specifically, an opening time TA is provided for executing an effect (opening effect) or the like that tells the player that the variable start winning device 28 will be released.

  Also, based on the start of the operation (opening) of the variable start winning device 28, specifically, the opening time related to the variable start winning device 28 has started, an external information signal related to the number of times of normal symbol winning is generated. The setting is changed from the OFF state to the ON state.

  In addition, when the data display device 270 receives the external information signal (ON state) related to the normal symbol winning number, the count number of the winning number display unit 277 is incremented by one. For example, the notation is changed from “77” to “78”.

  Time t9: The opening time (TA) related to the variable start winning device 28 ends, and the operation (opening) of the variable start winning device 28 is started. Specifically, a game ball can be entered into the variable start winning device 28 (start winning port 28a).

  Time t10: The operation (opening) of the variable start winning device 28 ends, and the countdown of the ball sweep time of the game ball that has entered the variable start winning device 28 is started. Specifically, the countdown of the winning effective time (TB) after the variable start winning device 28 is closed is started.

  Time t11: The winning effective time (TB) related to the variable start winning device 28 ends, and the ending related to the variable start winning device 28 is started. Specifically, an ending time TC is provided for executing an effect (ending effect) for instructing the player that the opening of the variable start winning device 28 has ended.

  Further, based on the start of the ending time related to the variable start winning device 28 (the end of the winning effective time), the external information signal related to the number of normal symbol wins is changed from the ON state to the OFF state and set.

  After that, when the ending time TC ends, normal symbol variation display can be executed.

  As described above, when the result of the normal symbol operation lottery corresponds to the winning and the operation of the variable start winning device 28 is started (when the opening is started), the external information signal related to the number of normal symbol winning is changed from the OFF state. Changed to ON state. Therefore, when the data display device 270 receives the external information signal (ON state), it is possible to add 1 to the display count of the winning number display section 277.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the number that can be obtained by the winning ball by the variable start winning device 28 that is operated at the time of winning the normal symbol, rather than the number that can be acquired by the variable winning device 30 that is operated when the special symbol is won. There are more. Therefore, the appearance of the data display device 270 is improved by updating (1 addition) the winning number display section 277 of the data display device 270 in response to the operation of the variable start winning device 28 instead of the operation of the variable winning device 30. can do.

  Next, a process for controlling the main control CPU 72 when outputting the external information signal with respect to the number of special state transitions displayed on the state transition display unit 278 of the data display device 270 will be specifically described.

[Special status transition count information management processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of special state transition count information management processing. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S750: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current normal symbol lottery probability state is a high probability state. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the time shortening function is operating with respect to the current normal symbol, so that the lottery probability state of the current normal symbol is a high probability state (time shortening state). Confirm whether or not. If the result of this confirmation is that the current normal symbol lottery probability state is a high probability state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S756. On the other hand, if the current normal symbol lottery probability state is not a high probability state (No), that is, if the current normal symbol lottery probability state is a low probability state, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S752. .

  Step S752: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the variable start winning device 28 is operating. Here, the operation of the variable start winning device 28 includes an opening time, an opening time, a winning effective time (Tz time), and an ending time related to the variable start winning device 28, and is staying at any of these times. If so, the condition that the variable start winning device 28 is in operation is satisfied. As a result of the confirmation, if the variable start winning device 28 is in operation (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S756. On the other hand, if the variable start winning device 28 is not in operation (No), that is, if it is not in operation, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S754.

  Step S754: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the variable winning device 30 is operating. Here, the operation of the variable winning device 30 includes an opening time, an opening time, a winning effective time (Tz time), and an ending time related to the variable winning device 30, and if the user is staying at any of these times. The condition that the variable winning device 30 is operating is satisfied. As a result of the confirmation, if the variable winning device 30 is in operation (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S756. On the other hand, if the variable winning device 30 is not in operation (No), that is, if it is not in operation, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S758.

  Step S756: The main control CPU 72 sets the external information signal regarding the special state transition count to ON. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the port output request buffer and sets the state of the stored external information signal regarding the number of special state transitions to ON. When this process is finished, the main control CPU 72 returns to the external information processing (FIG. 23).

  Step S758: The main control CPU 72 sets the external information signal regarding the number of special state transitions to OFF. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the port output request buffer and sets the state of the stored external information signal regarding the number of special state transitions to OFF.

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the external information processing (FIG. 23).

  Next, the external information signal set in the special state transition frequency information management process will be described based on specific examples.

[Output specification of external information signal regarding the number of special state transitions]
FIG. 29 to FIG. 32 are diagrams for explaining the output specifications of the external information signal related to the number of special state transitions. Hereinafter, specific contents will be described in time series. FIG. 29 shows the output specifications of the external information signal regarding the number of transitions to the special state when the lottery probability state related to the normal symbol is a low probability state and the lottery regarding the normal symbol is won. FIG. 30 shows the output specification of the external information signal related to the number of transitions to the special state when the lottery probability state related to the normal symbol is won in the lottery related to the normal symbol when the probability state is high (part 1). FIG. 31 shows the output specification of the external information signal related to the number of transitions to the special state when the lottery probability state related to the normal symbol is won in the lottery related to the normal symbol (part 2) when the probability state is high. FIG. 32 shows the output specification of the external information signal regarding the number of times of transition to the special state when the lottery probability state regarding the normal symbol is won in the lottery regarding the normal symbol when the lottery probability state regarding the normal symbol is high (No. 3).

[If you win a lottery with a normal symbol in a low probability state]
First, the output specification of the external information signal related to the number of transitions to the special state when the lottery probability state related to the normal symbol shown in FIG. 29 is won in the lottery related to the normal symbol when the probability state is low.

  Time t30: For example, the normal symbol variation display executed when the lottery probability state for the normal symbol is in the low probability state ((A) in FIG. 29) ends ((B) in FIG. 29). In addition, the case where the result of the operation | work lottery regarding this normal symbol is winning is assumed. Therefore, the normal symbol variation display is ended, and the normal symbol stop display is started in a winning manner ((B) in FIG. 29). Then, for example, a normal symbol stop display is performed for 0.5 seconds.

  Time t31: The stop display in the normal symbol winning mode ends ((B) in FIG. 29), and the operation of the variable start winning device 28 is started ((C) in FIG. 29). Note that the operation time until the operation of the variable start winning device 28 is ended is an opening time (TA (dot region at the left end in (C) in FIG. 29)) and an opening time (TO ((C) in FIG. 29). (The hatched area inclined to the upper right in the figure)), the winning valid time (TB (second dot area from the right in (C) in FIG. 29)), and the ending time (TC (in (C) in FIG. 29) It is composed of a hatched area sloping to the lower right)). Therefore, the operation of the variable start winning device 28 ends when the total time (TA + TO + TB + TC) of the opening time (TA), the opening time (TO), the winning effective time (TB), and the ending time (TC) has elapsed. Become. The contents performed during each opening time (TA), opening time (TO), winning valid time (TB), and ending time (TC) are the same as those described in FIG. The description is omitted. Since the variable start winning device 28 is activated when the normal symbol lottery probability state is the low probability state, the ending time (TC) is set to be a long time unlike the high probability state. For example, the high probability state is set to about 5 seconds, whereas the low probability state is set to about 45 seconds.

  Here, based on the fact that the variable start winning device 28, which is one of the conditions for setting the external information signal regarding the number of transitions to the special state to the ON state, is in operation ((C) in FIG. 29), The external information signal is changed from the OFF state to the ON state based on the start of the opening time (TA) for the variable start winning device 28 ((F) in FIG. 29).

  In addition, when the data display device 270 receives the external information signal (ON state) regarding the number of special state transitions, the count number of the state transition number display unit 278 is incremented by one. For example, the notation is changed from “6” to “7”. Further, in the state transition number display section 278 of the data display device 27, the blinking state in which the count number “7” blinks is maintained while the ON state is continued.

  Time t32: When the variable start winning device 28 is in the open state or in the winning valid time, when a game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening 28a, an internal lottery regarding a special symbol is executed, and the result of the internal lottery Based on this, the variable display is started ((D) in FIG. 29). In addition, the case where the result of the internal lottery regarding this special symbol corresponds to winning, and the winning type is 2-round probability variation 1 (2R probability variation 1) is assumed. For example, when the lottery probability state of the internal lottery of the normal symbol is a low probability state (in the normal state), the variation display of the special symbol is executed over a predetermined variation time (for example, 30 seconds).

  Time t33: The special symbol variation display over a predetermined variation time is finished, and the special symbol stop display is started in a winning manner representing the two-round probability variation 1 ((D) in FIG. 29). For example, a special symbol is stopped and displayed for 0.5 seconds.

  Time t34: The stop display in the special symbol winning mode ends ((D) in FIG. 29), and the operation of the variable winning device 30 is started ((E) in FIG. 29). The operating time of the variable winning device 30 is the opening time (ta (dot region at the left end in (E) in FIG. 29)) and the opening time (to (diagonal line inclined to the upper right in (C) in FIG. 29). Area)), winning effective time (tb (second dot area from right in (E) in FIG. 29)), and ending time (tc (hatched area inclined to the lower right in (E) in FIG. 29)) )). Note that the opening time (to) represents a time during which the variable winning device 30 is opened a plurality of times (for example, twice). Therefore, the operation of the variable winning device 30 ends when the total time (ta + to + tb + tc) of the opening time (ta), the opening time (to), the winning effective time (tb), and the ending time (tc) has elapsed. . Note that the contents performed during each opening time (ta), opening time (to), winning valid time (tb), and ending time (tc) are the same as those of the variable start winning device 28. Description is omitted.

Here, regarding the external information signal regarding the number of times of transition to the special state, the variable start winning device 28 is in operation ((C) in FIG. 29) and the variable winning device 30 is in the condition to be set to the ON state. Based on the fact that it is operating ((E) in FIG. 29) (specifically, the opening time (ta) relating to the variable winning device 30 has been started), the setting is continued in the ON state (in FIG. 29 ( F)).

  Therefore, since the data display device 270 receives the external information signal (ON state) regarding the number of special state transitions, the blinking state of the count number “7” in the state transition number display unit 278 continues.

  Time t35: The operation of the variable winning device 30 ends, and specifically, the ending time (TC) related to the variable winning device 30 ends ((E) in FIG. 29). Then, the next variation display of the special symbol can be executed. Note that the prize winning time (tb) of the variable winning device 30 may be set to be extended by a predetermined time after the variable winning device 30 ends its operation.

  Also, with the end of the operation of the variable winning device 30, the time reduction function is activated and the lottery probability state of the normal symbol is set to the high probability state based on the fact that the winning type of the special symbol is 2-round probability variation 1. ((A) in FIG. 29).

  Here, one of the conditions for setting the external information signal regarding the number of transitions to the special state to the ON state is not satisfied due to the end of the operation of the variable winning device 30 ((E) in FIG. 29). However, among the conditions for setting the external information signal regarding the number of transitions to the special state to the ON state, the variable start winning device 28 is in operation ((C) in FIG. 29) and the lottery probability state of the normal symbol is high. Based on being set in the probability state ((A) in FIG. 29), the external information signal is not changed from the ON state to the OFF state, and is continuously set in the ON state (in FIG. 29). (F)). As described above, as a condition for setting the external information signal regarding the number of times of transition to the special state to the ON state, the variable start winning device 28 is operating ((C) in FIG. 29), and the variable winning device 30 is operating. (E in FIG. 29), or if the normal symbol lottery probability state is set to a high probability state (A in FIG. 29), the external information The signal indicates that the signal is set to the ON state.

  In addition, since the data display device 270 receives the external information signal (ON state) regarding the number of special state transitions, the blinking state of the count number “7” in the state transition number display unit 278 continues.

  Time t36: The operation of the variable start winning device 28 ends, and specifically, the ending time (TC) related to the variable start winning device 28 ends ((C) in FIG. 29). Then, the normal symbol fluctuation display can be executed, and the next normal symbol fluctuation display is started ((B) in FIG. 29).

  Here, with respect to the external information signal regarding the number of transitions to the special state, based on the fact that the lottery probability state of the normal symbol is set to the high probability state among the conditions to be set to the ON state ((A) in FIG. 29), The setting is continued in the ON state ((F) in FIG. 29). Therefore, in the state transition number display section 278 of the data display device 27, the blinking state in which the count number (for example, “7”) blinks is maintained while the ON state continues.

  As described above, when the lottery probability state related to the normal symbol is in the low probability state, when the winning lottery is won in the operation lottery, the external information signal related to the special state transition count is changed from the OFF state based on the fact that the variable start winning device 28 is activated The setting is changed to the ON state. Then, during the operation of the variable start winning device 28, the special symbol change display and the variable start winning device 28 are operated. In addition, during the operation of the variable start winning device 28, when the operation of the variable winning device 28 is finished, the lottery probability state of the normal symbol is set to the high probability state. Thereafter, the operation of the variable start winning device 28 ends. However, since the lottery probability state of the normal symbol is set to the high probability state, the setting of the external information signal is continued in the ON state. . Further, in the data display device 270 that receives the external information signal related to the special state transition count, if the external information signal continues in the ON state, the number of counters of the state transition count display section 278 (eg, “7”) Will continue to flash. Therefore, it is possible to teach the player that the current gaming state is a special state (a gaming state advantageous to the player), and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Next, three patterns of output specifications of the external information signal when the lottery probability state regarding the normal symbol is a high probability state will be described.

[If you win in a lottery for normal symbols in a high probability state (Part 1)]
Next, the output specification of the external information signal related to the number of transitions to the special state in the case where the lottery probability state related to the normal symbol shown in FIG.

  Time t50: For example, the normal symbol variation display executed when the lottery probability state related to the normal symbol is in the high probability state ((A) in FIG. 30) ends ((B) in FIG. 30). In addition, the case where the result of the operation | work lottery regarding this normal symbol is winning is assumed. Therefore, the normal symbol variation display is terminated, and the normal symbol stop display is started in a winning manner ((B) in FIG. 30). Then, for example, a normal symbol stop display is performed for 0.5 seconds.

  In addition, based on the fact that the lottery probability state of the normal symbol is set to the high probability state ((A) in FIG. 30) including the normal symbol fluctuation display (before time t50) The information signal is set to the ON state ((F) in FIG. 30).

  Time t51: The stop display in the normal symbol winning mode ends ((B) in FIG. 30), and the operation of the variable start winning device 28 is started ((C) in FIG. 30). In addition, it will be complete | finished when the operation time (TA + TO + TB + TC) regarding operation | movement of this variable start prize-winning apparatus 28 passes. The contents performed during each opening time (TA), opening time (TO), winning valid time (TB), and ending time (TC) are the same as those described in FIG. The description is omitted.

  Here, regarding the external information signal regarding the number of transitions to the special state, among the conditions for setting the ON state, the variable start winning device 28 is in operation ((C) in FIG. 30) and the normal symbol lottery probability Based on the fact that the state is set to the high probability state ((A) in FIG. 30), the state continues to be set in the ON state ((F) in FIG. 30). Therefore, in the state transition number display section 278 of the data display device 27, the blinking state in which the count number (for example, “7”) blinks is maintained while the ON state continues.

  Time t52: When the variable start winning device 28 is in the open state or in the winning valid time, when a game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening 28a, an internal lottery regarding a special symbol is executed, and the result of the internal lottery Based on the variation display, (D in FIG. 30) is started. In addition, the case where the result of the internal lottery regarding this special symbol corresponds to winning, and the winning type is 2-round probability variation 1 (2R probability variation 1) is assumed. For example, when the lottery probability state of the internal lottery of the normal symbol is a high probability state (when it is a time shortening state), the variation display of the special symbol is executed over a predetermined variation time (for example, 0.6 seconds).

  Time t53: The special symbol variation display over a predetermined variation time is finished, and the special symbol stop display is started in a winning manner representing the two-round probability variation 1 ((D) in FIG. 30). For example, a special symbol is stopped and displayed for 0.5 seconds.

  Time t54: The stop display in the special symbol winning mode is completed ((D) in FIG. 30), and the operation of the variable winning device 30 is started ((E) in FIG. 30). In addition, it will be complete | finished when the operation time (ta + to + tb + tc) regarding the operation | movement of this variable prize-winning apparatus 30 passes. The contents performed during each opening time (ta), opening time (to), winning valid time (tb), and ending time (tc) are the same as those described in FIG. The description is omitted.

  Further, with the start of the operation of the variable winning device 30, the operation of the time shortening function is ended and the lottery probability state of the normal symbol is set to the low probability state ((A) in FIG. 30).

  Here, regarding the external information signal related to the number of transitions to the special state, the variable start winning device 28 is in operation ((C) in FIG. 30) and the variable winning device 30 Based on the fact that it is operating ((E) in FIG. 30), the setting is continued in the ON state ((F) in FIG. 30). Therefore, in the state transition number display section 278 of the data display device 27, the blinking state in which the count number “7” blinks is maintained while the ON state is continued.

  Time t55: The operation of the variable winning device 30 ends, and specifically, the ending time (tc) related to the variable winning device 30 ends ((E) in FIG. 30). Then, the next variation display of the special symbol can be executed.

  Also, with the end of the operation of the variable winning device 30, the time reduction function is activated and the lottery probability state of the normal symbol is set to the high probability state based on the fact that the winning type of the special symbol is 2-round probability variation 1. ((A) in FIG. 30).

  Here, regarding the external information signal regarding the number of transitions to the special state, among the conditions for setting the ON state, the variable start winning device 28 is in operation ((C) in FIG. 30) and the normal symbol lottery probability Based on the fact that the state is set to the high probability state ((A) in FIG. 30), the state continues to be set in the ON state ((F) in FIG. 30). Therefore, in the state transition number display section 278 of the data display device 27, the blinking state in which the count number “7” blinks is maintained while the ON state is continued.

  Time t56: The operation of the variable start winning device 28 ends, and specifically, the ending time (TC) related to the variable start winning device 28 ends ((C) in FIG. 30). Then, the normal symbol fluctuation display can be executed, and the next normal symbol fluctuation display is started ((B) in FIG. 30). In addition, the case where the result of the operation | work lottery regarding this normal symbol is winning is assumed.

  Here, for the external information signal regarding the number of transitions to the special state, based on the fact that the lottery probability state of the normal symbol is set to the high probability state among the conditions to be set to the ON state ((A) in FIG. 30), The setting is continued in the ON state ((F) in FIG. 30). Therefore, in the state transition number display section 278 of the data display device 27, the blinking state in which the count number “7” blinks is maintained while the ON state is continued.

  Time t57: The fluctuation display at the time of winning the normal symbol is finished ((B) in FIG. 30), and the stop display of the normal symbol is started in the winning mode ((B) in FIG. 30). For example, a normal symbol stop display is performed for 0.5 seconds.

  Time t58: The stop display in the normal symbol winning mode ends ((B) in FIG. 30), and the operation of the variable start winning device 28 is started ((C) in FIG. 30). In addition, it will be complete | finished when the operation time (TA + TO + TB + TC) regarding operation | movement of this variable start prize-winning apparatus 28 passes.

  Here, regarding the external information signal regarding the number of transitions to the special state, among the conditions for setting the ON state, the variable start winning device 28 is in operation ((C) in FIG. 30) and the normal symbol lottery probability Based on the fact that the state is set to the high probability state ((A) in FIG. 30), the state continues to be set in the ON state ((F) in FIG. 30). Therefore, in the state transition number display section 278 of the data display device 27, the blinking state in which the count number “7” blinks is maintained while the ON state is continued.

  Time t59: When the variable start winning device 28 is in the open state or in the winning valid time, when a game ball enters (wins) the starting winning opening 28a, an internal lottery regarding a special symbol is executed, and the result of the internal lottery Based on the variation display, (D in FIG. 30) is started. In addition, the case where the result of the internal lottery regarding this special symbol corresponds to winning, and the winning type is 2 round normal 1 (2R normal 1) is assumed. For example, when the lottery probability state of the internal lottery of the normal symbol is a high probability state (when it is a time shortening state), the variation display of the special symbol is executed over a predetermined variation time (for example, 0.6 seconds).

  Time t60: Then, the special symbol variation display over a predetermined variation time is finished, and the special symbol stop display is started in the winning mode representing the normal 1 in two rounds ((D) in FIG. 30). For example, a special symbol is stopped and displayed for 0.5 seconds.

  Time t61: The stop display in the special symbol winning mode ends ((D) in FIG. 30), and the operation of the variable winning device 30 is started ((E) in FIG. 30). In addition, it will be complete | finished when the operation time (ta + to + tb + tc) regarding the operation | movement of this variable prize-winning apparatus 30 passes.

  Further, with the start of the operation of the variable winning device 30, the operation of the time shortening function is ended and the lottery probability state of the normal symbol is set to the low probability state ((A) in FIG. 30).

  Here, regarding the external information signal related to the number of transitions to the special state, the variable start winning device 28 is in operation ((C) in FIG. 30) and the variable winning device 30 Based on the fact that it is operating ((E) in FIG. 30), the setting is continued in the ON state ((F) in FIG. 30). Therefore, in the state transition number display section 278 of the data display device 27, the blinking state in which the count number “7” blinks is maintained while the ON state is continued.

  Time t62: The operation of the variable winning device 30 ends, and specifically, the ending time (TC) related to the variable winning device 30 ends ((E) in FIG. 30). Then, the next variation display of the special symbol can be executed.

  Also, with the end of the operation of the variable winning device 30, the time reduction function is activated based on the fact that the winning type of the special symbol is two rounds of normal 1, and the lottery probability state of the normal symbol is set to the high probability state. ((A) in FIG. 30). In addition, as for the lottery probability state set after the operation of the variable winning device 30 when the winning type is normal 1 for 2 rounds, the lottery probability state of the normal symbol is set to the high probability state as in the case of 2 round probability variation 1. However, unlike the 2-round probability variation 1, the lottery probability state of the special symbol is not set to the high probability state but is set to the low probability state. Therefore, it is not related to the fact that the lottery probability state of the normal symbol, which is a condition for setting the external information signal regarding the number of times of transition to the special state, to the ON state is set to the high probability state ((A) in FIG. 30). Represents.

  Here, regarding the external information signal regarding the number of transitions to the special state, among the conditions for setting the ON state, the variable start winning device 28 is in operation ((C) in FIG. 30) and the normal symbol lottery probability Based on the fact that the state is set to the high probability state ((A) in FIG. 30), the state continues to be set in the ON state ((F) in FIG. 30). Therefore, in the state transition number display section 278 of the data display device 27, the blinking state in which the count number “7” blinks is maintained while the ON state is continued.

  Time t63: The operation of the variable start winning device 28 ends, and specifically, the ending time (TC) related to the variable start winning device 28 ends ((C) in FIG. 30). Then, the normal symbol fluctuation display can be executed, and the next normal symbol fluctuation display is started ((B) in FIG. 30).

  Here, for the external information signal regarding the number of transitions to the special state, based on the fact that the lottery probability state of the normal symbol is set to the high probability state among the conditions to be set to the ON state ((A) in FIG. 30), The setting is continued in the ON state ((F) in FIG. 30). Therefore, in the state transition number display section 278 of the data display device 27, the blinking state in which the count number “7” blinks is maintained while the ON state is continued.

  As described above, when the lottery probability state for the normal symbol is in the high probability state, when the winning lottery is won, the variable start winning device 28 operates while the external information signal regarding the number of transitions to the special state is maintained in the ON state. To start. During the operation of the variable start winning device 28, the lottery probability state for the normal symbol is changed to the low probability state until the variable winning device 30 starts and ends after the winning in the internal drawing of the special symbol. However, the external information signal regarding the number of times of transition to the special state is maintained in the ON state. Therefore, it represents that the variable start winning device 28 is in a continuous play state that continuously operates when the lottery probability state regarding the normal symbol is in the high probability state. Further, in the data display device 270 that receives the external information signal related to the special state transition count, if the external information signal continues in the ON state, the number of counters in the state transition count display section 278 (for example, “7”). Will continue to flash. Therefore, it is possible to teach the player that the current game state is a special state (a long game state), and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Next, the case where the variable start winning device 28 is activated when the lottery probability state regarding the normal symbol is in the high probability state, and the operation of the variable winning device 30 is not completed during the operation of the variable start winning device 28 will be described. To do.

[If you win in a lottery for normal symbols in a high probability state (Part 2)]
Next, the output specification of the external information signal related to the number of times of transition to the special state when the lottery probability state related to the normal symbol shown in FIG.

  Time t70: For example, the change display of the normal symbol that was executed when the lottery probability state related to the normal symbol is in the high probability state ((A) in FIG. 31) ends ((B) in FIG. 31). In addition, the case where the result of the operation | work lottery regarding this normal symbol is winning is assumed. Therefore, the normal symbol variation display is terminated, and the normal symbol stop display is started in a winning manner ((B) in FIG. 31). Then, for example, a normal symbol stop display is performed for 0.5 seconds.

  In addition, based on the fact that the lottery probability state of the normal symbol is set to the high probability state ((A) in FIG. 31), including during the normal symbol variation display (before time t70), The information signal is set to the ON state ((F) in FIG. 31).

  Time t71: The stop display in the normal symbol winning mode ends ((B) in FIG. 31), and the operation of the variable start winning device 28 is started ((C) in FIG. 31). In addition, it will be complete | finished when the operation time (TA + TO + TB + TC) regarding operation | movement of this variable start prize-winning apparatus 28 passes.

  Here, regarding the external information signal related to the number of times of transition to the special state, the variable start winning device 28 is operating ((C) in FIG. 31) and the normal symbol lottery probability among the conditions set to the ON state. Based on the fact that the state is set to the high probability state ((A) in FIG. 31), the state continues to be set in the ON state ((F) in FIG. 31). Therefore, in the state transition number display section 278 of the data display device 27, the blinking state in which the count number (for example, “7”) blinks is maintained while the ON state continues.

  Time t72: When the variable start winning device 28 is closed and the winning valid time is reached, when a game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening 28a, an internal lottery regarding a special symbol is executed, and based on the result of the internal lottery The variable display is started ((D) in FIG. 31). For example, when the variable start winning device 28 is in a ball-engaged state and the game ball is delayed from entering the start winning port 28a (winning), or the game ball flowing through the game area 8a is randomly selected. It may be possible to enter the ball but accidentally enter the ball just before closing. In addition, the case where the result of the internal lottery regarding this special symbol corresponds to winning, and the winning type is 2-round probability variation 1 (2R probability variation 1) is assumed. For example, when the lottery probability state of the internal lottery of the normal symbol is a high probability state (when it is a time shortening state), the variation display of the special symbol is executed over a predetermined variation time (for example, 0.6 seconds).

  Time t73: Then, the variation display of the special symbol over a predetermined variation time is finished, and the special symbol stop display is started in the winning manner representing the 2-round probability variation 1 ((D) in FIG. 31). For example, a special symbol is stopped and displayed for 0.5 seconds.

  Time t74: The stop display in the special symbol winning mode is completed ((D) in FIG. 31), and the operation of the variable winning device 30 is started ((E) in FIG. 31). In addition, it will be complete | finished when the operation time (ta + to + tb + tc) regarding the operation | movement of this variable prize-winning apparatus 30 passes.

  Further, with the start of the operation of the variable winning device 30, the operation of the time shortening function is ended and the lottery probability state of the normal symbol is set to the low probability state ((A) in FIG. 31).

  Here, regarding the external information signal regarding the number of transitions to the special state, the variable start winning device 28 is in operation ((C) in FIG. 31) and the variable winning device 30 is in the condition to be set to the ON state. Based on the fact that it is operating ((E) in FIG. 31), the setting is continued in the ON state ((F) in FIG. 31). Therefore, in the state transition number display section 278 of the data display device 27, the blinking state in which the count number “7” blinks is maintained while the ON state is continued.

  Time t75: The operation of the variable start winning device 28 ends, and specifically, the ending time (TC) related to the variable start winning device 28 ends ((C) in FIG. 31). Then, the normal symbol variation display can be executed, and the next normal symbol variation display is started ((B) in FIG. 31). Here, since the time point at which the special symbol variation display was started was within the effective time of the variable start winning device 28, the variable start winning device 28 ended during the operation of the variable winning device 30. The operation lottery regarding the normal symbol represents that the lottery probability state is performed in a low probability state. In addition, the case where the result of the operation | work lottery regarding this normal symbol is non-winning is assumed.

  Here, the external information signal relating to the number of times of transition to the special state is set in the ON state based on the fact that the variable winning device 30 is operating ((E) in FIG. 31) among the conditions for setting the ON state. Continue ((F) in FIG. 31). Therefore, in the state transition number display section 278 of the data display device 27, the blinking state in which the count number “7” blinks is maintained while the ON state is continued.

  Time t76: The operation of the variable winning device 30 ends, and specifically, the ending time (tc) related to the variable winning device 30 ends ((E) in FIG. 31). Then, the next variation display of the special symbol can be executed.

  Also, with the end of the operation of the variable winning device 30, the time reduction function is activated and the lottery probability state of the normal symbol is set to the high probability state based on the fact that the winning type of the special symbol is 2-round probability variation 1. ((A) in FIG. 31).

  Here, for the external information signal regarding the number of transitions to the special state, based on the fact that the lottery probability state of the normal symbol is set to the high probability state among the conditions to be set to the ON state ((A) in FIG. 31), The setting is continued in the ON state ((F) in FIG. 31). Therefore, in the state transition number display section 278 of the data display device 27, the blinking state in which the count number “7” blinks is maintained while the ON state is continued.

  Time t77: Then, the fluctuation display at the time of non-winning of the normal symbol (at the time of losing) is finished ((B) in FIG. 31), and the stop display of the normal symbol is started in the non-winning manner ((B) in FIG. 31). ). For example, a normal symbol stop display is performed for 0.5 seconds.

  Time t78: Thereafter, the stop display of the normal symbol in the non-winning mode ends ((B) in FIG. 31). Since the normal symbol is not won, the operation of the variable start winning device 28 is not started ((C) in FIG. 31), and the normal symbol variation display can be executed. Is started ((B) in FIG. 31). In addition, since the lottery probability state related to the normal symbol is set to the high probability state for the next normal symbol operation lottery, it means that it is easy to win and the consecutive resort state is continued.

  Here, the lottery probability state of the normal symbol, which is one of the conditions for setting the external information signal regarding the number of transitions to the special state to the ON state, is set to the high probability state ((A) in FIG. 31). Based on this, the setting is continued in the ON state (FIG. 31 (F)). Therefore, in the state transition number display section 278 of the data display device 27, the blinking state in which the count number “7” blinks is maintained while the ON state is continued.

  As described above, when the lottery probability state for the normal symbol is in the high probability state, when the winning lottery is won, the variable start winning device 28 operates while the external information signal regarding the number of transitions to the special state is maintained in the ON state. To start. While the variable start winning device 28 is in operation, the variable winning device 30 starts operating by winning a special symbol internal lottery (at the same time, the lottery probability state for the normal symbol is changed to a low probability state), and thereafter Even when the operation of the variable start winning device 28 is finished, the external information signal regarding the special state transition count is kept in the ON state. Thereafter, when the variable winning device 30 finishes operating, the lottery probability state related to the normal symbol is changed to the high probability state at the same time, so that the external information signal related to the special state transition count is maintained in the ON state. Therefore, since the lottery probability state related to the normal symbol is continuously set to the high probability state, this indicates that the consecutive resort state is continued. Further, in the data display device 270 that receives the external information signal related to the special state transition count, if the external information signal continues in the ON state, the number of counters in the state transition count display section 278 (for example, “7”). Will continue to flash. Therefore, it is possible to teach the player that the current game state is a special state (a long game state), and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Next, when the variable start winning device 28 operates when the lottery probability state regarding the normal symbol is in a high probability state, and the winning type of the special symbol corresponds to 2 rounds of normal 2 during the operation of the variable start winning device 28 That is, the place corresponding to the winning type in which the lottery probability state of the normal symbol is set to the low probability state after the operation of the variable winning device 30 is finished will be described.

[If you win in a lottery for normal symbols in a high probability state (Part 3)]
Next, the output specification of the external information signal related to the number of transitions to the special state in the case where the lottery probability state related to the normal symbol shown in FIG.

  Time t90: For example, when the lottery probability state related to the normal symbol is the high probability state ((A) in FIG. 32), the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is ended ((B) in FIG. 32). In addition, the case where the result of the operation | work lottery regarding this normal symbol is winning is assumed. Therefore, the normal symbol variation display is terminated, and the normal symbol stop display is started in the winning manner ((B) in FIG. 32). Then, for example, a normal symbol stop display is performed for 0.5 seconds.

  It should be noted that, based on the fact that the normal symbol lottery probability state is set to the high probability state ((A) in FIG. 32) including the normal symbol variation display (before time t90) The information signal is set to the ON state ((F) in FIG. 32).

  Time t91: Stop display in the normal symbol winning mode ends ((B) in FIG. 32), and the operation of the variable start winning device 28 is started ((C) in FIG. 32). In addition, it will be complete | finished when the operation time (TA + TO + TB + TC) regarding operation | movement of this variable start prize-winning apparatus 28 passes.

  Here, regarding the external information signal related to the number of times of transition to the special state, the variable start winning device 28 is operating ((C) in FIG. 32) and the normal symbol lottery probability among the conditions to be set to the ON state. Based on the fact that the state is set to the high probability state ((A) in FIG. 32), the state continues to be set in the ON state ((F) in FIG. 32). Therefore, in the state transition number display section 278 of the data display device 27, the blinking state in which the count number (for example, “7”) blinks is maintained while the ON state continues.

  Time t92: When the game ball enters (wins) the start winning port 28a when the variable start winning device 28 is in the open state or in the winning valid time, an internal lottery regarding a special symbol is executed, and the result of the internal lottery Based on this, the display of fluctuation is started ((D) in FIG. 32). In addition, the result of the internal lottery concerning this special symbol corresponds to winning, the winning type is 2 round probability variation 2 (2R probability variation 2), and it is compulsory to 2 round normal 2 (2R normal 2) when it reaches the limiter Suppose that is set to. For example, when the lottery probability state of the internal lottery of the normal symbol is a high probability state (when it is a time shortening state), the variation display of the special symbol is executed over a predetermined variation time (for example, 0.6 seconds).

  Time t93: The special symbol variation display over a predetermined variation time is completed, and the special symbol stop display is started in a winning manner representing two rounds of normal 2 ((D) in FIG. 32). For example, a special symbol is stopped and displayed for 0.5 seconds.

  Time t94: The stop display in the special symbol winning mode ends ((D) in FIG. 32), and the operation of the variable winning device 30 is started ((E) in FIG. 32). In addition, it will be complete | finished when the operation time (ta + to + tb + tc) regarding the operation | movement of this variable prize-winning apparatus 30 passes.

  In addition, with the start of the operation of the variable winning device 30, the operation of the time shortening function is ended and the lottery probability state of the normal symbol is set to a low probability state ((A) in FIG. 32).

  Here, regarding the external information signal regarding the number of transitions to the special state, the variable start winning device 28 is in operation ((C) in FIG. 32) and the variable winning device 30 Based on the fact that it is operating ((E) in FIG. 32), the setting is continued in the ON state ((F) in FIG. 32). Therefore, in the state transition number display section 278 of the data display device 27, the blinking state in which the count number “7” blinks is maintained while the ON state is continued.

  Time t95: The operation of the variable winning device 30 ends, and specifically, the ending time (tc) related to the variable winning device 30 ends ((E) in FIG. 32). Then, the next variation display of the special symbol can be executed.

  Also, with the end of the operation of the variable winning device 30, the special symbol winning type is 2 rounds of normal 2, so the time reduction function does not operate and the normal symbol lottery probability state is maintained in the low probability state. ((A) in FIG. 32).

  Here, the external information signal relating to the number of times of transition to the special state is set in the ON state based on the fact that the variable start winning device 28 is operating ((C) in FIG. 32) among the conditions for setting the ON state. Continued ((F) in FIG. 32). Therefore, in the state transition number display section 278 of the data display device 27, the blinking state in which the count number “7” blinks is maintained while the ON state is continued.

  Time t56: The operation of the variable start winning device 28 ends, and specifically, the ending time (TC) related to the variable start winning device 28 ends ((C) in FIG. 32). Then, the normal symbol fluctuation display can be executed, and the next normal symbol fluctuation display is started ((B) in FIG. 32). In addition, the operation lottery regarding this normal symbol will be performed in a low probability state.

  Here, with respect to the external information signal regarding the number of times of transition to the special state, the variable start winning device 28 is operating ((C) in FIG. 32) among the conditions for setting the ON state, and the lottery probability state of the normal symbol is ON because either the high probability state is set ((A) in FIG. 32) or the variable winning device 30 is in operation ((E) in FIG. 32). The setting is changed from the state to the OFF state ((F) in FIG. 32). Accordingly, in the state transition number display section 278 of the data display device 27, the blinking state of the count number “7” is terminated and changed to the lighting state when the external information signal related to the special state transition number is turned off.

  As described above, when the lottery probability state for the normal symbol is in the high probability state, when the winning lottery is won, the variable start winning device 28 operates while the external information signal regarding the number of transitions to the special state is maintained in the ON state. To start. When the variable start winning device 28 is in operation, a special symbol internal lottery is won, and if the winning type is set to 2 rounds of 2 at the time of reaching the limiter, a lottery related to a normal symbol after the variable winning device 30 is activated. The probability state is set to a low probability state. Therefore, when the lottery probability state regarding the normal symbol is in the high probability state, the special state in which the variable start winning device 28 and the variable winning device 30 are easily operated continuously is terminated. Further, in the data display device 270 that receives the external information signal related to the special state transition count, the external information signal changes from the ON state to the OFF state. The flashing state is changed to the lighting state. Therefore, it is possible to teach the player that the current game state has been changed from the special state (long-run state) to the normal state (non-temporary state), and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In this way, by managing information on the number of times of special state transition (by special state transition number information management processing), the data display device indicates that the current gaming state is a special state (advantageous gaming state) for the player. 270 can be taught. Specifically, the winning state (a state where the normal symbol is won and the variable start winning device 28 is operating), the consecutive house state (a state where the normal symbol winning is continued), and the time shortening state (the normal symbol lottery) It is possible to teach the player that the game corresponds to any one of the game states advantageous to the player, such as a state in which the probability state is a high probability. In addition, since signals are not separately transmitted for the winning state, the consecutive resort state, and the time shortening state, the data display device 270 is prevented from malfunctioning or the external information signal is handled (for example, the data display device 270). And a signal connection method between the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. Also, the output port of the external terminal board in which only a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 8) is provided by combining each information related to the winning state, consecutive resort state, and time reduction state into one special state information. It can be used effectively without increasing the upper limit number.

[Display output management processing]
Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S213 in FIG. 8) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process includes a subroutine group of a special symbol display setting process (step S1200), a normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), a state display setting process (step S1220), and an operation memory display setting process (step S1230). It is.

  Of these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the operation memory display setting process (step S1230) are, as already described, the special symbol display device 34, the normal symbol display device. 33 and a process of generating and outputting a drive signal applied to each LED of the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a.

  The state display setting process (step S1220) is a process for generating and outputting a drive signal to be applied to each LED of the gaming state display device 38. In this process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the probability variation state display lamp 38c and the time reduction state display lamp 38d, respectively, according to the value of the probability variation function activation flag or the time shortening function activation flag. For example, if the value (01H) is set in the probability variation function operation flag when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the probability variation state display lamp 38c. The probability variation state display lamp 38c continues to be lit until the big hit game related to the special symbol is started, or until the probability variation function is turned off (inactivated) after the special symbol variation display is performed a specified number of times. Thereafter, it is switched to non-display (turned off). On the other hand, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 turns on the lighting signal for the LED corresponding to the time reduction state display lamp 38d regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. Is output.

  In this state display setting process (step S1220), the main control CPU 72 also controls the firing position designation display lamp 38e of the game state display device 38. For example, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the launch position designation display lamp 38e when the special game is being executed or the time reduction function is in operation.

[Variable winning device management process]
Next, details of the variable winning device management process will be described.
FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating a configuration example of the variable winning device management process. The variable winning device management process includes a gaming process selection process (step S5100), a special winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200), a special winning opening / closing operation process (step S5300), a special winning opening closing process (step S5400), and an end. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S5500).

  Step S5100: In the game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S5200 to S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening operation) of the variable winning device 30 has not yet been started, the main control CPU 72 selects the big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and has completed the winning opening opening / closing operation process. Then, the special winning opening closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the big prize opening / closing operation process and the big prize opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 selects an end process (step S5500) as the next jump destination. .

  Step S5200: In the special winning opening opening pattern setting process, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening pattern for each opening time, closing time, interval and number of rounds in one round. In the present embodiment, the maximum open time of one round is, for example, “6.0 seconds”, the closing time is, for example, “about 0.5 seconds”, and the number of rounds is fixed to “2 rounds”. As a result, values are set in the open timer, the close timer, the interval timer, and the round number counter, respectively. Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the big winning opening / closing operation process. However, the above opening pattern is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

  Step S5300: Next, in the big winning opening / closing operation processing, the main control CPU 72 controls the opening / closing operation (opening operation) of the variable winning device 30. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a drive signal to be applied to the special winning opening solenoid 90. As a result, the opening / closing member 30a of the variable winning device 30 is displaced from the closed position to the open position, and it becomes possible to generate a winning (winning) at the big winning opening 30b. Further, the main control CPU 72 executes a countdown of the release timer, and if the value of the release timer is not less than or equal to 0, then the main control CPU 72 executes the counting of the number of winning balls. When it is confirmed that the opening time has ended or the count number has reached a predetermined number (for example, one), the main control CPU 72 closes the special winning opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the special winning opening solenoid 90 is stopped. As a result, the variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state.

  Thereafter, the main control CPU 72 executes the count-down of the closing timer. When the value of the closing timer becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 subsequently executes the count-down of the interval timer (only the first round). When the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the next jump destination is set to the big prize closing process. In the second round, when the value of the closing timer becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big prize closing process.

  Step S5400: In the special winning opening closing process, the main control CPU 72 continues the operation of the variable winning device 30 or ends the operation. That is, if the current gaming state is a big hit (a big game), the main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. Thereby, for example, the first round ends, and the value of the round number counter increases at the stage toward the second round. The main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter when the next jump destination is set to the large winning opening / closing operation processing.

  When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes a big winning opening / closing operation process as the next jump destination in the game process selection process (step S5100). Then, the variable winning device until the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (2 times) by the main control CPU 72 executing the special prize opening closing process again after the special prize opening opening / closing operation process is executed. 30 opening and closing operations are executed continuously. When the actual round number reaches the set execution round number, the main control CPU 72 resets the round number counter (= 0), and sets the next jump destination to the end process. Further, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

〔End processing〕
FIG. 35 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the end process. This end process is for preparing conditions for ending the operation of the variable prize apparatus 30. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

Step S5502: The main control CPU 72 resets the big hit flag (00H). As a result, the big hit gaming state ends on the control processing of the main control CPU 72.
Step S5504: Also, the main control CPU 72 ends the state of being a big player internally here.

  Step S5505: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to the flag area of the RAM 76 and checks whether or not the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the big hit other setting process (step S2413 in FIG. 20) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-process.

  Step S5506: When the value of the probability variation function activation flag is set (step S5505: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number-of-times cut function activation flag corresponding to the probability variation function. Thereby, the internal state after the end of the big hit game is set to the “high probability state”.

  Step S5507: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of probability fluctuations (for example, about 10,000). The set value of the probability variation number is stored, for example, in the probability variation counter area of the RAM 76 and becomes the above-described number cut counter value. The probability variation number set here is the upper limit number of times that the variation of the special symbol (internal lottery) is performed in a high probability state in the subsequent games. However, with a high probability (about 65,535,65536), the non-winning will hardly continue 10,000 times, so the high probability state will continue substantially until the next winning. If the value of the probability variation function operation flag is not set (step S5505: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute steps S5506 and S5507.

  Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to the flag area of the RAM 76 and checks whether or not the value of the time reduction function operation flag (01H) is set. This time reduction function operation flag is also set in the big hit other setting process (step S2413 in FIG. 20) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-processing. If the time reduction function operation flag is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5511.

  Step S5511: When the value of the time shortening function operation flag is set (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the time cut function operating flag corresponding to the time shortening function. As a result, the internal state after the end of the big hit game is set to the “time reduction state” (processing as the time reduction state transition means or the time reduction state maintenance means).

  Step S5512: Also, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the count-down counter corresponding to the time shortening function based on the number of times the time shortening function is activated (100 times or 10,000 times) corresponding to the current winning symbol. The set number-of-times counter value is stored in the above-mentioned time count area of the RAM 76. If the time reduction function operation flag is not set (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute steps S5511, S5514. In this case, it does not shift to the “time reduction state” after the big hit ends (processing as a non-time reduction state return means).

  Step S5514: The main control CPU 72 generates a state designation command here. Specifically, with the reset of the big hit flag, a state designation command that represents “normally” as the gaming state is generated. In addition, when the value of the count-off counter is set based on the number of times the probability variation function is activated, a state designation command indicating “high probability” is generated as the internal state, When “” is set, a state designation command indicating “time reduction state” is generated as an internal state. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S213 in FIG. 8).

  Step S5516: After the above procedure at the time of the big hit, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening opening pattern setting process.

  Step S5518: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 19) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process.

  The above is the contents of various control processes performed by the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72). When the main control CPU 72 executes these processes, the game by the pachinko machine 1 is specifically progressed.

[Game Flow]
Next, FIG. 36 is a game flow diagram showing an example of a game flow by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. A game by the pachinko machine 1 proceeds by driving (launching) a game ball into the game area 8a in accordance with the player's operation. Hereinafter, the flow of the game on the premise that the game ball is launched will be described. In the following description, reference numerals F1 to F47 and the like in the drawings are indicated with parentheses as appropriate. Further, “winning” used in the following description means that “the detected ball is treated as valid”.

[F1] During normal game For example, when a player starts a game with the pachinko machine 1, it is assumed that the internal state of the pachinko machine 1 is in a "normal game" state. In the present embodiment, the state of “normally playing” is “non-time shortened state (ordinary drawing low probability)” with respect to the normal symbol (operating lottery), and “low probability state (special feature) with respect to the special symbol (internal drawing). Means low probability).

[F2] Normal symbol non-winning [F1] During normal game, when the game passes through the middle start gate 20 (or the right start gate 21), the above-described operation lottery is executed. When the result of the operation lottery is non-winning, no internal state change occurs, and [F1] normal game is continued as it is.

[F3] Per normal symbol in normal game On the other hand, [F1] If the game lottery is won during normal game, the game flow proceeds to the next stage.

[F4] Variable Start Winning Device Operation In this case, the variable start winning device 28 is operated, and it becomes possible to generate a winning at the start winning port 28a as described above. Due to the configuration of the game area 8a (board surface), it is necessary to drive a game ball toward the right side in the game area 8a after winning the normal symbol (action lottery).

[F5] No winning When the variable starting winning device 28 is in operation (operating time 6.0 seconds) and no winning is made to the starting winning port 28a, the game flow returns to [F1] normal game. In this case, the game flow is resumed from the operation lottery.

[F6] Starting Port Winning In contrast, when a winning to the starting winning port 28a occurs while the variable start winning device 28 is operating (operating time 6.0 seconds), the game flow further proceeds to the next stage. In addition, although the winning that triggers the internal lottery is valid only once, each time a plurality of winnings (on average, 7 to 8 winnings) occur during operation of the variable start winning device 28, A prize bonus (for example, 12 prize ball payouts per prize ball) is given to the player.

[F7] Special symbol variation A special symbol (internal lottery) is performed in response to the occurrence of a winning at the start winning port 28a. As a result, the special symbol display device 34 displays the variation of the special symbol. Further, when the fluctuation time has elapsed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed according to the result of the internal lottery.

[F8] Non-winning When the internal lottery is not won, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner. In this case, the game flow returns to [F1] normal game and is resumed from the operation lottery.

[F11] Normal symbol 1 winning When the winning symbol is an internal lottery and the current winning symbol corresponds to the above-mentioned “normal symbol 1”, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner representing “normal symbol 1”. In this case, the game flow further proceeds to the next stage.

[F12] Variable winning device operation
The variable winning device 30 is opened by winning in the special symbol (internal lottery), and the number of times of opening is 2 (2 rounds). In the case of “normal symbol 1”, the probability variation function operation flag is not set, but the time reduction function operation count is set to 100 times. For this reason, the game flow after the opening operation of the variable winning device 30 is not [F1] during normal game, but proceeds to the stage of [F31] time reduction. In addition, the game flow from [F31] time is described later.

[F16] Probability Variation 1, 2 Winning On the other hand, if the winning symbol corresponds to the above-mentioned “probability variation 1”, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner representing “probability variation 1”. Alternatively, when the winning symbol corresponds to the “probability variation 2”, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner representing the “probability variation 2”. In either case, the game flow proceeds to the following stage.

[F14] Limiter remaining number set [F1a] In the case of normal winning, the “limiter count” is internally set to the remaining 16 times (the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the initial limiter 17 times) (limiter remaining) Number = 16).

[F18] Variable prize-winning device operation (during big role)
By winning the special symbol (internal lottery), the variable winning device 30 performs a two-round opening operation. In addition, when either of the “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” is met, the probability variation function operation flag is set and the time reduction function operation frequency is set to 10,000 times. The game flow after the opening operation of 30 proceeds to the probability change (high probability, short time: F19).

[F19] Probability change (high probability, short time)
In the present embodiment, once the game flow enters [F19] probability change, it is easy to continue [F19] probability change in terms of probability. Hereinafter, this point will be specifically described.

[F20] Normal symbol non-winning [F19] During probability change, the winning probability of the normal symbol (working lottery) is set to approximately one-tenth (98/99), so it is probable that it will not win rare. However, in theory, there is a possibility of non-winning, and if it is not won, the game in [F19] probability change will be continued.

[F21] Per normal symbol during probability change In the present embodiment, due to the configuration of the game area 8a (board surface), [F19] During the probability change, a game ball is shot into the right side portion in the game area 8a (so-called "right hit"). Is assumed. As a result, when the game ball passes through the right start gate 21, it is won with almost one change of the normal symbol. Since the variation time is shortened (0.6 seconds) as described above, the game flow proceeds to the next stage within a very short time.

[F22] Variable start winning device operation The variable start winning device 28 is activated by winning the normal symbol (actuation lottery), and the start winning port 28a is ready for winning. In the present embodiment, the operating time of the variable start winning device 28 is constant (6.0 seconds) even in the “time reduction state”. However, if a game ball is driven into the right side portion in the game area 8a, the game ball flows down toward the variable start winning device 28 that is operating as it is.

[F23] No winning Even if no winning is made to the starting winning opening 28a during operation of the variable starting winning device 28 for some reason (out of ball, clogged ball, defective firing operation, etc.), the game flow is [F19] Since the probability change is continued, there is no extreme disadvantage for the player.

[F24] Start opening prize [F19] If a winning to the start winning opening 28a occurs during the operation of the variable start winning apparatus 28 due to the "right-handed" flow during the probability change, the game flow proceeds to the next stage.

[F25] Special Symbol Variation Similarly, a special symbol (internal lottery) is performed in response to the occurrence of a winning at the start winning port 28a. As a result, the special symbol display device 34 displays the variation of the special symbol. Further, when the fluctuation time has elapsed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed according to the result of the internal lottery.

[F26] Non-winning With regard to the special symbol (internal lottery), the winning probability in the “high probability state” is approximately one-tenth (65535/65536), and therefore, almost no non-winning occurs in terms of probability. However, in the rare event that the internal lottery is not won, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner. In this case, since the game flow continues during [F19] probability change, there is no extreme disadvantage for the player. Moreover, since the maximum number of times the time shortening function is activated is set to 10,000 times, even if one non-winning event occurs, the number of time reductions still remains.

[F27] Probability Variation 1, 2 Winning In this embodiment, since the probability variation ratio is 98% of the total as described above, the probability variation symbol is selected at a high frequency when winning. [F19] When the winning symbol falls under either “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” during probability variation, 10,000 times are added as the number of times the time shortening function is activated as described above. In [F19], the continuation during the probability change is confirmed internally.

[F28] Limiter remaining number -1
In this case, since the positive variation is continuously selected in the “high probability state”, the “limiter count” is subtracted internally (limiter remaining number−1).

[F18] Variable prize-winning device operation (during big role)
Similarly, the variable winning device 30 performs a two-round opening operation by winning a special symbol (internal lottery). The probability variation function activation flag is set and the time shortening function activation count is set to 10000 times for both cases of “probability variation symbol 1” and “probability variation symbol 2”. In addition, the game flow after the opening operation of the variable winning device 30 continues to be in the process of being probabilistic (high probability, short time: F19).

[Chance zone due to certain change]
As described above, once the game flow shifts to [F19] during certain change, [F21] from the normal symbol [F22] variable start winning device operation, [F24] start opening winning, [F25] special symbol fluctuation, [F27 ) Probability symbol 1, 2, winning, [F28] Limiter remaining -1, and [F18] Variable winning device activated, [F19] Looping during probability change is most frequent (or probability, rate, ratio) It becomes easy to occur. In this case, since the variable start winning device 28 is operated once in one loop and the variable winning device 30 performs the two round opening operation, the game ball is basically driven into the right portion in the game area 8a. If it is, the winning ball is paid out in response to the occurrence of the winning at the start winning opening 28a and the winning at the large winning opening 30b as it is (winning privilege granting means).

  Each time the above loop is performed once, [F28] Limiter remaining number -1 decreases the remaining "limiter count", but the same frequency remains high until the remaining zero is reached. The loop will be repeated.

[F29] Normal Symbol 1 Winning during Probability On the other hand, if [F19] Winning Symbol corresponds to “Normal Symbol 1” during Probability Change, the game flow is as follows. In this case, since it is not a probabilistic symbol, the “high probability state” is not maintained, but since 100 times is added as the number of times the time shortening function is activated, the continuation of the “time shortening state” is promised internally at this point. .

[F30] Variable winning device activated
Similarly, the variable winning device 30 performs a two-round opening operation by winning a special symbol (internal lottery). Although not shown, the remaining limiter count is cleared to 0 after the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the control process of the main control CPU 72 as described above (limiter reset).

[F31] Shorter time [F19] If “normal symbol 1” is met from the probability change, the probability variation function activation flag is cleared, but the time reduction function activation count is set to 100 times. The game flow after the release operation shifts to a short time (low probability short time) (continuous number resetting opportunity generating means).

[F20] Normal symbol non-winning [F31] During the short time, the winning probability of the normal symbol (working lottery) is set to about 1 (98/99), so it is almost impossible to win Absent. In theory, however, there is a possibility of non-winning, so if it is not won, the game in [F31] time is continued.

[F32] per normal symbol during time reduction [F31] Even during the time reduction, if the game ball passes through the right start gate 21 in the “right-handed” flow as it is, it is won with almost one normal symbol change. Since the variation time is shortened (0.6 seconds) as described above, the game flow proceeds to the next stage within a very short time.

[F33] Variable start winning device operation The normal start (operating lottery) winning operation activates the variable start winning device 28 so that a winning can be generated at the start winning port 28a.

[F34] No win Similarly, even if no winning is made to the start winning opening 28a during the operation of the variable start winning device 28 for some reason (out of ball, clogged ball, etc.), the game flow is [ F31] Since the time is continued, there is no extreme penalty for the player.

[F35] Start opening prize [F31] If the winning to the start winning opening 28a occurs during the operation of the variable start winning apparatus 28 due to the "right-handed" flow in the short time, the game flow proceeds to the next stage.

[F36] Special Symbol Variation Similarly, a special symbol (internal lottery) is performed in response to the occurrence of a winning at the start winning opening 28a. As a result, the special symbol display device 34 displays the variation of the special symbol. Further, when the fluctuation time has elapsed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed according to the result of the internal lottery.

[F37] Non-winning [F31] Regarding the special symbol (internal lottery) during the short time, the winning probability in the “low probability state” is one half (32768/65536), so there will be a chance of non-winning In that case, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner. However, in this case, since the game flow continues for [F31], there is no extreme disadvantage for the player. In addition, since the number of times the time shortening function is activated is set to 100 times, even if one non-winning event occurs, the number of time reductions (99 times) still remains. Therefore, during [F31] time reduction, it is relatively easy to win a prize by internal lottery.

[F38] Probability change symbol 1 and 2 winning in short time And since the probability change ratio is 98% of the whole as described above, the probability change symbol is also selected with high frequency at the time of winning. [F31] When the winning symbol corresponds to either “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” from the time shortening, 10,000 times are added as the number of times of the time reduction function operation as described above.

[F39] Number of remaining limiters = 16
In this case, since [F31] the “low probability state” during the time reduction corresponds to the first probability variation winning, the “limiter count” is internally reset here (the limiter remaining) Number = 16). Furthermore, in this case, since it is a chance variation winning game, the following game flow will proceed.

[F18] Variable prize-winning device operation (during big role)
By winning the special symbol (internal lottery), the variable winning device 30 performs a two-round opening operation. [F31] The probability variation function activation flag is set and the time shortening function activation count is set to 10000 times for any of the cases where “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” falls under time reduction. Therefore, the game flow after the opening operation of the variable winning device 30 is actually changed (high probability time short: F19) is resumed (re-entry, return).

[Addition of a limiter by normal winning during a certain change]
In the above game flow, even if the “limiter count” is subtracted to some extent while repeating the loop of [F19] probability change, if “normal symbol 1” is won in the middle, the “limiter count” is thereby determined. Is reset, and the “limiter count” is reset to the maximum value again by winning “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” (continuous count resetting trigger generation means).

  As a result, even if [F19] “Limiter count” during probability change is reaching the remaining 0, if “Normal design 1” is elected before that (selection ratio 2%), “Limiter” Since the “number of times” is reset, the game characteristic that the number of loops during [F19] probability change can be extended accordingly is realized.

[F40] Normal symbol 1 winning in time reduction Note that when the winning symbol corresponds to "normal symbol 1" following [F31] time reduction, 100 times is added as the number of times of the time shortening function operation. Accordingly, the game flow continues for [F31] time reduction after [F30] variable winning device operation.

  The above is the game flow that can occur before [F19] “Limiter count” reaches 0 remaining during [F19] probability change. On the other hand, as a result of repeating the above loop during [F19] probability change, when the remaining "limiter count" reaches zero, the following game flow is performed.

[Game flow when reaching the limiter]
FIG. 37 is a game flow diagram showing a game flow when the “limiter count” reaches the remaining 0 times. For example, in the case where [F19] variable start winning device is activated and [F24] start opening winning is generated per [F21] normal symbol in a state where [F19] “limiter count” reaches 0 remaining during [F19] probability change. Suppose.

[F41] Special Symbol Variation Similarly, a special symbol (internal lottery) is performed in response to the occurrence of a winning at the start winning opening 28a. As a result, the special symbol display device 34 displays the variation of the special symbol. Further, when the fluctuation time has elapsed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed according to the result of the internal lottery.

[F42] Non-winning Regardless of the “limiter count”, the winning probability of the “high probability state” with respect to the special symbol (internal lottery) is about one-tenth (65535/65536). Does not occur. However, in the rare event that the internal lottery is not won, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner. In this case, the game flow continues during [F19] probability change, but the “limiter count” remains 0. In addition, since the maximum number of times the time shortening function is activated is set to 10,000 times, the number of time reductions still remains even if a non-winning event occurs.

[F43] Normal symbol 1 winning [F19] The game flow is as follows when the winning symbol corresponds to “normal symbol 1” while the remaining “limiter count” reaches 0. In this case, since it is not a probability variable symbol, the remaining number of “limiter times” is not particularly related, and 100 times is added as the number of times the time shortening function is activated as it is.

[F44] Variable winning device activated
The variable winning device 30 performs a two-round opening operation by winning a special symbol (internal lottery). At this time, the remaining “limiter count” has reached 0, but the remaining limiter is cleared to 0 after the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the control process of the main control CPU 72 as described above.

[Chance zone continuation]
In this case, the game flow returns to [F31] time shortening, and from there, again in the “time shortened state”, [F32] per normal symbol, [F33] variable start winning device operation, [F35] start opening winning, [F36] special A game flow such as symbol variation proceeds. Then, [F38] Probability change symbol 1 and 2 wins, [F39] Limiter remaining number = 16, the “limiter count” is reset, and the game flow again proceeds to [F19] Probability change.

[F45] Probability symbol 1 winning → Forced normal 1
[F19] The game flow is as follows when the winning symbol corresponds to “probability symbol 1” with the remaining “limiter count” during probability variation reaching zero. In this case, since the remaining “limiter count” has already reached 0, it is not possible to select the probability variation symbol on the control process of the main control CPU 72, and the “normal symbol 1” is forcibly set as described above. Will be selected. In this case, the probability variation function activation flag is cleared, but 100 times is added as the number of times the time shortening function is activated, so the “time shortening state” continues.

[F44] Variable winning device activated
The variable winning device 30 performs a two-round opening operation by winning a special symbol (internal lottery). Similarly, the remaining “limiter count” has reached 0 at this time, but the remaining limiter count is cleared to 0 after the special symbol is stopped.

[Chance zone continuation]
In this case as well, the game flow returns to [F31] time reduction, and from there, again in the “time reduction state”, [F32] per normal symbol, [F33] variable start winning device operation, [F35] start opening winning), [F36] A game flow such as special symbol variation proceeds. Then, [F38] Probability change symbol 1 and 2 wins, [F39] Limiter remaining number = 16, the “limiter count” is reset, and the game flow again proceeds to [F19] Probability change.

[F46] Probability symbol 2 winning → Forced normal 2
On the other hand, if the winning symbol is “probability variation 2” in the state where [F19] “limiter count” during probability variation has reached 0, the game flow is as follows. Also in this case, since the “limiter count” has already reached 0, it is not possible to select the probability variation symbol on the control process of the main control CPU 72. Then, “probability variation 2” is forcibly changed to “normal symbol 2” as described above. In this case, since the probability variation function operation flag is cleared and 0 (= no time reduction) is set as the time shortening function operation count, the time shortening function operation flag is also cleared.

[F47] Variable winning device operation
The variable winning device 30 performs a two-round opening operation by winning a special symbol (internal lottery). Similarly, the remaining “limiter count” has reached 0 at this time, but the remaining limiter count is cleared to 0 after the special symbol is stopped.

[End of Chance Zone]
In this case, the game flow returns to [F1] normal game (normal game), and becomes a “non-time shortened state” and a “low probability state”.

[Summary of game flow]
As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game flow is once changed during [F19] probability change, the following features are clarified.
38 and 39 are conceptual diagrams showing the classification of game flow patterns in the present embodiment. In the following, description will be given in order.

(1) Basic pattern (A) in FIG. 38: If the game flow is once changed to [F19] probability change after winning “probability symbol 1” or “probability symbol 2”, basically a very high rate ( With a selection ratio of 98%), positive variation wins occur continuously. Therefore, if the “limiter count” before the first (first) chance of winning the change is considered as 17 times (up to 17 consecutive times including the first) for convenience, the remaining 16 “limiter count” will remain in the second consecutive win. 1 time is subtracted from the next consecutive 3rd chance change win, and it is 15 times. Further, in the fourth consecutive positive variation winning, 1 is further subtracted to 14 times (not shown).

  After this, the “Limiter Count” is subtracted every time the chance variation wins continuously, and when the 17th consecutive chance change winning count occurs from the first count, 1 is subtracted there and the “Limiter Count” remains. Reach 0 times. In this case, since the winning with the normal symbol is forcibly changed at the time of the next winning, the probability variation winning is forcibly terminated after 17 consecutive times.

(2) Limiter addition pattern In FIG. 38 (B): In the basic pattern of (1) above, before the “limiter count” reaches the remaining 0, for example, after the first n times of positive variation selection, the “limiter” Consider a case where “number of times” corresponds to “normal symbol 1” with (17−n) remaining (selection ratio 2%). In this case, 100 times are added as the number of times the time shortening function is activated.

  In FIG. 38 (C): Then, after the completion of the major role, the time shifts to the above [F31] time shortening, so after passing the normal symbol (actuation lottery) winning, the next special symbol (internal lottery) “probability variation symbol 1” or “ By winning (combination selection ratio 98%) with “probable variation 2”, the “number of limiters” is reset. In this case, the probability variation winning corresponds to the first time after the normal winning, and therefore the possibility of further 17 consecutive chances of winning the probability variation including the first time is newly generated. In this case, the “number of limiters” is the sum of the newly generated 17 times (excluding the remaining (17−n) times) (ie, n times).

  Such addition can be repeated, and even if the “limiter count” is reset, if the “limiter count” reaches “0” again after the reset, 100 times are added as the number of shortening function operations.

  In FIG. 38 (D): Then, after the end of the role, in the same way, the time shifts to the above [F31] time, so the normal symbol (working lottery) is won and the next special symbol (internal lottery) is selected. ”Or“ Probability variation 2 ”and winning (combination selection ratio 98%), the“ limiter count ”is reset there. Similarly, the probability variation winning in this case corresponds to the first time after the normal winning, so that the possibility of further 17 consecutive chance variation winnings including the first time has newly occurred.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, if the normal winning is performed before reaching the limiter during the [F19] accuracy change after selecting the first time limiter 17 times, the “limiter count” is reset (limiter) at the next time the accuracy change is selected. [F19] As a result of resuming the probability change, it is possible to realize a game as if the “limiter count” is added one after another. However, the “limiter count” is not increased in game control, and the normal symbol winning is always sandwiched between them, so that the gambling of the game is not extremely enhanced. Further, the number of times of addition is “17 times—the current number of remaining times”, and when the addition occurs, the number of remaining times is discarded.

(3) Continuation pattern after reaching the limiter (addition pattern after reaching the limiter)
In FIG. 39 (E): On the other hand, after selecting the first limiter 17 times, when the limiter arrival does not occur and the “limiter count” reaches 0 remaining according to the basic pattern (1) above, Even if it corresponds to the “probable variation 1” at the 18th time, it is forcibly changed to “normal design 1”.

  In FIG. 39 (F): However, since the “normal symbol 1” forcibly changed in this case is added 100 times as the number of times the time shortening function is activated, [F31] Migrate to Then, after winning the normal symbol (working lottery) and winning the next special symbol (internal lottery) with “probable variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” (composite selection ratio 98%), the “limiter count” is set again there. Is done. The probability variation winning in this case corresponds to the first time after the end of the probability variation, and therefore, the possibility of 17 consecutive chance variation winnings including the first time is added.

  In this case, as the game flow, [F19] during the probability change is temporarily ended by reaching the limiter, but when the winning symbol at the time of reaching the limiter is forcibly changed to “normal symbol 1 (100 times short)”, [F31] The “limiter count” is newly set at the time of the next chance of winning from the short time, and [F19] is being resumed. In addition, if it happens to correspond to “normal symbol 1” after reaching the limiter, 100 times is added as the number of times the time shortening function is activated, and the time shifts to [F31] time reduction after the end of the major role. Therefore, the rate of shifting to [F31] time reduction after reaching the limiter is 57%, which combines the selection ratios of “normal symbol 1” and “probability variation 1”.

  In any case, by winning the “normal symbol with short time” after reaching the limiter, it is possible to realize a game characteristic as if the “number of limiters” seemed to be added (in this case, +17 times). Here too, the “variable number of limiters” is not increased in game control, but a forced normal symbol win (or pure normal symbol win) due to reaching the limiter in the meantime is generated. There is no increase in gambling.

(4) End pattern (G) in FIG. 39: On the other hand, if it corresponds to “probability variation 2” at the 18th consecutive time after reaching the limiter, it is forcibly changed to “normal symbol 2”. In this case, since the number of times the time shortening function is activated is not added to the “normal symbol 2” that is forcibly changed (0 times = no time saving), after the completion of the main role, [F1] shifts to the normal game, [ F19] The game under certainty ends.

  The above is the outline of the prominent patterns (1) to (4) of the game flow by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. In particular, the above (2) limiter addition pattern and (3) the continuation pattern after reaching the limiter. The player's profit increases as each game flow occurs. However, the above patterns (2) and (3) are only performed on the control processing by the main control CPU 72, and it is difficult for the player to perceive the flow directly.

  Of course, if the display mode of the special symbol display device 34 is carefully observed, it is possible for the player to confirm what winning symbol the game corresponds to during the game. However, the special symbol display device 34 itself is a 7-segment LED, and the display mode of any winning symbol is somewhat symbolic (for example, “巳”, “self”, “L”, “¬”, “Γ”). Therefore, it is difficult to instantaneously determine the type of winning symbol from such a display mode.

  Further, the “limiter count” is an internal control variable, and is not displayed on the game state display device 38 in particular, so that the “limiter count” is added during the game, It is difficult for the player to directly know the control information such as that the “limiter count” has reached the remaining 0, or that the time limit has been reached and the normal symbol has been won.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, an effect technique is used to easily convey to the player that the game flow is progressing along the patterns (1) to (4). Hereinafter, the production technique employed in the present embodiment will be described with some examples. Note that these are merely examples, and there is no particular limitation on the contents of the effect design and the effect image.

[Normal design off-line production]
First, FIG. 40 is a continuous diagram showing an example of an effect executed when [F2] normal symbol is not won. This effect example corresponds to normal symbol variation display and stop display, and is specifically an example of a variation display effect and a result display effect based on the effect symbol. Of these, the variable display effect corresponds to a series of effects that are performed during the period from when the normal symbol starts variable display to when it is stopped and displayed (including the fixed stop). The result display effect is an effect that represents that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed and the result of the operation lottery at that time is a combination of the effect symbols. As described above, since the normal symbol display device 33 itself is a lighting / flashing display using two LEDs, it does not have an appealing appearance. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 basically performs a variable display effect and a result display effect using the effect symbols. In addition, since the normal symbol is only displayed in a simple manner (for example, one upper lamp is lit), the player can determine whether or not the winning symbol is selected unless the result is a result display by the effect symbol. Hard to notice. On the contrary, this means that the player basically has a tendency to judge the result of the operation lottery from the contents of the production, and it can be said that the production plays an important role in the game flow.

  The effect symbols include, for example, a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, which are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Of these, the medium effect design is smaller in size than the other left and right effect designs. In addition, the left and right effect designs are designed with a picture card with some image (for example, a character not shown), for example, with the Chinese numerals “1” to “9”. Is a design in which some images are added together with the arithmetic numbers “1” to “9”. These left effect symbol, middle effect symbol, and right effect symbol potentially constitute a symbol sequence in which, for example, Chinese numerals are arranged in descending order of “9” to “1”. Such a symbol sequence is variably displayed so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction in the left region, middle region, and right region on the screen.

  FIG. 40 is a continuous diagram illustrating an example of an effect image corresponding to a normal symbol variation display and a stop display. Here, an example of the change display effect and the stop display effect performed using the effect symbol is shown for the variation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (out). This variable display effect corresponds to a series of effects that are performed from the time when a normal symbol starts variable display to when it is stopped (including a fixed stop). The stop display effect is an effect that represents that the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the result of the operation lottery at that time is a combination of the effect symbols. Here, before explaining the specific contents of the control processing, the basic flow of the change display effect and stop display effect for each change employed in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before change display]
In FIG. 40 (A): For example, in a state before the normal symbol starts to change (a state in which the demonstration effect is not being performed), a row of three effect symbols is displayed large in the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. . At this time, in accordance with the stop display of the normal symbol, the effect symbol is also stopped.

  In addition, a marker (indicated by reference numeral M1 in the figure) indicating the number of working memories of a normal symbol is displayed at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The marker M1 represents the number of operating symbols of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol operating memory lamp 33) corresponding to each display number, and the displayed number increases or decreases in conjunction with the change of the operating memory number during the game. In addition, for the marker M1, the marker M1 corresponding to the normal symbol is displayed as, for example, a circle (◯) in order to facilitate visual discrimination. In the example of (A) in FIG. 40, all four markers M1 are lit and displayed, indicating that the number of working memories of the normal symbol is four (stored number display effect execution means).

[Fluctuating area]
In addition, the changing area HA is formed at the left end position of the band-like area at the bottom of the display screen. In the changing area HA, a marker image corresponding to the working memory consumed by the current change is displayed at a certain time. When the working memory is consumed due to the start of the next fluctuation, the marker image displayed next to the changing area HA (the head of each of the left and right columns) moves to the changing area HA, where there is a certain time (for example, 1 to 2 seconds). In this embodiment, if a marker image of the band-like region remains after the movement, a display is performed in which the marker image is sequentially moved (shifted) to the left so as to close after the leftmost marker image is missing. When a marker image is displayed in the changing area HA and a certain time elapses or the normal symbol is not changing, the changing area HA is grayed out as shown.

  Further, during the variation display of the effect symbols, for example, the fourth symbol (reference numerals Z1 and Z2 are added in the diagram) is displayed at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are “fourth effect symbols” following the left, middle, and right effect symbols, and are displayed in a synchronized manner during the change display of the effect symbols. Note that the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are simple marks (for example, “□” figure) with colors, and for example, changing the display color can express a variable display. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to a normal symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to a special symbol.

  Further, the fourth symbols Z1, Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation. This is to objectively clarify that the result display effect is correctly performed and the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. Therefore, if the result of the operation lottery is actually “winning” instead of “out of”, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a corresponding manner (for example, blue display color or red display color). Similarly, if the result of the internal lottery corresponding to the special symbol is “big hit”, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to that (for example, blue display color or red display color).

[Normal design wins]
Further, “0” is displayed in the winning number display section 277 of the data display device 270 connected to the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, it indicates that the operation lottery regarding the normal symbol has not been won yet. Although not shown, “0” is also displayed in the state transition number display section 278 of the data display device 270 in the same manner.

[Variable display production start]
40B: For example, in synchronization with the start of the change of the normal symbol, the change display effect is started when the three effect symbols scroll and change on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42. That is, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol, the variable display effect is started such that the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol scroll in the vertical direction on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42. In the figure, the change display of the effect symbol is simply indicated by a downward arrow. Also, during the variable display, each effect symbol is displayed in a transparent state (transparent display), and at this time, an image (background image) that is the background of the effect symbol is displayed on the display screen in an easily visible state. Has been.

  The background image in this case represents, for example, a landscape in which a female character wearing a yukata is sitting on a chaise lounge and relaxing as if the evening is cool. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, “normal mode”. In the present embodiment, the “normal mode” corresponds to a normal state in which the fluctuation time shortening function is inactive and the probability fluctuation function is inactive. In addition to this, various modes are provided for effects, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode (status display effect execution means). The difference between these modes may correspond to an internal “time reduction state” or a “high probability state”. The mode corresponding to each internal state will be further described later. Although not specifically illustrated here, a mode in which a notice effect is performed by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like on the display screen after that is also possible.

  Further, during the variation display of the effect symbols, the fourth symbol Z1 is variably displayed at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variation display by changing its display color.

[Example of production when the number of working memories decreases]
Here, since the number of memory of the normal symbol is decreased by one with the start of the fluctuation, the number of displayed markers M1 is decreased by one in conjunction therewith. For example, if there are four operating memory numbers so far, only one of the oldest (oldest) memory number displays in the marker M1 is hidden, and an effect consumed by the operation lottery is also performed. As a result, the player can be informed of the fact that the number of working memories related to the normal symbol has decreased.

  Then, since the first working memory in the storage order is consumed and the remaining number becomes three, the three markers M1 remaining on the screen are shifted in one direction (here, leftward) by one each. Production is being performed. As a result, the context of the change in the number of working memories can be accurately expressed in the production, and the player can be intuitively and easily informed that the working memory has been consumed and decreased by one. it can.

[Left design stop]
In FIG. 40 (C): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has elapsed, the left effect design first stops changing. In this example, the effect design representing the Chinese numeral “eight” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. Here, illustration of the background image is omitted (the same applies to the following).

[Right production symbol stop]
In FIG. 40 (D): After the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol stops changing thereafter. In this example, the effect symbol representing the Chinese numeral “three” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. Since it has already been determined that the reach state does not occur at this point, it is almost clear on the appearance that the current fluctuation is a non-reach (normal) fluctuation. Here, reach fluctuations due to slip patterns and the like are excluded. “Slip pattern” means, for example, that once the production symbol representing the Chinese numeral “seven” stops, the production symbol representing the Chinese numeral “eight” stops by sliding the design row for one symbol, thereby reaching It is to develop into. Alternatively, once the production symbol representing the Chinese numeral “nine” stops, the design symbol slips one pattern in the opposite direction and the production symbol representing the Chinese numeral “eight” stops, thereby developing reach. There are also patterns. In addition, for example, when a production symbol representing a completely different number such as “five” is temporarily stopped and then a character appears on the screen and the right production symbol row is changed again, the Chinese numeral “eight” is displayed. There is also a pattern in which the directing design representing is stopped and developed into reach.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 40 (E): The last medium effect symbol stops in synchronization with the stop display of the normal symbol (not necessarily at the same time). When the result of the current operation lottery is non-winning, and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (out of) manner, the stop display effect is similarly performed in the non-winning (out of) state. That is, in the example shown in the figure, the effect symbol representing the arithmetic number “1” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. In this case, the combination of effect symbols is “eight”-“1”-“three”. Since this is a gap of “”, it is expressed in the production that the variation this time corresponds to the normal “falling”. At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation.

[Normal design wins]
In addition, since the result of the normal symbol operation lottery of this time is non-winning (missed), the winning number display section 277 of the data display device 270 connected to the pachinko machine 1 keeps displaying “0”. It has become. Although not shown, the start number display unit 276 displays the count number by adding one.

  The above is an example of the change display effect and the result display effect (during non-winning) performed using the effect symbol for each change. Through such an effect, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning, and finally the result of the operation lottery can be clearly taught in the effect.

  In addition, the above example is for the case of non-winning, but at the time of winning (winning), after the reach effect is executed during the variable display effect, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a big win manner in the result display effect. At this time, the stop display mode of the effect symbol is basically selected in correspondence with the winning symbol (stop display mode of the normal symbol display device 33) selected internally by the main control CPU 72.

[Normal design per design]
Next, FIG. 41 is a continuous diagram showing an example of an effect executed at the time of [F3] normal symbol hitting. In FIG. 40, an example of an effect that is out of place has been described, but in FIG. 41, an example of an effect that is won (winning) after a super reach effect is described.

[Variable display effects]
In FIG. 41 (A): Similarly, the lines of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are arranged in the vertical direction (for example, upward) on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 substantially in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol. The scrolling display effect is started as if scrolling from the bottom to the bottom.

[Preliminary production before reach (first stage)]
41 (B): Next, at a relatively early stage of the variable display effect, the first stage pre-reach notice effect using the character's picture image (picture card) is performed. This pre-reach pre-announcement effect is a pre-announcement effect in which the change of the mode progresses in stages from one stage to a plurality of stages (for example, 2 to 5 stages) according to a predetermined order. The pattern image used in the pre-reach notice effect is located in front of the effect pattern that is displayed on the screen in a variable manner, for example, so as to appear suddenly from the left edge of the screen (other appearance modes) May be.) Note that the “pre-reach notice” means that a reach or a chance of winning is announced before any effect symbol is stopped and displayed. By executing such a “pre-reach announcement effect”, an effect can be obtained in which the player has a sense of expectation that “the possibility of winning may increase to reach”.

[Advance notice before the reach occurs (second stage)]
In FIG. 41 (C): after the first stage of the pre-reach notice effect is executed, the change of the pre-reach notice effect proceeds to the second stage. Here, an effect using a character pattern image different from the previous one is performed as the notice effect before the occurrence of reach in the second stage. Specifically, another pattern image additionally appears from the right end of the screen, and is displayed so as to overlap the front of the previously displayed pattern image. The picture image displayed at this time is larger in size than the picture image displayed previously. And the effect by the sound output that the character expressed by the picture image emits a dialogue (for example, “I will reach” etc.) is also performed.

  Such a pre-reach notice announcement effect (second stage) using the second pattern image is one step further than the pre-reach notice effect (first stage) performed in FIG. 41 (B). It is a development type. In general, it may be expressed as “step-up notice” or the like, referring to the “pre-reach notice notice effect” that develops in this way. Here, an example is given in which the second-stage pattern image appears in the pre-reach notice effect, but the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage pattern images appear and appear one after another. There may be. Further, for example, the size may be enlarged each time the third, fourth, and fifth-stage pattern images appear and appear one after another. Even at this stage, the variation display of the effect symbols is continued. In any case, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility (expectation) to be hit by this change by making the change in the aspect of the advance notice effect before the occurrence of reach reach to more stages. (For example, the maximum expectation is suggested when progressing to the fifth stage).

[Stop of left design]
In FIG. 41 (D): The middle stage of the variable display effect is approached, and then the variable display of the left effect symbol is stopped. At this point, the effect symbol representing the Chinese numeral “seven” is stopped at the left position of the screen.

[Occurrence of reach condition]
In FIG. 41 (E): Subsequently to the left effect symbol, for example, the change display of the right effect symbol is stopped. At this point, since the production symbol representing the Chinese numeral “seven” is stopped at the right position of the screen, the Chinese numeral “seven”-“in a horizontal line (on one line) on the screen. Reach state of “Fluctuating”-“Seven” has occurred. On the screen, an image that emphasizes one line that is in a reach state is also displayed. In addition, an effect of outputting a voice such as “Reach!” Is performed.

  After the reach state occurs, the super reach effect is executed. In the super reach production, only the production symbols corresponding to the tempered numbers (here, the Chinese numeral “seven”) are displayed on the screen, and the others are not displayed. At this time, the effect design may be displayed in a reduced state at each corner of the screen.

[Preliminary notice after reach occurs (first time)]
In FIG. 41, (F): After a reach state has occurred, for example, an image representing the figure of “heart” forms a group, and a notice effect after the occurrence of reach (first time) is performed that passes diagonally on the screen. . In this case, the image of the “heart group” is suddenly displayed on the screen so that the visual appeal to the player can be enhanced. By executing such a notice effect after the visually lively reach occurs, the player can have an even greater expectation.

[Progress of reach production]
In FIG. 41 (G): following the notice effect after the first reach occurrence, for example, images representing arithmetic numbers “1” to “8” are displayed in a three-dimensional sequence on the screen, There is an effect in which numerical images are erased from the screen in the order of “1”, “2”, “3”,. Such an effect is also performed for the purpose of suggesting (impliciting) or reminding the player that the arithmetic number “7” remains “unerased” until the end. Also, when the arithmetic number “6” is deleted and the arithmetic number “7” remains in front of the screen, it is “hit”, but when the arithmetic number “7” is deleted, it is “out of”. It means that there is. In this case, for example, “8” as the arithmetic number is displayed on the screen after the arithmetic number “7” is deleted. Therefore, during this period, the numbers “1”, “2”, “3”,... Are deleted in order, and as the order of the numbers “5” approaches, the player's Tension and expectation will also increase. After this, for example, if up to the arithmetic number “5” is erased on the screen, then the next time the Chinese numeral “6” is erased, the possibility of “winning” will increase, so there is a game there. A person's tension increases at a stretch.

[Preliminary notice after the occurrence of reach (second time)]
In FIG. 41 (H): When the reach production is approaching the final stage, the image of the character is suddenly displayed on the screen as if it was split into a close-up, and the content that the character emits some dialogue (or silently) (The content may be that of smiling). At this point, for example, the content of the reach production is “If the arithmetical number“ 6 ”is deleted, then“ seven ”-“ 7 ”-“ seven ”will increase the chance of a normal symbol” ” is there. Therefore, by causing a character image to appear large at this timing, it is possible to obtain an effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that “may be a hit”.

[Result display effect]
In FIG. 41 (I): The last medium effect symbol stops substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the normal symbol. In this example, since it corresponds to “winning” internally, the effect design representing the arithmetical number “7” is stopped and displayed at the center of the screen, so that the effect design is “seven”-“ 7 ”-“ Seven ”is stopped and displayed.

  In FIG. 41 (J): Then, for example, the confirmed stop display is performed for the result display effect as the effect symbol substantially in synchronization with the fixed stop display of the normal symbol. The effect design fixed stop display is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle, and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. By performing such a fixed stop display, it is possible to teach the player that “per normal symbol” has been fixed in the production. However, in the present embodiment, since the hit of the normal symbol (operation lottery) does not guarantee the above [F19] high probability or [F31] time shortage, it is the content that appeals “winning” too much. Not. In other words, the “three-piece” image is relaxed to some extent by setting the display pattern of the medium effect symbol to a numerical value different from the left effect symbol and the medium effect symbol.

[Direction when variable start winning device is activated]
Next, FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of effects executed when [F4] variable start winning device is operated.

  42A: In this example, for example, a female character appears on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and a right-handed suggestion effect that produces a dialogue such as “Right-handed!” Is performed. In addition, a speech balloon image in which dialogue is written is displayed, and an arrow indicating the lower right direction of the board surface is displayed therein. By executing such an effect, it is possible to prompt the player to “right-hand” and to be aware that the operation of the variable start winning device 28 is started. At this time, sound may be generated from the speakers 54, 55, and 56 in accordance with the display of the dialogue as character information on the display screen.

[Normal design wins ("1")]
In addition, when the stop display in the mode in which the normal symbol represents winning is finished and the variable start winning device 28 starts operating (when the opening effect is started), the display of the winning number display portion 277 of the data display device 270 is displayed. “0” is changed to “1”. As a result, the data display device 270 can also teach the player “per symbol”.

  Therefore, since one winning number display section 277 of the data display device 270 is added to the fact that a winning ball can be acquired during the operation of the variable start winning device 28, the appearance of the data display device 270 can be improved.

[Number of status transitions ("1") blinking)
Although not shown, the display of the state transition number display section 278 of the data display device 270 is changed from “0” to “1” based on the operation of the variable start winning device 28. Thereby, in the data display device 270, the player can be informed that the current game state is staying in a special game state advantageous to the player. The state transition number display section 278 is displayed in a blinking state, and is in a special state (the variable start winning device 28 is in operation, the variable winning device 30 is in operation, or in a time shortening state (the lottery probability relating to a normal symbol). The state is continued until the state satisfying one of the high probability states) is completed.

  In FIG. 42 (B): After the right-handed suggestion effect, an effect in which the female character emits a dialogue such as “If you win the Janken Battle, enter the chance zone!” Is performed. As a result, the player can be instructed that the mode to be transferred is different depending on the victory or defeat of the “Janken Battle” that will be performed later, and when it wins, it will shift to an advantageous mode such as “Chance Zone”. This can be taught to the player.

  In FIG. 42 (C): After that, when a game ball enters the active variable start winning device 28 and the variation of the special symbol is started, characters such as “Janken Battle Start!” Are displayed on the screen. An effect is displayed in which the displayed image is displayed.

[Direction when special symbol changes]
FIG. 43 and FIG. 44 are continuous diagrams showing examples of effects executed when the above [F7] special symbol changes (within the fluctuation time). In this example, a game flow is assumed in which a winning is performed with a probability of 1/2 from a special symbol variation of [F7] and proceeding to either a probability variation symbol 1, 2 winning of [F16] or a normal winning of [F11]. Yes.

  For example, as shown in (D) of FIG. 43, at the beginning of this production, images of female characters (left side) and enemy characters (right side) are displayed side by side, and they rub each other. A state where sparks are scattered in the middle is expressed stunningly by moving images. Further, by appropriately displaying characters such as “game” on the display screen, it is possible to remind the player that “the game of two players will finally begin”. Further, at this time, the dialogue of each character (for example, “absolutely win!”, “Please come!”, Etc.) may be output as sound. In this case, for example, the degree of expectation can be suggested by the content of the dialogue (the more the content of the dialogue is more positive, the higher the degree of expectation).

  In FIG. 43 (E): In the middle of the production, the two characters disappear from the display screen and the character information “Janken” is displayed large. As a result, it is possible to remind the player of the notion that “characters are fighting against each other”. In addition, it may be a mode in which a shout, sound effect, BGM, etc., such as “Janken de match” are output as sound.

  In FIG. 43 (F): In the middle stage of the production, two characters display a moving image with the contents “Janken's hand out”. In this example, a series of situations from the left side of the screen to the appearance of the friendly character's hand “Choki” and the appearance of the enemy character's hand “par” from the right side of the screen are represented. At this time, in accordance with the movement of each character, a mode in which a shout such as “Janken-pon!” Is output as sound.

  In FIG. 44 (G): At the end of the production, it is displayed that the ally character has won a brilliant victory as a result of the game. In this example, the ally-winning character is a close-up in the center of the display screen, and the appearance of showing the victory V-sign beside the face is expressed in a stunning manner. In addition, by displaying the characters “I won!” On the display screen, the player can be reminded of the idea of “winning Janken”.

  In FIG. 44 (H): After winning in the Janken Battle, a female character appears and an effect is displayed in which an image with a character such as “Chance Zone Entered !!” is displayed. As a result, it can be taught that “the transition to probability change has been confirmed at this big hit”.

  In FIG. 44 (I): An effect in which a female character emits a dialogue such as “Please make a right strike as it is!” And an effect in which an arrow indicating the right direction on the board is displayed are executed. Thereby, it can be taught that the game method when the mode is the “chance zone” is a method of causing the game ball to flow on the right side of the board surface. Therefore, the game method in the “chance zone” is a game method in which the game ball is passed through the right start gate 21 or the game ball is entered (winning) in the variable start winning device 28 or the variable winning device 30. It can be suggested to the player.

[Examples of special symbols when not selected]
FIG. 45 is a continuous diagram showing an example of an effect executed when the special symbol changes (within the change time) when not entering the chance zone. Specifically, in the case of proceeding from [F7] special symbol variation to [F8] non-winning, for example, the following effects are executed.

  In FIG. 45 (J): In this example, a series of states from the left of the screen until the friendly character's hand “Choki” appears, and from the right of the screen the enemy character's hand “Goo” appears. It is expressed.

  In FIG. 45 (K): It is displayed that, as a result of the match, unfortunately the ally character has been defeated. In this example, the defeated ally character becomes a close-up in the center of the display screen, and the state of disappointment is expressed in a stunning manner. In addition, by displaying the letters “Lose ...” in the display screen, the player is reminded of the idea that “Janken was defeated”. Can't be taught ".

  In FIG. 45 (L): After that, an effect in which a female character emits a dialogue such as “Please return to the left!” And an effect in which an arrow indicating the left direction of the board is displayed are executed. Thereby, it can be taught that the mode returns to the “normal mode” and the game method returns to the method of causing the game ball to flow on the left side of the board surface.

[Number of state transitions ("1") lighting state]
Although not shown, the gaming state is not a special state but is in a normal state (the variable start winning device 28 is inactive, the variable winning device 30 is inactive, and the non-time-saving state is in effect). Based on the above, in the state transition number display section 278 of the data display device 270, for example, the counter number “1” is changed from the blinking state to the lighting state. Thereby, the data display device 270 can tell the player that the special state has ended.

[Direction during certain change]
Next, FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an example of effects executed when the game flow proceeds during the probability change of [F19] from the operation of [F18] variable winning device. Here, although “probability changing effect” is used, it may be an example of an effect executed when the game flow progresses to a chance zone that combines [F19] probability change and [F31] time.

  In FIG. 46, (a): When an effect in the chance zone is started, for example, an effect that expresses how a female character runs on a car in the center of the screen is executed. In this way, the player can be informed that the game state has been changed from the normal mode (for example, a background image showing a female character relaxing and sitting) to the chance zone. .

[Normal design wins ("1")]
Note that the winning number display section 277 of the data display device 270 is also displayed in the state of “1” when the special symbol variation display (stop display) and the big hit game are ended. As a result, the number of counts displayed on the winning number display section 277 is not related to the special symbol but is related to the normal symbol, and is updated when the normal symbol is won and the normal electric accessory 28 is activated (the count is incremented by 1). ).

[Limiter count display, meter update effect]
Further, at the left position in the screen, for example, a limiter remaining number meter M indicating the remaining number of “limiter times” is displayed, and this limiter remaining number meter M can be taught at the present time (ie, The number of remaining “limiter times” can be taught in the form of a bar graph. In this example, in the rectangular frame of the limiter remaining number meter M, the “limiter count” remains in the state where 14 horizontal block meters are turned on except for the 15th highest end meter counted from the bottom. This represents 14 times. Therefore, the player can be informed that the remaining 14 jackpots have been confirmed. Further, when the chance zone advances and hits a big hit, one of the meters in the limiter remaining number meter M is turned off. As a result, the player is informed that the remaining number of times has decreased.

  Here, if the winning symbol when entering the chance zone is 2 rounds probability variation 1 or 2, the probability variation limiter count (number of times the probability variation symbol can be selected) is set to 16 times, so at least the remaining 17 times are big hits It is confirmed that you will win. If the winning symbol when entering the chance zone is normally 1 for 2 rounds, the probability variation limiter count (the number of times that the probability variation symbol can be selected) is set to 0, but it is shifted to a time reduction state. It is confirmed that at least 18 remaining jackpots will be won. However, in the limiter remaining number meter M as described above, only 14 meters are lit, so the difference of the remaining number of times from 17 (or 18) is 3 (or 4). Is not taught to the player. Hereinafter, the remaining number not displayed in the screen will be described as a back limiter value (for example, 17), and the remaining number displayed in the screen will be described as a table limiter value (for example, 14). Further, the front limiter value and the back limiter value are used for the same purpose in the effect control process described later.

[Direction display for special designs]
In addition, an effect symbol related to the special symbol is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. In this example, it is indicated that the stop symbol is displayed in a combination of “7”-“7”-“7”. When the chance zone progresses and the special symbol change display (stop display) starts, the variable display effect (stop display effect) linked with the special symbol located in the upper right corner of the screen is also executed. Represents that

[4th symbol display for special symbols]
In the lower right corner of the screen, the 4th symbol Z1 related to the normal symbol and the 4th symbol Z2 related to the special symbol are displayed. In this example, each of the 4th symbol Z1 and Z2 represents the winning state. It is shown that it is displayed in red display color. When the chance zone progresses and the normal symbol and special symbol change display (stop display) starts, the 4 symbols Z1 and Z2 related to the normal symbol and special symbol located in the lower right corner of the screen are linked accordingly. This represents that a variable display effect (stop display effect) is executed.

[Meter consumption production (14th meter)]
[Special symbol change start (2R probability change) (changed to back limiter value 16 and front limiter value 13)]
In FIG. 46 (b): [F19] While repeating the loop in the probability change, the background image in the chance zone is continuously displayed on the screen. In addition, when the operation of the variable start winning device 28 is started in response to the winning result of the normal symbol operation lottery, the limiter remaining number meter M is turned off one by one every time the variable start winning device 28 is operated. And one meter is consumed. In this example, the 14th meter of the limiter remaining number meter M is turned off. By using the meter consumption effect in which the meter of the limiter remaining number meter M is consumed, the player is reminded that the remaining number of limiters is gradually decreasing, and is used in the actual game flow. Internal information ("limiter count") can be transmitted (taught, suggested) to the player.

[Normal design wins ("2")]
In addition, when the normal symbol variation display (stop display in the winning mode) is finished and the variable start winning device 28 starts operating (when the opening effect is started), the winning number display portion 277 of the data display device 270 The display is changed from “1” to “2”. Therefore, the number of wins is the second, indicating that the player has won continuously.

  As described above, when the meter consumption effect is executed in which the remaining number of limiters on the display screen is reduced by 1, the notation of the winning number display unit 277 of the data display device 270 is updated by adding 1, so that the player feels uncomfortable. Can be suppressed, and the appearance of the data display device 270 can be improved.

[Special design stop display]
(C) in FIG. 46: After that, the special symbol variation display is terminated, and the stop display is further performed. For example, the effect symbol and the fourth symbol Z2 located at the upper right corner and the lower right corner in the screen are stopped and displayed in a manner representing a big hit. Thereafter, the variable winning device 30 is activated, and one jackpot right is consumed. The same applies to the effects during the stop display of the following special symbols.

[Meter consumption production (13th meter)]
[Special symbol change start (2R probability change) (changed to back limiter value 15 and front limiter value 12)]
47 (d): Thereafter, when the operation of the variable winning device 30 is finished, the normal symbol is won, and when the variable start winning device 28 is operated to win the game ball, the variation of the special symbol is started. . Further, in response to the operation of the variable start winning device 28, a meter consumption effect is performed in which one of the limiter remaining number meters M in the screen is turned off. In this example, the 13th meter of the limiter remaining number meter M is turned off.

[Normal design wins (“3”)]
In addition, when the normal symbol variation display (stop display in the winning mode) is finished and the variable start winning device 28 starts operating (when the opening effect is started), the winning number display portion 277 of the data display device 270 The display is changed from “2” to “3”. Therefore, the number of wins is the third, indicating that the player has won three times in succession.

[Special design stop display]
(E) in FIG. 47: Thereafter, the special symbol variation display is terminated, and the stop display is further performed. In this way, the game proceeds by executing the meter extinguishing effect as the effect in the chance zone.

[Meter consumption effect (7th meter)]
[Special symbol change start (2R probability change) (changed to back limiter value 9 and front limiter value 6)]
47 (f): Thereafter, when the chance zone advances to some extent and the operation of the variable start winning device 28 is started, a meter consumption effect is executed in the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen. In this example, the seventh meter of the limiter remaining number meter M is turned off.

[Normal design wins (“9”)]
In addition, when the normal symbol variation display (stop display in the winning mode) is finished and the variable start winning device 28 starts operating (when the opening effect is started), the winning number display portion 277 of the data display device 270 The display is changed from “8” to “9”. Therefore, the winning number is the ninth time, indicating that the player has won nine times continuously.

[Direction on meter prefetching]
In FIG. 48, (g): After the meter turn-off effect is executed, after a while (about half of the fluctuation time of the special symbol), the meter prefetching added effect in which the balloon image MP is newly displayed in the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen. Is executed. In this example, an effect representing a state in which a balloon image MP displaying a treasure box appears from the fifth meter of the limiter remaining number meter M is executed. This meter pre-reading effect can give the player a sense of expectation that some event may occur when the fifth meter is consumed (turns off).

[Special design stop display]
(H) in FIG. 48: Thereafter, the special symbol variation display is terminated, and the stop display is further performed. Therefore, the effect performed on the screen during the special symbol variation display this time was an effect during the normal chance zone (probability change), except that the meter look-ahead addition effect was executed. Yes.

[Meter consumption effect (6th meter)]
[Special symbol variation start (2R probability variation) (changed to back limiter value 8 and front limiter value 5)]
In FIG. 48, (i): Then, when the operation of the variable start winning device 28 is started, a meter consumption effect is executed in the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen. In this example, the sixth meter of the limiter remaining number meter M is turned off. The treasure chest balloon image displayed in the previously performed meter pre-reading effect is maintained in a state of being displayed in association with the fifth meter of the limiter remaining number meter M.

[Normal Design Wins (“10”)]
In addition, when the normal symbol variation display (stop display in the winning mode) is finished and the variable start winning device 28 starts operating (when the opening effect is started), the winning number display portion 277 of the data display device 270 The display is changed from “9” to “10”. Therefore, the winning number is the tenth, indicating that the player has won ten times continuously.

[Special design stop display]
(J) in FIG. 49: Thereafter, the special symbol variation display is terminated, and the stop display is further performed. Therefore, the effects performed on the screen during the special symbol fluctuation display this time were effects in the normal chance zone (probably changing) except that the meter look-ahead addition effect was continuously executed. Represents that.

[Meter consumption effect (5th meter)]
[Special symbol change start (2R probability change) (changed to back limiter value 7 and front limiter value 4)]
FIG. 49 (k): When the variable start winning device 28 starts to be operated, a meter consumption effect is executed in the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen. In this example, the fifth meter of the limiter remaining number meter M is turned off. Further, at that time, an effect that the balloon image of the treasure box displayed in association with the fifth meter is also consumed (erased) is executed.

[Additional production start]
Also, an extra effect is started in the screen. In this example, an effect is performed in which a female character in a car finds a treasure chest. Therefore, it is shown that the effect corresponding to the balloon image of the treasure box displayed on the limiter remaining number meter M is being executed.

[Normal design wins ("11")]
In addition, when the normal symbol variation display (stop display in the winning mode) is finished and the variable start winning device 28 starts operating (when the opening effect is started), the winning number display portion 277 of the data display device 270 The display is changed from “10” to “11”. Therefore, the number of wins is the eleventh, indicating that the player has won eleven consecutive times.

[Additional number display]
In FIG. 49 (l): In the screen, when the treasure box found by the female character is opened, an effect appears in which a diamond labeled “+3” appears. Thereby, it is possible to tell the player that the additional number of additions is added to the limiter remaining number.

[Meter addition effect (changed back limiter value 7 and front limiter value 7)]
FIG. 50 (m): A meter in which the diamond “+3” that appeared from the treasure box is sucked into the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen is executed, and three meters are lit up. An extra effect is executed. As a result, in the limiter remaining number meter M, the first to seventh meters are turned on. Therefore, it is possible to tell the player that the remaining limiter number has increased from 4 to 7.

[Special design stop display]
(N) in FIG. 50: After that, when the extra effect and the meter extra effect are finished, the special symbol variation display is finished, and the stop display is further performed.

  As described above, the series of effects such as the meter look-ahead addition effect and the meter addition effect represent effects belonging to a category such as “treasure chest”. That is, when a meter pre-reading addition effect belonging to a predetermined category is executed in the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen, the meter addition effect of the same category is executed in the corresponding variation. In this way, when the meter prefetching effect is executed, the player is reminded that the same category additional effect is executed due to the fluctuation corresponding to the meter prefetching effect, and the remaining limiter increases. When the pre-reading effect is started, it is possible to improve a sense of expectation until a corresponding change is started.

[Meter consumption effect (7th meter)]
[Special symbol variation start (2R probability variation) (changed to back limiter value 6, front limiter value 6)]
In FIG. 50 (o): When the variable start winning device 28 starts to be operated, a meter consumption effect is executed in the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen. In this example, the seventh meter of the limiter remaining number meter M is turned off. That is, it is shown that the seventh meter added above is consumed.

[Normal Design Wins (“12”)]
In addition, when the normal symbol variation display (stop display in the winning mode) is finished and the variable start winning device 28 starts operating (when the opening effect is started), the winning number display portion 277 of the data display device 270 The display is changed from “11” to “12”. Therefore, the number of wins is the 12th, indicating that the player has won 12 consecutive times.

[Special design stop display]
(P) in FIG. 51: After that, the special symbol variation display is terminated, and the stop display is further performed. For example, the effect symbol and the fourth symbol Z2 located at the upper right corner and the lower right corner in the screen are stopped and displayed in a manner representing a big hit. That is, it is shown that the seventh meter added above is consumed, and the special performance is finished without being executed. Thereafter, the variable winning device 30 is activated, and one jackpot right is consumed.

[Meter consumption production (third meter)]
[Special symbol change start (2R probability change) (change to back limiter value 2, front limiter value 2)]
In FIG. 51 (q): Thereafter, when the chance zone proceeds to some extent and the operation of the variable start winning device 28 is started, a meter consumption effect is executed in the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen. In this example, the third meter of the limiter remaining number meter M is turned off.

[Normal Design Wins (“16”)]
In addition, when the normal symbol variation display (stop display in the winning mode) is finished and the variable start winning device 28 starts operating (when the opening effect is started), the winning number display portion 277 of the data display device 270 The display is changed from “15” to “16”. Therefore, the number of wins is 16th, indicating that 16 wins have been won continuously.

[Chance Zone Ending Production Start]
In addition, when the meter consumption effect is started, an effect in which the female character emits a dialogue such as “There is little remaining gas ...” is executed. That is, the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen corresponds to the amount of gas remaining in the car on which the female character rides, and this means that the limiter remaining number meter M is no longer a little. This chance zone end effect is performed after the third meter of the limiter remaining number meter M is consumed until the last first meter is consumed. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of tension by realizing that the remaining number of games that are being probable is decreasing.

[Special design stop display]
[Chance Zone Ending Production]
(R) in FIG. 51: After that, the special symbol variation display is terminated, and the stop display is further performed. In this example, an effect is produced in which a female character utters a dialogue such as “GAS station not found…, next expectation”. That is, it is shown that the extra effect is not executed in the current fluctuation, and the limiter remaining number meter M corresponding to the remaining gas amount has not increased. Then, it is expressed that it is expected that an additional production will be executed in the next fluctuation.

[Meter consumption production (second meter)]
[Special symbol variation start (2R probability variation) (changed to back limiter value 1, front limiter value 1)]
52 (s): After that, when the operation of the variable start winning device 28 is started, a meter consumption effect is executed in the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen. In this example, the second meter of the limiter remaining number meter M is turned off.

[Normal Design Wins (“17”)]
In addition, when the normal symbol variation display (stop display in the winning mode) is finished and the variable start winning device 28 starts operating (when the opening effect is started), the winning number display portion 277 of the data display device 270 The display is changed from “16” to “17”. Therefore, the number of wins is 17th, indicating that 17 wins have been won continuously.

[Chance Zone Ending Production Start]
In addition, when the meter consumption effect is started, the effect that the female character emits a speech such as “I'll run out of gas ...” is executed. That is, the fact that the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen is the remaining one meter corresponds to the fact that the remaining amount of gas in the car is only 1, and this means that the remaining amount is not once.

[Special design stop display]
[Chance Zone Ending Production]
In FIG. 52 (t): Thereafter, the special symbol variation display is terminated, and the stop display is further performed. In this example, an effect is produced in which a female character utters a line such as “End if no GAS station is found next time”. That is, it is shown that the extra effect is not executed in the current fluctuation, and the limiter remaining number meter M corresponding to the remaining gas amount has not increased. Then, if the extra effect is not executed in the next fluctuation, it means that the chance zone is ended.

[Meter consumption production (first meter)]
[Special symbol change start (2R normal) (back limiter value 0, front limiter value 0 temporarily changed)]
In FIG. 52 (u): Thereafter, when the operation of the variable start winning device 28 is started, a meter consumption effect is executed in the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen. In this example, it is indicated that the first meter of the limiter remaining number meter M is extinguished, and all the meters are consumed and there are no meters that are lit. In addition, in this variation, it is assumed that the winning symbol is won by 2 round normal 1 or the 2 round probability variation 1 is forcibly changed to 2 round normal 1.

[Normal Design Wins (“18”)]
In addition, when the normal symbol variation display (stop display in the winning mode) is finished and the variable start winning device 28 starts operating (when the opening effect is started), the winning number display portion 277 of the data display device 270 The display is changed from “17” to “18”. Therefore, the number of wins is 18th, indicating that 18 wins have been won continuously.

[Chance Zone Ending Production]
In addition, when the meter consumption effect is started, an effect in which the female character emits a speech such as “Please ...” is executed. In other words, the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen is not consumed by the current fluctuation, and it is expected that an additional effect will be executed from now on.

[Maximum production, press request production]
FIG. 53 (v): After that, an effect in which an image imitating the effect switching button appears at the right position in the screen is executed. Then, an effect requesting the player to press the effect switching button 45 is also executed. That is, a sense of expectation that an additional effect may be executed by pressing the effect switching button 45 is increased. In addition, by causing the player to press the effect switching button 45, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game such as acquiring the chance zone continuation or the chance zone end by the player's own selection.

[Maximum production, movable body fall production]
In FIG. 53 (w): Thereafter, the movable body 40f of the heart-shaped ornament suddenly drops when the player depresses the effect switching button 45 (or when the effective time of pressing the effect switching button 45 elapses). A movable body fall effect is executed. Thereby, the player can be informed that the continuation of the chance zone has been confirmed.

[Maximum production and meter maximum production]
[Changed to back limit value 18 and front limit value 15]
53 (x): After that, an image simulating “GAS STATION” is displayed, and gasoline is injected into the car on which the female character rides, so that all of the first to fifteenth of the limiter remaining number meter M The meter is added to the maximum, such as turning on the meter. As a result, the player can be informed that the remaining limiter number has increased from 0 to 15.

[Special design stop display]
54 (y): After that, when the extra effect and the meter extra effect are finished, the special symbol variation display is finished, and the stop display is further performed. For example, the effect symbol and the fourth symbol Z2 located at the upper right corner and the lower right corner in the screen are stopped and displayed in a manner representing a big hit. In this example, the effect symbol located in the upper right corner stops at the combination of “3”-“3”-“3”, and the fourth symbol Z2 located in the lower right corner stops in the green display color, and each of the two rounds is normal. It is shown that the stop display is performed in a mode representing 1.

[Chance zone continuation production]
Also, in this example, a female character in a car utters a dialogue such as “I did it! Chance zone is still going on!” And expresses joy, while a chance zone continuation effect is expressed that indicates that the chance zone continues. . In this way, by executing the chance zone continuation effect, by congratulating the success of the chance zone continuation as a result of participation in the game such as pressing the effect switching button 45 during the end of the chance zone effect. Can give the player a sense of security.

  Thereafter, the variable winning device 30 is activated, and one jackpot right is consumed. Since the winning symbol (stop symbol) corresponds to normal 1 for two rounds, this jackpot right is reset to the remaining 18 times (back limiter value = 18).

[Meter consumption production (15th meter)]
[Special symbol variation start (2R probability variation) (changed to back limiter value 17 and front limiter value 14)]
In FIG. 54 (z): When the maximum extra effect is finished and the operation of the variable start winning device 28 is started, the meter consumption effect is executed in the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen. In this example, the 15th meter of the limiter remaining number meter M is turned off. That is, it is shown that the fifteenth meter located at the top of the maximum added above is consumed.

[Normal Design Wins (“19”)]
In addition, when the normal symbol variation display (stop display in the winning mode) is finished and the variable start winning device 28 starts operating (when the opening effect is started), the winning number display portion 277 of the data display device 270 The display is changed from “18” to “19”. Therefore, the number of wins is 19th, indicating that 19 wins have been won continuously.

[Meter consumption production (12th meter)]
[Special symbol change start (2R normal) (changed to back limiter value 14 and front limiter value 11)]
54A: After that, when the chance zone proceeds to some extent and the operation of the variable start winning device 28 is started, a meter consumption effect is executed in the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen. In this example, the twelfth meter of the limiter remaining number meter M is turned off. In addition, in this change, the case where 2 rounds of normal 1 are won as a winning symbol is assumed.

[Normal Design Wins (“22”)]
In addition, when the normal symbol variation display (stop display in the winning mode) is finished and the variable start winning device 28 starts operating (when the opening effect is started), the winning number display portion 277 of the data display device 270 The display is changed from “21” to “22”. Therefore, the number of wins is 22nd, indicating that 22 wins have been won continuously.

[Maximum production, blackout production]
(B) in FIG. 55: After that, an effect is produced in which the entire display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 suddenly darkens (blacks out). Thereby, it is possible to give the player a visual surprise due to a sudden change and to pay attention to the future outcome.

[Maximum production, movable body fall production]
In FIG. 55C, after that, the movable body 40f is dropped before the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and an effect as if radial light is emitted from the dropped movable body 40f in the screen is produced. Done.

[Maximum production, number of additions displayed]
In FIG. 55 (D): The movable body 40f returns to the initial position, and a female character appears, utters the line “Reset the number of chances!” And imitates the heart-shaped movable body 40f. An effect is displayed in which an image representing the number of times of addition such as “15 times” is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to tell the player that “the remaining limit number has been reset to 15 times”.

[Special design stop display]
(E) in FIG. 56: After that, when the maximum addition effect is finished, the special symbol variation display is finished, and the stop display is further performed. For example, the effect symbol and the fourth symbol Z2 located at the upper right corner and the lower right corner in the screen are stopped and displayed in a manner representing a big hit. In this example, the effect symbol located in the upper right corner stops at the combination of “3”-“3”-“3”, and the fourth symbol Z2 located in the lower right corner stops in the green display color, and each of the two rounds is normal. It is shown that the stop display is performed in a mode representing 1.

  Accordingly, in response to the fact that the winning symbol type is normally 1 for 2 rounds, when the operation of the variable winning device 30 is finished, the gaming state is shifted to the time shortening state instead of the probability changing state. In this time shortening state, the normal symbol operation lottery probability is a high probability state (about 1/1), while the special symbol internal lottery probability is not a high probability state (about 1/1) but a low probability state (about 1/1). Therefore, the result of the internal lottery of the special symbol may correspond to non-winning (out of).

[Chance zone continuation production]
Also, in this example, a female character in a car utters a dialogue such as “I did it! Chance zone is still going on!” And expresses joy, while a chance zone continuation effect is expressed that indicates that the chance zone continues. . Thus, by executing the chance zone continuation effect, it is possible to teach the player that “the chance zone is restarted from the beginning” or “the chance zone has been reset”.

[Meter maximum addition effect (changed back limiter value 18 and front limiter value 15)]
Further, in this example, the maximum metering effect is performed such that all the first to fifteenth meters of the limiter remaining number meter M are turned on. As a result, the player can be informed that the remaining limiter number has increased from 12 to 15.

[Meter consumption production (15th meter)]
[Special symbols start to change (not win (disappear)) (retain the back limiter value 18 and change it to the front limiter value 14)]
56 (F): When the maximum addition effect is finished and the operation of the variable start winning device 28 is started, the meter consumption effect is executed in the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen. In this example, the 15th meter of the limiter remaining number meter M is turned off. That is, it is shown that the fifteenth meter located at the top of the maximum added above is consumed. In addition, in this fluctuation | variation, the case where the result of the internal lottery regarding a special symbol corresponds to a loss is assumed.

[Normal Design Wins (“23”)]
In addition, when the normal symbol variation display (stop display in the winning mode) is finished and the variable start winning device 28 starts operating (when the opening effect is started), the winning number display portion 277 of the data display device 270 The display is changed from “22” to “23”. Therefore, the number of wins is the 23rd, indicating that 23 wins have been won continuously.

  In this way, even when the normal symbol operation lottery corresponds to winning and the special symbol internal lottery falls out, the data display device 270 wins corresponding to the decrease in the number of limiters on the display screen by one. One number display section 277 is added. In the present embodiment, in the case where the winning is the normal symbol operation lottery, a considerable number of prize balls are obtained by winning the variable start winning device 28 (start winning port 28a) in operation, and the possession balls are obtained. This is because it increases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by updating the winning number display section 277 of the data display device 270 in response to the operation of the variable start winning device 28 instead of the operation of the variable winning device 30. And the appearance of the data display device 270 can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, if the winning in the normal symbol operation lottery corresponds to the winning, the variable start winning device 28 is activated to allow the game ball to enter the winning winning opening 28a (win). In some cases, the game ball does not enter (win) the winning opening 28a. For example, if the launch position of the game ball is the left position of the game area 8a, or if no game ball is launched, the game ball does not enter (win) the start winning opening 28a. In such a case, assuming that a lottery opportunity related to the internal lottery of the special symbol has not occurred, the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, and the big hit game started by corresponding to the winning of the internal lottery is not executed. Therefore, as in the case of falling out of special symbol internal lottery, the state of the lottery probability for the special symbol and the normal symbol in the gaming state after the big hit game is not changed, for example, from the low probability state to the high probability state. The setting change to the probability state is not executed.

  The remaining number of limiters on the display screen is decreased by 1 to 14 while the internal limiter number is maintained at 18 without decreasing the remaining number of times. Therefore, since the number of times that the time shortening function operates is 18 remaining, it is expressed as if it is consumed once on the display screen or the data display device 270. However, the number of times that the normal symbol is won is determined to be at least 18 times, and the count of the winning number display section 277 is updated based on the winning of the special symbol (operation of the variable winning device 30). This means that many counts are displayed. In this way, since there is a relationship such that the number of wins for the normal symbol ≧ the number of wins for the special symbol, the count number displayed in the win count display part 277 of the data display device 270 is displayed more than usual. The appearance of the data display device 270 can be improved.

[Special design stop display]
In FIG. 56 (G): After that, when the variable display at the time of the special symbol losing is completed, the stop display is performed. For example, the effect symbol and the fourth symbol Z2 located in the upper right corner and the lower right corner in the screen are shown to be stopped and displayed in a manner that represents a loss. In this example, the effect symbol located at the upper right corner stops at the combination of “6”-“3”-“4”, and the fourth symbol Z2 located at the lower right corner stops at the white display color, each representing a deviation. It is shown that the display is stopped in a manner.

[Meter consumption production (14th meter)]
[Special symbols start to change (not win (disappear)) (Keep back limit value 18 and change to front limit value 14)]
In FIG. 57 (H): When the operation of the variable start winning device 28 is started, a meter consumption effect is executed in the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen. In this example, the 14th meter of the limiter remaining number meter M is turned off. In other words, it is shown that the 14th meter located at the top of the tops up to the maximum is consumed. In addition, in this fluctuation | variation, the case where the result of the internal lottery regarding a special symbol corresponds to a loss is assumed.

[Normal Design Wins (“24”)]
In addition, when the normal symbol variation display (stop display in the winning mode) is finished and the variable start winning device 28 starts operating (when the opening effect is started), the winning number display portion 277 of the data display device 270 The display is changed from “23” to “24”. Therefore, the number of wins is 24th, indicating that 24 wins have been won continuously.

  The remaining number of limiters on the display screen is decreased by 1 to 13 while the internal limiter number is maintained at 18 without decreasing the remaining number. Therefore, since the number of times that the time shortening function operates is 18 remaining, it is expressed as if it is consumed once on the display screen or the data display device 270. However, the number of times that the normal symbol is won is determined to be at least 18 times, and the count of the winning number display section 277 is updated based on the winning of the special symbol (operation of the variable winning device 30). This means that many counts are displayed.

[Special design stop display]
(I) in FIG. 57: After that, when the variable display at the time of the special symbol losing ends, the stop display is performed. For example, the effect symbol and the fourth symbol Z2 located in the upper right corner and the lower right corner in the screen are shown to be stopped and displayed in a manner that represents a loss. In this example, the effect symbol located in the upper right corner stops at a combination of “5”-“2”-“6”, and the fourth symbol Z2 located in the lower right corner stops in a white display color, each representing a deviation. It is shown that the display is stopped in a manner.

[Meter consumption production (13th meter)]
[Special symbol change start (2R probability change) (changed to back limiter value 17 and front limiter value 13)]
In FIG. 57 (J): When the operation of the variable start winning device 28 is started, a meter consumption effect is executed in the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen. In this example, the 13th meter of the limiter remaining number meter M is turned off.

[Normal Design Wins (“25”)]
In addition, when the normal symbol variation display (stop display in the winning mode) is finished and the variable start winning device 28 starts operating (when the opening effect is started), the winning number display portion 277 of the data display device 270 The display is changed from “24” to “25”. Therefore, the number of wins is 25th, indicating that 25 wins have been won continuously.

[Special Symbol Stop Display (Back Limiter Value 1, Front Limiter Value 1)]
[Chance Zone Ending Production]
In FIG. 58 (K): Thereafter, the chance zone advances to some extent, the special symbol variation display is terminated, and the stop display is further performed. In this example, an effect is produced in which a female character utters a line such as “End if no GAS station is found next time”. That is, it is shown that the extra effect is not executed in the current fluctuation, and the limiter remaining number meter M corresponding to the remaining gas amount has not increased. Then, if the extra effect is not executed in the next fluctuation, it means that the chance zone is ended.

[Normal Design Wins (“76”)]
Also, “76” is displayed in the winning number display section 277 of the data display device 270. Therefore, the number of wins this time is the 76th, and in FIG. 41 (J), it is counted that the normal symbol is won and counted 76 times continuously.

[Meter consumption production (first meter)]
[Special symbol change start (2R normal) (changed to back limiter value 0, front limiter value 0)]
58 (L): Thereafter, when the chance zone proceeds to some extent and the operation of the variable start winning device 28 is started, a meter consumption effect is executed in the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen. In this example, it is indicated that the first meter of the limiter remaining number meter M is extinguished, and all the meters are consumed and there are no meters that are lit. In this variation, it is assumed that the winning symbol is forcibly changed from 2-round probability variation 2 to 2-round normal 2.

[Normal Design Wins (“77”)]
In addition, when the normal symbol variation display (stop display in the winning mode) is finished and the variable start winning device 28 starts operating (when the opening effect is started), the winning number display portion 277 of the data display device 270 The display is changed from “76” to “77”. Therefore, the number of wins is 76th, indicating that 77 wins have been won continuously.

[Chance Zone Ending Production]
In addition, when the meter consumption effect is started, an effect in which the female character emits a speech such as “Please ...” is executed. In other words, the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen is not consumed by the current fluctuation, and it is expected that an additional effect will be executed from now on.

[Direction request effect]
In FIG. 58 (M): Thereafter, an effect in which an image imitating an effect switching button appears at the right position in the screen is executed. Then, an effect requesting the player to press the effect switching button 45 is also executed.

[Press failure production]
(N) in FIG. 59: After that, when the player depresses the effect switching button 45 (or when the effective time of pressing the effect switching button 45 elapses), “ A message such as “Sorry” is displayed, and a pressing failure effect indicating that the pressing of the effect switching button 45 has failed is executed.

[Special design stop display]
In FIG. 59 (O): After that, when the pressing failure effect ends, the special symbol variation display ends, and the stop display is further performed. For example, the effect symbol and the fourth symbol Z2 located at the upper right corner and the lower right corner in the screen are stopped and displayed in a manner representing a big hit. In this example, the effect symbol located in the upper right corner stops at the combination of “1”-“1”-“1”, and the fourth symbol Z2 located in the lower right corner stops in yellow display color, and each of the two rounds is normal. It is shown that the stop display is performed in a mode representing 2.

[Chance zone end production]
Further, in this case, an effect that the female character utters a line such as “End of chance zone ...” is executed, and the display number of the limiter remaining number meter M becomes zero. As a result, the player is instructed to “end during probability change” and contributes to maintaining motivation for the next probability change entry.

[Number of state transitions ("1") lighting state]
Although not shown, the gaming state is not a special state but is in a normal state (the variable start winning device 28 is inactive, the variable winning device 30 is inactive, and the non-time-saving state is in effect). Based on the above, in the state transition number display section 278 of the data display device 270, for example, the counter number “2” is changed from the blinking state to the lighting state. Thereby, the data display device 270 can tell the player that the special state has ended.

[Left-handed suggestion]
In FIG. 59 (P): After that, an effect in which a female character emits a dialogue such as “Please return to the left!” And an effect in which an arrow indicating the left direction of the board is displayed are executed. Thereby, it can be taught that the mode returns to the “normal mode” and the game method returns to the method of causing the game ball to flow on the left side of the board surface.

  As described above, during the chance zone (high accuracy), the normal change during production, meter consumption production, pre-read meter addition production, pre-read meter addition production in the same category as the pre-production meter addition production, meter addition production, pre-read meter Teach the remaining number of times until the limiter is reached by performing various effects such as an extra effect that does not depend on the extra effect, a chance zone end effect, a maximum extra effect, a chance zone continuation effect, an extra gaze effect, and a chance zone end effect. It is possible to give a wide range of effects and suppress a decrease in interest in games.

  Although not shown in the figure, in the fluctuation when the chance zone end turning effect is executed, that is, in the fluctuation when the third and second meters of the limiter remaining number meter M are turned off, 2R normal fluctuation display may be started. Therefore, the back limiter value is changed to 18 when the fluctuation display at the 2R normal time is finished. Here, since the chance zone end effect is being executed, after the third and second meters of the limiter remaining number meter M are extinguished (during the 2R normal fluctuation display), the additional effect is not executed. When the last meter is turned off (while another special symbol is being displayed), the maximum addition effect is executed (for example, (u) in FIG. 52 to (x) in FIG. 53). Therefore, by adding to a very important scene such as whether or not the chance zone ends, and shifting the production, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, in the above, it was explained that the superimposing effect and the maximum superimposing effect are executed while the special symbol variation is displayed. However, the period during which these extra effects and maximum extra effects are performed is not limited to this, and the period spanning the big hit game during the big hit game digestion (time when the variable winning device is operating) or the special symbol variation display. It may be.

  Next, an example of a control method for specifically realizing the above effects will be described. The above-mentioned effect per ordinary symbol (FIG. 41), the effect when the variable start winning device is activated (FIG. 42), the effect when the special symbol fluctuates (FIGS. 43 and 44), and the normal probability change effect (FIG. 46 (a) to FIG. 46 (c), etc.), meter consumption effects (FIG. 46 (b), etc.), pre-read meter addition effects (FIG. 48 (g) to FIG. 49 (j), etc.), the same category as the pre-read meter addition effects Addition effect (Fig. 49 (k) to Fig. 50 (m), etc.), meter addition effect (Fig. 50 (m), etc.), pre-read meter addition effect (not shown), chance zone Ending effect (FIG. 51 (q) to FIG. 52 (u), etc.), maximum addition effect (FIG. 53 (v) to FIG. 54 (y), etc.), chance zone continuation effect (FIG. 54 (y) ), Etc.), Gase production (not shown), chance zone end Effect (in FIG. 58 (M) in-FIG 59 (P)) and the like is controlled through the following control process.

[Production control processing]
FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the effect control process executed by the effect control CPU 126. This effect control process is executed, for example, in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from a reset start (main) process (not shown). The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a period of several tens of μs to several ms) during execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

  The effect control process includes a command reception process (step S400), an effect symbol management process (step S402), a normal symbol post-effect effect management process (step S404), a display output process (step S405), a lamp driving process (step S406), This is a configuration including a subroutine group of an acoustic drive process (step S408), an effect random number update process (step S410), and other processes (step S412). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along each process.

  Step S400: In the command receiving process, the effect control CPU 126 receives an effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. The effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 according to type. The production commands transmitted from the main control CPU 72 include, for example, a start gate passage command, a normal operation memory number command, a start opening winning tone control command, a demonstration production command, a lottery result command, a variation pattern command, a variation There are a start command, a stop symbol command, a symbol stop command, a state designation command, a time shortening function operation number command (number cut counter number command), a limiter remaining number command, an error notification command, and the like.

  Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the result display effect using the effect symbol. In this process, the contents such as the above-mentioned normal symbol deviation effect (FIG. 40) and the normal symbol effect (FIG. 41) are controlled. The contents of the effect symbol management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S404: In the normal symbol after-effects management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effects after winning in the normal symbol lottery (operation lottery). For example, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of effects when the variable start winning device 28 is operated, and controls the contents of effects when the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed. In this processing, the above-mentioned variable start winning device operation effect (FIG. 42), special symbol change effect (FIGS. 43, 44, 45), normal probability change effect (FIG. 46 (a) to FIG. 46) (C), etc.), meter consumption effect ((b) in FIG. 46), pre-read meter addition effect ((g) in FIG. 48 to (j), etc. in FIG. 48), and the same category as the pre-read meter addition effect. Production (Fig. 49 (k) to Fig. 50 (m), etc.), meter addition production (Fig. 50 (m), etc.), pre-read meter addition production (not shown), chance zone end stroke Production (in Fig. 51 (q) to Fig. 52 (u), etc.), maximum addition production (in Fig. 53 (v) to Fig. 54 (y), etc.), chance zone continuous production (in Fig. 54 (y), etc.) ), Gase production (not shown), Chance zone end production ( In 58 (M) in-FIG. 59 (P)) content of the like are controlled. Note that the contents of the post symbol management processing for normal symbols will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S405: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 gives basic control information of the effect contents to the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) (for example, the number of working memories of normal symbols, the variable effect pattern number, the notice effect) Number, effect mode number, limiter added effect pattern number, limiter remaining number meter display number pattern number, background change effect pattern number, revival effect pattern number, end effect pattern number, etc.). Thereby, the effect display control device 144 (the display control CPU 146 and the VDP 152) controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 based on the instructed contents of the effect (acts as various effect executing means).

  Step S406: In the lamp driving process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the lamp driving circuit 132. In response to this, the lamp driving circuit 132 drives the various lamps 46, 48, 50, 52, the panel lamp 53, and the like (turns on or off, blinks, changes in luminance gradation, etc.) based on the control signal.

  Step S408: In the next acoustic drive process, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the sound drive circuit 134 about the effect contents (for example, BGM, audio data, etc. during various effects). Thereby, the sound according to the production content is output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The effect random numbers include, for example, a random number used for selecting a notice and a random number used for a background change lottery (effect lottery). In addition, for example, random numbers for pre-reading effect execution lottery, random numbers for variable effect execution lottery random numbers, random numbers for pre-reading Gase effect execution lottery, random numbers for maximum additional effect execution lottery, random numbers for additional effect execution lottery, random numbers for extra number Random numbers, random numbers for extra production category lottery, maximum extra production content lottery random numbers, and the like are prepared.

  Step S412: In other processing, for example, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the driving IC of the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates using the movable body solenoid 57 as a drive source, and performs an effect in synchronism with the display of the image by the liquid crystal display 42 as described above or independently.

  Through the above-described effect control process, the effect control CPU 126 can comprehensively control the effect contents in the pachinko machine 1.

[Direction design management processing]
FIG. 61 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the effect symbol management process. The effect symbol management process includes a subroutine group of an execution selection process (step S450), an effect symbol change pre-process (step S452), an effect symbol change process (step S454), and an effect symbol stop display process (step S456). It is the composition which includes. Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along each process.

  Step S450: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S452 to S456). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the “jump table” as the return address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the situation has not yet started the change display effect, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol change pre-process (step S452) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation processing (step S454) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol variation in-process has been completed, As a jump destination, the effect symbol stop display processing (step S456) is selected. When the variable start winning device is operating (opening / closing operation, end process, etc.), the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S452 to S456). First, the effect symbol management process is terminated.

  Step S452: In the effect symbol variation pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 performs an operation of preparing conditions for starting the variable display effect using the effect symbol. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the contents of the reach effect according to various conditions (the lottery result, the variation pattern, etc.), or the effect pattern for the notice effect (the advance notice pattern before reach occurrence other than the pre-read notice effect pattern) , A notice pattern etc. after reach occurrence). In addition, the production control CPU 126 also performs demonstration production control when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S454: In the effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructing the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as necessary. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switching button 45 during execution of the variable display effect using the effect symbol, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the player has operated the effect button, and an effect corresponding to the result is displayed. The control information on the contents (button effect) is instructed to the display control CPU 146.

  Step S456: In the effect symbol stop display process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the stop display effect using the effect symbols and moving images in a manner corresponding to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) ends the variable display effect that has been actually executed in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the stop display effect. Thereby, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the normal symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be effectively taught (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player (design effect execution). means).

[Preliminary design change processing]
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the above-described effect symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S600: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the command for demonstration effect is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S602.

  Step S602: The effect control CPU 126 executes a demo selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a demonstration effect pattern. The demonstration effect pattern defines the contents of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the last address of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process as it is, and controls the contents of the demonstration effect based on the demonstration effect pattern in the subsequent display output process (step S405 in FIG. 60) and lamp driving process (step S406 in FIG. 60). To do.

  On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demonstration effect command is not stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S604.

  Step S604: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is out of place (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a lottery result command at the time of non-winning is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S612. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not saved (No), that is, when it is confirmed that the current variation is a win, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610. Note that whether or not the current variation is off (winning) can be confirmed based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. In other words, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the outlier normal variation or outlier reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is outlier. Alternatively, if the current stop symbol command specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is out of sync.

  Step S610: The effect control CPU 126 executes a hit variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selectively determines the contents (schedule, performance execution timing) such as effects, reach effects, pre-read effects, etc. related to effect symbols performed during normal symbol variation display, and setting the determined contents Execute. Specific processing contents will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S612: The effect control CPU 126 executes a deviation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selectively determines the contents (schedule, performance execution timing) such as effects, reach effects, pre-read effects, etc. related to effect symbols performed during normal symbol variation display, and setting the determined contents Execute. Specific processing contents will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  When one of the processes in step S610 or step S612 above is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S614.

  Step S614: The effect control CPU 126 executes a notice selection process (notice effect executing means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the notice effect to be executed during the current variable display effect by lottery. The content of the notice effect is determined based on, for example, an internal lottery result (winning or non-winning) and a current internal state (normal state, high probability state, time reduction state). As described above, the notice effect is for notifying the player of the possibility that a reach state will occur during the variable display effect, or for notifying that there is a possibility that the player will eventually win. Therefore, the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be relatively high to increase the player's expectation at the time of winning.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 61).

  Next, the contents of the after-hit effect management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Normal presentation management processing per symbol]
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the after-effects management process for normal symbols. For example, the after-hit effect management process for the normal symbol is, for example, an execution selection process (step S500), an initial variable start winning device operation process (step S502), a special symbol change-time effect process (step S504), and a major role start effect process (step S506). ), A group of subroutines for the end effect process (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along each process.

  Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the post effect management process per normal symbol in the “jump table” as the return address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, the effect control CPU 126 selects the first variable start winning device operating process (step S502) as the first jump destination. On the other hand, if the variable start winning device operation process (step S502) has already been completed and a special symbol variation pattern command (or a start opening winning tone control command) has been received, the effect control CPU 126 can execute the next jump. As a destination, the special symbol variation effect process (step S504) is selected. If the special symbol variation effect processing (step S504) is completed and the winning command for the special symbol (internal lottery) has been received, the effect control CPU 126 will perform the effect processing after starting the big role as the next jump destination (step S506). ) Is selected. Then, the effect control CPU 126 selects the end process (step S508) as the next jump destination when the end flag is set in the effect process after the start of the big role. Note that the first variable start winning device activation process (step S502) and the special symbol variation effect process (step S504) are not selected as jump destinations when a state designation command representing "time reduction state" is received. This is because when the game flow is once shifted to the “time shortening state” ([F19] during probability change or [F31] during time reduction), the production in the chance zone (the production during the chance change (the effect that the female character runs in the car) ), The production of the limiter remaining number meter M, the addition production, etc.), and during this time it is necessary to execute the production when the variable start winning device is activated (FIG. 42) and the special symbol fluctuation production (FIGS. 43 and 44). Because there is no.

  Step S502: In the first variable start winning device operation process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect when the variable start winning device 26 is operated after the first hit of the normal symbol (operation lottery). The contents of the effects controlled here are the same as the effects when the variable start winning device is activated (FIG. 42). For example, a message such as “Right-handed!” Is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. By displaying, the progress status in the game flow is guided to the player. By executing such an effect, it is possible to prevent the player from digesting the game indiscriminately and to reconfirm the purpose consciousness to prevent a decrease in gaming motivation.

  Step S504: In the special symbol variation production process, the production control CPU 126 can produce the content corresponding to the special symbol variation display or stop display. The contents of the effect controlled here are the same as the special symbol variation effect described above (FIGS. 43 and 44). By performing such an effect, the player has a sense of expectation whether or not he / she can enter the chance change (chance zone) due to the special symbol (internal lottery) fluctuation after the first winning of the normal symbol (action lottery), It is possible to provide fun and fun.

  Step S506: In the effect processing after the start of the major role, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents such as the effect during the probability change (the effect that the female character runs in the car), the effect relating to the limiter remaining number meter M, the effect of adding the effect, etc. . As a result, information on the flow and progress of the game after the game flow has changed to [F19] Probability Change or [F31] Time Shortening is communicated to the player, or the “limiter count” addition is strongly urged. Can be. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S508: In the end effect process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the effect accompanying the end of [F19] probability change. The content of the effect controlled here is the same as the aspect (FIG. 59) representing “chance zone end” among the effects after reaching the limiter described above. By executing such an effect, once the [F19] probability change is completed, the player is informed in the game flow, and the game motivation is maintained for the next transition to [F19] probability change. Can be made.

[Direction processing after the start of a major role]
FIG. 64 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the effect process after the start of a big game. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

[Limiter number management processing]
Step S7000: The effect control CPU 126 executes limiter number management processing. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 manages the main control limiter value, the front limiter value, the back limiter value, and the additional limiter value necessary for the effect in this process.

  For example, the main control limiter value is a limiter value corresponding to the limiter remaining number command transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the effect control CPU 126, and is used for matching with the limiter remaining number managed by the main control CPU 72. It is prepared.

  For example, the table limiter value represents the number of meters displayed in the effect relating to the limiter remaining number meter M executed in the screen. Specifically, when the table limiter value is 7, it indicates that the first to seventh meters of the limiter remaining number meter M are lit in the screen. Therefore, when the meter turn-off effect is executed in the screen, the seventh meter of the limiter remaining number meter M is turned off, and the lit meter becomes the first to sixth, the table limiter value is updated to 6. . On the contrary, when the meter addition effect is executed in the screen, the eighth meter of the limiter remaining number meter M is lit, and when the lit meter becomes the first to eighth, the table limiter value is updated to 8. The

  For example, the back limiter value represents the number of remaining limiters managed by the effect control CPU 126. Therefore, when the meter turn-off effect is executed in the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen, 1 is subtracted from the back limiter value. However, the back limiter value is not added even if the meter addition effect is executed in the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen.

  For example, the extra limiter value corresponds to a value obtained by subtracting the front limiter value from the back limiter value, and represents the remaining limiter value concealed from the player. Specifically, when the additional limiter value is 3, it indicates that the remaining number of limiters is three. The added limiter value is updated by subtracting the newly lit number when the meter added effect is executed in the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen and the meter is newly lit.

  As described above, in this limiter number management process, the effect control CPU 126 sets each limiter value. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7200.

[Pre-reading scenario setting process]
Step S7200: The effect control CPU 126 executes pre-reading effect scenario setting processing. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 determines whether or not to execute the pre-reading superposition effect based on each limiter value, and when executing the pre-reading superimposing effect, it corresponds to the fluctuation (table limiter value) for executing the superposition effect. Fluctuation), the number of additions (the number of additions), and the type of addition effect (addition effect category) are set as a pre-reading scenario. Then, based on the pre-reading addition scenario set in this process, an adding effect is executed in the screen, or a meter pre-reading adding effect is executed in the limiter remaining number meter M. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7400.

[Main production management process]
Step S7400: The effect control CPU 126 executes a main effect management process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 sets the contents of the effect in the chance zone executed on the screen. For example, a promising effect that shows how a female character is driving in a car, and when the remaining number of limiter meters M in the screen is 3 to 1, the effect that gives the chance zone end, and the extra effect Set the execution of the maximum extra effect. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7600.

[Meter effect setting process]
Step S7600: The effect control CPU 126 executes meter effect setting processing. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 sets execution of effects related to the limiter remaining number meter M being executed in the screen. For example, execution of a meter consumption effect, a meter update effect, a meter extra lighting effect, a meter maximum extra lighting effect, and a meter prefetching extra effect is set. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7800.

[Other effects setting process]
Step S7800: The effect control CPU 126 executes other effect setting processing. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 sets the effects that are not set in the main effect management process and the meter effect setting process. For example, a variety display effect or stop display effect of a design symbol, a variable display effect or a stop display effect for the fourth symbol related to a normal symbol or a special symbol, various effects based on the effects set in the main effect management process or the meter effect setting process Production contents using the lamps 46, 48, 50, 52, the panel lamp 53, and the speakers 54, 55, 56 are set.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the normal symbol hitting effect management process (FIG. 63).

[Limiter number management processing]
FIG. 65 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of limiter number management processing. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S7010: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a limiter remaining number command has been received. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a limiter remaining number command is newly stored. As a result of the confirmation, if the limiter remaining number command is received (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7012. On the other hand, when the limiter remaining number command has not been received (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7013.

  Step S7012: The effect control CPU 126 executes limiter number management processing upon reception of the limiter remaining number command. Specifically, when the production control CPU 126 receives a new limiter remaining number command, it updates the main control limiter value based on the value corresponding to the command, and the conditions (main control limiter value, back limiter value) at that time The back limiter value and the front limiter value are set according to the front limiter value and the condition relating to the stop symbol command. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7014.

  Step S7013: The effect control CPU 126 executes a special symbol deviation limiter number management process. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 sets the back limiter value when the result of the internal lottery of the special symbol corresponds to a loss. For example, when the meter turn-off effect is executed, the front limiter value and the back limiter value are changed by 1. When the result of the internal lottery of the special symbol is won, 1 is subtracted from the back limiter value. Although it is the same as the main control limiter value, if the result of the internal lottery is out of place, if the back limiter value is decremented by 1, it will not be the same as the main control limiter value. Therefore, a process for correcting the non-identical values is performed. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7014.

  Step S7014: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the meter extinguishing effect has been executed. Specifically, in the previous meter effect setting process (step S7600 in FIG. 64), execution of the meter turn-off effect is set, and based on this setting, the effect of turning off one meter of the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen is turned off. Check whether or not is executed. Therefore, in this process, it may be confirmed whether or not the execution of the meter extinguishing effect is set in the above-described meter effect setting process (step S7600 in FIG. 64). As a result of the confirmation, if the meter extinguishing effect is executed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7016. On the other hand, when the meter extinction effect is not executed (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7018.

  Step S7016: The effect control CPU 126 executes a limiter number management process at the time of effect of turning off the meter. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 sets the back limiter value and the front limiter value when the meter extinction effect is executed. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7018.

  Step S7018: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not a meter-on lighting effect has been executed. Specifically, in the previous meter effect setting process (step S7600 in FIG. 64), the execution of the meter addition lighting effect is set, and based on the setting, the limiter remaining number meter M is newly set to at least 1 in the screen. It is confirmed whether or not a lighting effect is executed. Therefore, in this process, it may be confirmed whether or not the execution of the meter addition lighting effect is set in the above-described meter effect setting process (step S7600 in FIG. 64). As a result of the confirmation, when the meter-on lighting effect is executed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7020. On the other hand, when the meter addition lighting effect is not executed (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7022.

  Step S7020: The production control CPU 126 executes a limiter number management process at the time of lighting on the meter. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 sets a table limiter value when a meter-on lighting effect is executed. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7022.

  Step S7022: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the maximum meter lighting effect has been executed. Specifically, in the previous meter effect setting process (step S7600 in FIG. 64), execution of the maximum addition lighting effect is set, and based on the setting, all the meters of the limiter remaining number meter M are displayed (for example, , 15) Confirm whether or not a lighting effect has been executed. Therefore, in this process, it may be confirmed whether or not execution of the maximum meter lighting effect is set in the above-described meter effect setting process (step S7600 in FIG. 64). As a result of the confirmation, if the meter maximum addition lighting effect is executed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7024. On the other hand, if the meter maximum addition lighting effect is not executed (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7026.

  Step S7024: The effect control CPU 126 executes the limiter number management process at the time of the meter maximum addition lighting effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 sets a table limiter value when the meter maximum addition lighting effect is executed. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7026.

  Step S7026: The effect control CPU 126 executes an extra limiter value reset process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 sets an additional limiter value based on the additional limiter value update flag, the back limiter value reset flag, and the front limiter value reset flag. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect process after starting the big role (FIG. 64).

[Limiter number management process when limiter remaining number command is received]
FIG. 66 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of limiter number management processing when a limiter remaining number command is received. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S7050: The effect control CPU 126 sets the main control limiter value to a value +1 corresponding to the limiter remaining number command. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126, based on the value of the limiter remaining number command referred in the previous step S7010 (FIG. 65), adds a value obtained by adding 1 to the value corresponding to the command, and the limiter value management buffer area of the RAM 130. Is stored as a main control limiter value.

  For example, if the stop symbol when entering the chance zone from the normal mode is 2-round probability variation 1 or 2-round probability variation 2, the limiter remaining number command is a value corresponding to 16, so the main control limiter value is It is set to 17 and stored. In addition, when the chance zone advances and the special symbol variation is executed in plural, the stop symbol is 2-round probability variation 1 or 2-round probability variation 2, and the limiter remaining number command at that time is a value corresponding to 7. If it is, the main control limiter value is set to 8 and stored. When the stop symbol is 2 rounds normal 1 or 2 rounds normal 2 because the limiter remaining number command is a value corresponding to 0, the main control limiter value is set to 1 and stored.

  As described above, when the setting of the main control limiter value is completed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7052.

  Step S7052: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the main control limiter value is the same value as 1. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the main control limiter value set in the previous step S7050 is the same value as 1. If the result of this confirmation is that the main control limiter value is the same value as 1 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7080. On the other hand, when the main control limiter value is not the same value as 1 (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7060.

  Step S7060: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether the back limiter value is the same as the main control limiter value. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the limiter value management buffer area of the RAM 130, refers to the back limiter value, and determines whether the referenced value is the same as the main control limiter value set in the previous step S7050. Check.

  For example, when entering the chance zone from the normal mode, the back limiter value is 0, which is the initial value, so the back limiter value and the main control limiter value are not the same. On the other hand, if the chance zone progresses and one limiter remaining number meter M is extinguished on the screen at the start of special symbol fluctuation start (when lottery result command is received), the back limiter value is subtracted, so the special symbol is stopped. At the time of display (when the limiter control remaining number command is received), the subtracted back limiter value and the main control limiter value are the same. In addition, even if the power supplied to the pachinko machine 1 is temporarily shut off during the chance zone (high probability state or time reduction state) and then returns, the back limiter value is the initial value of 0. Therefore, the back limiter value and the main control limiter value are not the same. Therefore, if the back limiter value and the main control limiter value are not the same, when entering the chance zone from the normal mode, or after power-off in the chance zone (high probability state or time reduction state) The case of returning from is assumed.

  As a result of this confirmation, when the back limiter value is the same as the main control limiter value (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the limiter number management process (FIG. 65). On the other hand, when the back limiter value is not the same as the main control limiter value (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7062.

  Step S7062: The effect control CPU 126 sets the back limiter value to the main control limiter value. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 stores the back limiter value in the limiter value management buffer area of the RAM 130 with the same value as the main control limiter value set in the previous step S7050.

  For example, when entering the chance zone from the normal mode, the back limiter value is set to the same value (for example, 17) as the main control limiter value and stored. In addition, the back limiter value is based on a value (for example, 5) corresponding to the limiter remaining number command at the time of return after power-off in the chance zone (high probability state or time reduction state). The same value (for example, 5) as the main control limiter value is set and stored. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7064.

  Step S7064: The effect control CPU 126 sets the back limiter value reset flag to ON. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130 and sets the value of the back limiter value reset flag to ON (sets to 01H). The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7066.

  Step S7066: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the back limiter value is larger than 6. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the back limiter value set in the previous step S7062 is larger than 6. If the result of this confirmation is that the back limiter value is greater than 6 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7068. On the other hand, when the back limiter value is not larger than 6 (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7070.

  Step S7068: The effect control CPU 126 sets the front limiter value to the back limiter value-3. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 stores the table limiter value in the limiter value management buffer area of the RAM 130 by a value obtained by subtracting 3 from the back limiter value set in the previous step S7062.

  For example, when entering the chance zone from the normal mode, the front limiter value is set and stored by subtracting 3 (eg, 14) from the back limiter value (eg, 17). The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7090.

  Step S7070: The effect control CPU 126 sets the front limiter value to the back limiter value. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 records the table limiter value in the limiter value management buffer area of the RAM 130 with the same value as the back limiter value set in the previous step S7062.

  For example, at the time of return after power-off in the chance zone (high probability state or time reduction state), the front limiter value is set to the same value (for example, 5) as the back limiter value (for example, 5). It is set and stored. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7090.

  Step S7080: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the stop symbol is normal 1 for 2 rounds. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, refers to the stored stop symbol command value, and confirms whether or not the referenced value is a value corresponding to the normal 1 of the two rounds. To do. As a result of this confirmation, if the stop symbol is 2 rounds normally 1 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7082. On the other hand, when the stop symbol is not normally 1 for 2 rounds (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the limiter number management process (FIG. 65).

  Step S7082: The effect control CPU 126 sets the back limiter value to 18. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 stores the back limiter value with a value of 18 in the limiter value management buffer area of the RAM 130. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7084.

  Step S7084: The effect control CPU 126 sets the back limiter value reset flag to ON. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130 and sets the value of the back limiter value reset flag to ON (sets to 01H). The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7086.

  Step S7086: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the table limiter value is the same value as zero. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the limiter value management buffer area of the RAM 130, refers to the table limiter value, and confirms whether or not the referenced value is the same value as zero.

  For example, when entering the chance zone from the normal mode, if the stop symbol is normal 1 for 2 rounds, the table limiter value is the same as 0 because the table limiter value is the initial value 0. On the other hand, even if the chance zone progresses and the stop symbol corresponds to 2 rounds of normal 1, the maximum metering effect is executed when the limiter is reached, the table limiter value is set to 15, and the maximum metering effect is set when the limiter is not reached. Even if it is not executed, the table limiter value is set to a value (1 to 15) different from 0.

  As a result of the confirmation, if the table limiter value is the same value as 0 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7088. On the other hand, when the table limiter value is not the same value as 0 (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the limiter number management process (FIG. 65).

  Step S7088: The effect control CPU 126 sets the table limiter value to 15. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 stores the table limiter value as a value of 15 in the limiter value management buffer area of the RAM 130. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7090.

  Step S7090: The effect control CPU 126 sets the table limiter value reset flag to ON. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130 and sets the value of the table limiter value reset flag to ON (sets to 01H).

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the limiter number management process (FIG. 65).

[Limiter number management process for special symbols]
FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol deviation limiter number management process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S7092: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a lottery result command has been received. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a lottery result command relating to a special symbol is newly stored. As a result of the confirmation, when the lottery result command is received (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7094. On the other hand, when the lottery result command is not received (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the limiter number management process (FIG. 65).

  Step S7094: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the lottery result command received in the process of the previous step S7092 corresponds to a big hit (winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the value of the referenced lottery result command is a value corresponding to the big hit (winning). As a result of this confirmation, when the received lottery result command corresponds to the big hit (winning) (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the limiter number management process (FIG. 65). On the other hand, when the received lottery result command does not correspond to the big win (winning) (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7096.

  Step S7096: The effect control CPU 126 adds 1 to the back limiter value. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the limiter value management buffer area of the RAM 130, refers to the back limiter value, sets a value obtained by adding 1 to the referenced value as a new back limiter value, and sets the limiter management buffer area of the RAM 130. To remember.

  As a result, when the meter turn-off effect is executed, the front limiter value and the back limiter value are changed by one, but when the result of the internal drawing of the special symbol is won, the back limiter value is subtracted by one. However, since the back limiter value is incremented by 1 by this process, consistency with the main control limiter value can be obtained.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the limiter number management process (FIG. 65).

[Limiter number management process when the meter is turned off]
FIG. 68 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the limiter number management process during execution of the meter-off effect. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S7100: The effect control CPU 126 subtracts 1 from the table limiter value. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the limiter value management buffer area of the RAM 130, refers to the table limiter value, sets a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the referenced value as a new table limiter value, and sets the limiter management buffer area of the RAM 130. To remember.

  For example, as described in (f) of FIG. 47, if the meter extinction effect is executed in a state in which the seventh meter is lit in the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen, the remaining limiter number in the screen. One of the seventh meters of the meter M is turned off, and the sixth meter is turned on. Here, in the state where up to the seventh meter is lit in the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen, the table limiter value represents 7. When the meter extinguishing effect is executed and this processing is executed, the table limiter value is subtracted from 1 by 7 and becomes 6. Accordingly, since the table limiter value is 6 by this processing, this indicates that consistency with the state in which up to the sixth meter is lit in the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen is obtained.

  When the table limiter value is set and stored as described above, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7102.

  Step S7102: The effect control CPU 126 subtracts 1 from the back limiter value. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the limiter value management buffer area of the RAM 130, refers to the back limiter value, sets a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the referenced value as a new back limiter value, and sets the limiter management buffer area of the RAM 130. To remember.

  Here, since the sum of the table limiter value indicating the number of lights on the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen and the addition limiter value is the back limiter value, the table limiter value is subtracted by 1 in the previous step S7100. 1 is subtracted from the back limiter value in this process.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the limiter number management process (FIG. 65).

[Limiter number management process when the meter is lit up]
FIG. 69 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of limiter number management processing during execution of a meter-on lighting effect. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S7120: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the set effect contents. Specifically, the contents of the extra effect currently being executed on the screen are referred to. The content of this extra effect represents the content set in the main extra effect setting process (step S7452 in FIG. 76). Here, since the necessary information is the number of meters added in the additional effect, the additional number related to the additional effect pattern in the additional effect described later may be referred to in this process. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7122.

  Step S7122: The effect control CPU 126 adds to the table limiter value the amount executed by the effect. Specifically, first, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the limiter value management buffer area of the RAM 130 and refers to the table limiter value. Next, based on the content of the extra effect referred to in the previous step S7120, the value corresponding to the added number executed in the extra effect and the referenced table limiter value are added together, and the value of the added result is a new table limiter. The value is set as a value and stored in the limiter management buffer area of the RAM 130.

  For example, as described with reference to (l) and FIG. 44 (m) in FIG. 43, in the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen, up to the fourth meter is lit, and a meter addition lighting effect (for example, the number of additions) 3) is executed, three of the fifth to seventh meters of the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen are newly lit, and the seventh meter is lit. Here, the table limiter value represents 4 in a state in which the fourth meter in the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen is lit. Then, when the number of additions is increased by 3 meters, and the process is executed, the table limiter value is added to 3 from 4, and becomes 7. Accordingly, since the table limiter value is 7 by this processing, it indicates that consistency with the state in which the seventh remaining meters in the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen are lit is obtained.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the limiter number management process (FIG. 65).

[Limiter number management process when the maximum additional lighting on the meter is performed]
FIG. 70 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of limiter number management processing during execution of a maximum addition lighting effect. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S7140: The effect control CPU 126 sets the table limiter value to 15. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 stores the table limiter value as a value of 15 in the limiter value management buffer area of the RAM 130. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7142.

  For example, as described with reference to (w) and (x) in FIG. 53, if the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen is turned off with the meter maximum addition lighting effect being executed, All the meters of the limiter remaining number meter M are turned on. Here, when all the meters in the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen are turned off, the table limiter value represents 0. When the maximum addition lighting effect is executed and this process is executed, the table limiter value is changed from 0 to 15. Therefore, since the table limiter value is 15 by this processing, the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen is consistent with the state in which all (up to 15th) meters are lit. .

  When the table limiter value is set and stored as described above, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7142.

  Step S7142: The effect control CPU 126 sets the table limiter value reset flag to ON. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130 and sets the value of the table limiter value reset flag to ON (sets to 01H).

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the limiter number management process (FIG. 65).

[Additional limiter value reset processing]
FIG. 71 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of an addition limiter value reset process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S7170: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the back limiter value reset flag is ON. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130, refers to the value of the back limiter value reset flag, and determines whether or not the referenced value is the same as a value corresponding to ON (for example, 01H). Confirm. If the result of this confirmation is that the back limiter value reset flag is ON (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7172. On the other hand, when the back limiter value reset flag is not ON (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7180.

  Step S7172: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the table limiter value reset flag is ON. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130, refers to the value of the table limiter value reset flag, and determines whether or not the referenced value is the same as a value corresponding to ON (for example, 01H). Confirm. If the result of this confirmation is that the table limiter value reset flag is ON (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7174. On the other hand, when the table limiter value reset flag is not ON (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7175.

  Step S7174: The effect control CPU 126 sets the addition limiter value to a value obtained by subtracting the front limiter value from the back limiter value. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the limiter value management buffer area of the RAM 130, refers to the back limiter value and the front limiter value, and adds a value obtained by subtracting the front limiter value from the referred back limiter value as the upper limiter value. It is set and stored in the limiter management buffer area of the RAM 130.

  Here, as described above, the process of setting the back limiter value reset flag to ON (step S7170: Yes) is the process in the limiter number management process when receiving the limiter remaining number command (step S7064 in FIG. 66). Alternatively, it is executed in step S7084). That is, when entering the chance zone (high probability state or time shortening state) from the normal mode, when returning after power shutdown in the chance zone (high probability state or time shortening state), or This indicates that the back limiter value reset flag is set to ON on the condition that the stop symbol corresponds to normal 1 for 2 rounds.

  On the other hand, the process for setting the table limiter value reset flag to ON (step S7172: Yes) is the process in the limiter number management process when receiving the limiter remaining number command as described above (step S7090 in FIG. 66). Or, it is executed in one of the processes within the limiter number management process (step S7142 in FIG. 70) when the maximum addition lighting effect is performed. That is, when entering the chance zone (high probability state or time shortening state) from the normal mode, when returning after power shutdown in the chance zone (high probability state or time shortening state), or This indicates that the table limiter value reset flag is set to ON on the condition that the stop symbol corresponds to normal 1 for two rounds and the meter maximum addition effect is executed.

  Therefore, the condition for executing this process (step S7170: Yes and step S7172: Yes) is based on the condition of the process in which the table limiter value reset flag and the back limiter value reset flag are set to ON. When entering the chance zone (high probability state or time reduction state) (stop pattern is 2 round probability variation 1, 2 round probability variation 2 or 2 round normal 1), in chance zone (high probability state, or It represents either when the power is turned off after the power is turned off in the time reduction state), or when the stop symbol corresponds to normal 1 for two rounds and the maximum metering effect is executed.

  For example, when entering the chance zone (high probability state or time shortening state) from the normal mode (stop symbol is 2 round probability variation 1, 2 round probability variation 2), the back limiter value is set to 17 (in FIG. 66) In step S7062, the table limiter value is set to 14 (step S7068 in FIG. 66). Therefore, when entering the chance zone (high probability state or time shortening state) from the normal mode, the additional limiter value is set to a value (3) obtained by subtracting the table limiter value (14) from the back limiter value (17). Remembered.

  For example, when entering the chance zone (high probability state or time shortening state) from the normal mode (stop symbol is 2 rounds normally 1), the back limiter value is set to 18 (step S7082 in FIG. 66), The limiter value is set to 15 (step S7088 in FIG. 66). Therefore, when the stop symbol corresponds to normal 1 for two rounds, the additional limiter value is stored as a value (3) set by subtracting the front limiter value (15) from the back limiter value (18).

  For example, when returning from after power-off in the chance zone (high probability state or time reduction state), the back limiter value is set to 5, for example (step S7062 in FIG. 66), and the table limiter value Is set to 5 (step S7070 in FIG. 66). Therefore, when returning from after power-off in the chance zone (high probability state or time reduction state), the upper limiter value is a value obtained by subtracting the table limiter value (5) from the back limiter value (5) (0 ) Is set and stored.

  For example, when the stop symbol corresponds to normal 1 for 2 rounds and the meter maximum addition effect is executed, the back limiter value is set to 18 (step S7082 in FIG. 66), and the front limiter value is set to 15 (FIG. 70, step S7142). Therefore, when the stop symbol corresponds to normal 1 for 2 rounds and the maximum metering effect is executed, the additional limiter value is set to the value obtained by subtracting the table limiter value (15) from the back limiter value (18). Remembered.

  As described above, when the additional limiter value is set, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7176.

  Step S7175: The production control CPU 126 sets the additional limiter value to 18. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the limiter value management buffer area of the RAM 130, sets an additional limiter value and a value of 18 and stores them in the limiter management buffer area of the RAM 130.

  Here, as described above, the process of setting the back limiter value reset flag to ON (step S7170: Yes) is the process in the limiter number management process when receiving the limiter remaining number command (step S7064 in FIG. 66). Alternatively, it is executed in step S7084). That is, when entering the chance zone (high probability state or time shortening state) from the normal mode, when returning after power shutdown in the chance zone (high probability state or time shortening state), or This indicates that the back limiter value reset flag is set to ON on the condition that the stop symbol corresponds to normal 1 for 2 rounds.

  On the other hand, the process for setting the table limiter value reset flag to ON (step S7172: Yes) is the process in the limiter number management process when receiving the limiter remaining number command as described above (step S7090 in FIG. 66). Or, it is executed in one of the processes within the limiter number management process (step S7142 in FIG. 70) when the maximum addition lighting effect is performed. That is, when entering the chance zone (high probability state or time shortening state) from the normal mode, when returning after power shutdown in the chance zone (high probability state or time shortening state), or This indicates that the table limiter value reset flag is set to ON on the condition that the stop symbol corresponds to normal 1 for two rounds and the meter maximum addition effect is executed.

  Therefore, the conditions for executing this processing (step S7170: Yes and step S7172: No) are the processing conditions in which the table limiter value reset flag is set to OFF and the back limiter value reset flag is set to ON. Based on this, it is shown that the stop symbol does not execute the maximum addition effect in the chance zone (except when the chance zone enters), although the stop symbol corresponds to the normal 1 for 2 rounds.

  In other words, if the stop symbol is in 2 rounds normally 1 during the chance zone (except when entering the chance zone) and the meter maximum addition effect is not executed, the back limiter value is set to 18 (FIG. 66). In step S7082), the table limiter value is set to a predetermined value (1 to 14) when the meter extinction effect is executed (step S7100 in FIG. 68), and the additional limiter value is set to 18 in this processing. ing.

  As described above, when the additional limiter value is set to 18, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7178.

  Step S7176: The effect control CPU 126 sets the table limiter value reset flag to OFF. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130 and resets the value of the table limiter value reset flag to OFF (sets it to 00H). The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7178.

  Step S7178: The effect control CPU 126 sets the back limiter value reset flag to OFF. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130 and resets the value of the back limiter value reset flag to OFF (sets it to 00H). The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7180.

  Step S7180: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the extra limiter value update flag is ON. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130, refers to the value of the additional limiter value update flag, and determines whether or not the referenced value is the same as a value corresponding to ON (for example, 01H). Confirm. As a result of this confirmation, when the additional limiter value update flag is ON (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7182. On the other hand, when the additional limiter value update flag is not ON (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the limiter number management process (FIG. 65).

  Step S7182: The effect control CPU 126 subtracts the set number of extra times from the extra limiter value. Specifically, first, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the limiter value management buffer area of the RAM 130 and refers to the additional limiter value. Next, the effect control CPU 126 refers to the number of times of addition associated with the set additional effect pattern. The extra effect pattern will be described later, but is set in the pre-read extra effect lottery process (FIG. 73) and the extra effect execution lottery process (FIG. 78). Then, the reference number of times of addition is subtracted from the reference addition effect value, and the value of the subtraction result is set as a new addition limiter value and stored in the limiter management buffer area of the RAM 130.

  Step S7184: The effect control CPU 126 sets the addition limiter value reset flag to OFF. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130 and resets the value of the extra limiter value reset flag to OFF (sets it to 00H).

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the limiter number management process (FIG. 65).

[Pre-reading scenario setting process]
FIG. 72 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the pre-reading superimposing effect scenario setting process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S7210: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a lottery result command has been received. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether a lottery result command is newly stored. As a result of the confirmation, if the lottery result command is received (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7212. On the other hand, when the lottery result command is not received (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect process (FIG. 64) after the start of the major role.

  Step S7212: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the lottery result command received in the process of the previous step S7210 corresponds to a big hit (winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the value of the referenced lottery result command is a value corresponding to the big hit (winning). As a result of the confirmation, if the received lottery result command corresponds to the big hit (winning) (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7214. On the other hand, when the received lottery result command does not correspond to the big hit (winning) (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect process (FIG. 64) after the start of the big role.

  Step S7214: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the table limiter value is larger than 4 and smaller than 13. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the limiter value management buffer area of the RAM 130, refers to the table limiter value, and confirms whether the referenced value is larger than 4 and smaller than 13. To do. As a result of this confirmation, if the table limiter value is larger than 4 and smaller than 13 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7216. On the other hand, when the table limiter value is larger than 4 and not smaller than 13, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7218.

  Step S7216: The effect control CPU 126 executes a pre-reading effect lottery process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selectively determines whether or not to execute an additional effect, that is, whether or not to perform the pre-reading superimposition in the variation after the variation, and if it is determined to execute the pre-reading additional effect, the additional effect pattern (additional) Set the variation (table limiter value), the number of extras, and the extra category to execute the performance. In addition to the execution of the pre-reading superposition effect, it is also selectively determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading superimposing gaze effect (an effect that simulates the superimposing effect that performs the superimposing effect), and it is determined to execute the prefetching superimposing effect. In this case, the additional effect pattern is set in the same manner. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S7218: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not an additional effect pattern is set. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 refers to the result determined in the previous step S7216 and confirms whether or not the additional effect pattern is set. As a result of this confirmation, when the additional effect pattern is set (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7220. On the other hand, when the additional effect pattern is not set (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect process after starting the big role (FIG. 64).

  Step S7220: The effect control CPU 126 updates the pre-reading effect scenario. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the buffer area of the RAM 130, and updates the contents of the pre-added effect scenario stored in step S7216 to the contents of the stored pre-read effect scenario.

  For example, in the previous step S7216, the additional effect pattern in which the table limiter value is 7 (the seventh limiter remaining number meter M displayed in the screen), the additional number is 2, and the additional category is the treasure box is set. Is set, the contents of the pre-reading superimposing effect scenario are updated to add contents such that the seventh superimposing number of the table limiter value is two and the superimposing category executes the superimposing effect of the treasure box.

  When this process is finished, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect process (FIG. 64) after the start of the major role.

[Look-up process for pre-reading production]
FIG. 73 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the pre-reading effect lottery process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S7300: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the extra limiter value is a value greater than zero. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the limiter value management buffer area of the RAM 130, refers to the additional limiter value, and confirms whether or not the referenced value is a value greater than zero. As a result of this confirmation, when the additional limiter value is greater than 0 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7302. On the other hand, when the additional limiter value is not greater than 0 (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7320.

  Step S7302: The effect control CPU 126 executes a pre-reading effect execution lottery. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 refers to a pre-reading effect execution lottery table (not shown) stored in advance in the ROM 128, and adds the pre-reading added in the previous effect random number update process (step S410 in FIG. 60). Based on the random number for effect execution lottery, it is selectively determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect. Here, regarding the pre-reading superimposing effect execution lottery table, execution of the pre-reading superimposing effect may be set to be easily selected in accordance with the table limiter value or the surplus limiter value referred to in the previous step S7214 or step S7300. (That is, the lottery probabilities for selecting execution of the pre-reading effect may be set differently or may be set equal). The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7304.

  Step S7304: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not execution of the pre-reading effect is selected. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 refers to the result determined in the previous step S7302 and confirms whether or not execution of the pre-reading effect is selected. As a result of the confirmation, if execution of the pre-reading effect is selected (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7306. On the other hand, if execution of the pre-reading effect is not selected (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7320.

  Step S7306: The effect control CPU 126 executes an extra effect execution variation lottery (excluding the last three variations and the extra variation). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 determines the variation (table limiter value) remaining until the limiter is reached based on the random effect random number for adding effect execution variation updated in the previous effect random number update process (step S410 in FIG. 60). The change (table limiter value) scheduled to execute the extra effect from the inside is selectively determined. Note that the fluctuation scheduled to execute the extra effect determined here is a fluctuation corresponding to the table limiter value, and is not a fluctuation counted from the fluctuation or a fluctuation counted from when the limiter is reached. For example, when it is determined that the change is executed when the table limiter value is 7, the extra effect is scheduled to be executed after the seventh limiter remaining number meter M in the screen is consumed.

  In addition, as for the predetermined fluctuation when determining the fluctuation scheduled to execute the extra effect, the last three fluctuation and the extra fluctuation are excluded. As for the last three fluctuations, a special effect is to be executed when the first to third of the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen is consumed, so it is added during the special effect. This means that the production is not executed. Further, the additional fluctuation represents that the fluctuation that is already scheduled to be performed for the additional effect (including the additional gaze effect) is excluded.

  As described above, when the extra effect execution variation (table limiter value) is determined in the extra effect execution variation lottery, the extra effect execution variation is set, and the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7308.

  In addition, in this extra effect execution variation lottery, when there is no selectable extra effect execution variation (for example, an extra effect (including an extra gaze effect) is scheduled for all variations where the table limiter value is 4 or more). ), The effect control CPU 126 executes the next step S7308 without setting the additional effect execution variation.

  Step S7308: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the extra effect execution variation is set. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the additional effect execution variation has been set in the previous step S7306. As a result of the confirmation, when the additional effect execution variation is set (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7310. On the other hand, when the superimposing effect execution variation is not set (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the pre-reading superimposing effect scenario setting process (FIG. 72).

  Step S7310: The effect control CPU 126 executes an extra number lottery. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 sets the upper limiter value referred to in the previous step S7300, or the value at which the table limiter value becomes 15 when it is added as the maximum additional number, from 1 to the maximum additional number. To selectively determine the number to be added. It should be noted that with reference to an additional number lottery table (not shown) stored in advance in ROM 128, the additional number based on the additional number lottery random number updated in the previous effect random number update process (step S410 in FIG. 60). May be selectively determined. Here, the added number lottery table may be set so that the larger value of the added number can be selected more easily or equivalently corresponding to the added limiter value referred to in the previous step S7530 ( In other words, the lottery probabilities for selecting the additional number may be set differently or may be set equal). The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7312.

  Step S7312: The effect control CPU 126 executes an extra effect category lottery. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an added effect category lottery table (not shown) stored in advance in the ROM 128, and the added effect category updated in the previous effect random number update process (step S410 in FIG. 60). Based on the random numbers for lottery, the category of the extra effect is selectively determined.

  Here, for the added effect category lottery table to be referred to, for example, as described above, as an added effect category, “female character”, “treasure chest”, “effect switching button”, “panda character”, A category such as “? Mark” is defined in advance. In addition, the added effect category lottery table may be set by selecting different categories corresponding to the added number determined in the previous step S7310. For example, if the number of extras is one, categories such as “female character”, “treasure box”, “? Mark”, etc. are set easily, or if there are 2 to 4 categories, “female character” , “Treasure chest”, “Panda character”, etc. categories are set easily, or if there are 5-7 categories, categories such as “Treasure chest”, “Panda character”, “Direction switching button” etc. If it is set so that it can be easily selected, or if there are 8 to 12, it may be set that categories such as “panda character”, “effect switching button”, etc. are easily selected.

  As described above, when the category of the extra effect is selectively determined, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7314.

  Step S7314: The effect control CPU 126 sets an additional effect pattern. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 adds, to the buffer area of the RAM 130, a set of the added effect execution variation, the added number, and the added effect category selected in the previous steps S7306, S7310, and S7312. It memorizes as a production pattern. For example, an extra effect pattern in which the table limiter value is 7 as the extra effect execution change, the extra number is 1, and the “female character” is added as the extra effect category is stored in the buffer area of the RAM 130. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7316.

  Step S7316: The effect control CPU 126 sets the prefetching effect adding flag to ON. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130, and sets the value of the prefetched effect addition flag to ON (sets it to 01H). The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7318.

  Step S7318: The effect control CPU 126 sets the additional limiter value update flag to ON. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130 and sets the value of the extra limiter value update flag to ON (sets to 01H). The effect control CPU 126 returns to the pre-reading effect scenario setting process (FIG. 72).

  Step S7320: The effect control CPU 126 executes a pre-reading addition gasse effect lottery process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 also selectively determines whether or not to execute the pre-read superimposing gaze effect (an effect that does not execute the superimposing effect that performs the superimposing effect), and determines to execute the pre-read superimposing gase effect. In this case, an additional effect pattern is set. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the pre-reading effect scenario setting process (FIG. 72).

[Pre-reading Gase production lottery processing]
FIG. 74 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of pre-loading added gaze effect lottery processing. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S7330: The production control CPU 126 executes a pre-reading addition gasse production execution lottery. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 refers to the prefetched Gase effect execution lottery table (not shown) stored in advance in the ROM 128, and the prefetch updated in the previous effect random number update process (step S410 in FIG. 60). Whether or not to execute the pre-reading extra gaze effect is selectively determined based on the random number for the extra gaze effect execution lottery. Here, for the pre-reading superimposing gasse effect execution lottery table, execution of the pre-reading superimposing gaze effect may be set so as to be easily selected corresponding to the table limiter value and the surplus limiter value referred to in steps S7214 and S7300. Alternatively, they may be set equally (that is, they may be set with different lottery probabilities in which the execution of the pre-loading gaze effect is selected or may be set equally). The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7332.

  Step S7332: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the execution of the pre-read superimposition effect is selected. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 refers to the result determined in the previous step S7330, and confirms whether or not the execution of the pre-reading gaze effect is selected. As a result of the confirmation, if execution of the pre-reading gaze effect is selected (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7334. On the other hand, if execution of the pre-reading effect is not selected (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the pre-reading effect lottery process (FIG. 73).

  Step S7334: The effect control CPU 126 executes an extra effect execution fluctuation lottery (excluding the last three fluctuations and the extra fluctuation). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 determines the variation (table limiter value) remaining until the limiter is reached based on the random effect random number for adding effect execution variation updated in the previous effect random number update process (step S410 in FIG. 60). A change (table limiter value) scheduled to execute an added gaze effect (effect not added) from the inside is selectively determined. Note that the fluctuation that is scheduled to be executed here is a fluctuation corresponding to the table limiter value, and is not a fluctuation counted from the fluctuation or a fluctuation counted from when the limiter is reached. For example, when it is determined that the change is to be executed when the table limiter value is 7, an extra gaze effect is scheduled to be executed after the seventh limiter remaining number meter M in the screen is consumed.

  In addition, the last three fluctuations and the extra fluctuation are excluded from the remaining fluctuations until reaching the limiter when the fluctuation scheduled to execute the extra gaze effect is determined. As for the last three fluctuations, a special effect is to be executed when the first to third of the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen is consumed, so it is added during the special effect. This means that the gaze effect is not executed. Further, the additional fluctuation represents that the fluctuation that is already scheduled to be performed for the additional effect (including the additional gaze effect) is excluded.

  As described above, when the extra effect execution variation (table limiter value) is determined in the extra effect execution variation lottery, the extra effect execution variation is set, and the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7336.

  In addition, in this extra effect execution variation lottery, when there is no selectable extra effect execution variation (for example, an extra effect (including an extra gaze effect) is scheduled for all variations where the table limiter value is 4 or more). ), The effect control CPU 126 executes the next step S7336 without setting the additional effect execution variation.

  Step S7336: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the extra effect execution variation is set. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not an additional effect execution variation has been set in the previous step S7334. As a result of this confirmation, when the additional effect execution variation is set (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7338. On the other hand, when the superimposing effect execution variation is not set (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the pre-reading superimposing effect lottery process (FIG. 73).

  Step S7338: The effect control CPU 126 sets the added number to zero. Specifically, since the content of the effect in the pre-reading added gaze effect is an effect that the adding is not executed, the number of added is set to zero. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7340.

  Step S7340: The effect control CPU 126 executes an extra effect category lottery. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an added effect category lottery table (not shown) stored in advance in the ROM 128, and the added effect category updated in the previous effect random number update process (step S410 in FIG. 60). Based on the random numbers for lottery, the category of the extra effect is selectively determined. Here, the added effect category lottery table to be referred to may be set by limiting the category to be selected because the effect executed this time is the add-on gaze effect (effect in which no add-on is executed). For example, “female character”, “treasure box”, “? Mark” may be defined as selectable categories, and “panda character” or “production switching button” may be defined as non-selectable categories. . Note that all categories may be set to be selectable at the same rate.

  As described above, when the category of the extra effect is selectively determined, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7342.

  Step S7342: The effect control CPU 126 sets an additional effect pattern. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 stores the added effect execution variation, the added number (0), and the added effect category set or selected in the previous step S7334, step S7338, and step S7340 in the buffer area of the RAM 130. The set is added and stored as an effect pattern. For example, an extra effect pattern in which the table limiter value is seven as the extra effect execution change, the extra number is zero, and the “? Mark” is set as the extra effect category is stored in the buffer area of the RAM 130. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7344.

  Step S7344: The effect control CPU 126 sets the pre-read superimposition effect addition flag to ON. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130, and sets the value of the prefetched effect addition flag to ON (sets it to 01H).

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the pre-reading effect effect lottery process (FIG. 73).

[Main production management process]
FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the main effect management process. The contents of the configuration example will be described below.

  The main effect management process includes a subroutine group of an execution selection process (step S7402), a chance zone main effect setting process (step S7404), a main extra effect setting process (step S7406), and a chance zone end effect setting process (step S7408). It is a configuration. In the main effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 performs a process for setting the execution of the main effect in the screen, for example, setting an effect to be executed for each change related to the special symbol or the normal symbol. Since the effect related to the meter is performed in a separate process, an additional effect in the chance zone and a setting for a normal effect when no additional effect is performed are performed in this process.

  Step S7402: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S7404 to S7408). That is, the effect control CPU 126 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the main effect management process in the stack pointer as the return address. Which process is selected as the jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far.

  For example, a chance after entering the chance zone (after the result of the internal lottery of the normal symbol corresponds to the win, and after the result of the internal lottery of the special symbol by winning when the variable start winning device 28 is operated thereafter) If the setting of the effect in the zone is not performed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the chance zone main effect setting process (step S7404) as the next jump destination. Also, the chance zone main effect setting process (step S7404) is selected also when the change of the normal symbol is started during the chance zone. When the change of a new special symbol is started during the chance zone, the effect control CPU 126 selects the main addition effect setting process (step S7406) as the next jump destination. If the special symbol stop symbol corresponds to normal 2 in the two rounds, the effect control CPU 126 selects the chance zone end effect setting process (step S7408) as the next jump destination. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Chance zone main production setting process]
Step S7404: In the chance zone main effect setting process, the effect control CPU 126 produces an effect related to the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen (turn-on effect / light-off effect of the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen, a balloon image on a meter with a specific number Set the execution of general effects executed on the screen other than the effect). For example, when the first to third meter of the limiter remaining number meter M on the screen is consumed, which represents the appearance of a female character sprinting in a car, Execution such as (q) in FIG. 51 to (u) in FIG. 52 is set.

  Although not shown in the drawing, it may be set to execute an effect that displays on the screen the number of prize balls to be paid out in response to winning in the variable start winning device 28 or winning in the variable winning device 30. For example, if the total number of prize balls so far is 7770, “7770 Get!” Is displayed on the screen, and the presentation is updated every time the number of prize balls increases. May be set. When a predetermined number of prize balls is reached, a female character may be given a title. For example, every time 5000 balls are paid out, titles such as “apprentice”, “amateur”, “experienced”, “master”, “king”, and “god” may be displayed on the screen. When a predetermined number of winning balls is reached, the background image, the clothes of the female character, the car on which the female character rides may be changed.

  In this way, by setting the execution of the main effect in the screen that is performed at a normal time other than the addition in the chance zone, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[Main addition production setting processing]
Step S7406: In the main extra effect setting process, the effect control CPU 126 performs setting of execution of an effect related to the extra effect. For example, the execution of the extra effect set in the pre-read extra effect scenario is set (for example, (k) in FIG. 49 to (m) in FIG. 50, etc.), or the upper limiter value exists and the table limiter value is 4. In some cases, the execution of the extra effect is forcibly set (not shown), or the execution of the maximum extra effect is set when the stop symbol corresponds to normal 1 for two rounds (for example, (v) in FIG. 53) (Y) in FIG. 54, (B) in FIG. 55 to (E) in FIG. 56, the execution of the maximum addition effect is forcibly set when the addition limiter value exists and the table limiter value is 1. To do. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

[Chance zone end effect setting process]
Step S7408: In the chance zone end effect setting process, the execution of the effect when the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponds to 2 rounds of normal 2 at the time of reaching the limiter is set. Specifically, as described with reference to (M) in FIG. 58 to (P) in FIG. 59, an image imitating the effect switching button is displayed on the screen and the player is requested to press the effect switching button 45. Press request effect, press failure effect that displays a character image such as “sorry” triggered by pressing of the effect switch button 45 by the player (or the elapse of the effective time of pressing the effect switch button 45), the female character is in the chance zone The execution of the chance zone end effect that teaches the end and the left-handed teaching effect that teaches that the female character has changed the launch position of the game ball to the left-handed is set. With these effects, the player can be informed that the game in a special game state such as a chance zone has ended.

[Main addition production setting processing]
FIG. 76 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the main addition effect setting process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S7410: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a lottery result command has been received. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether a lottery result command is newly stored. As a result of the confirmation, when the lottery result command is received (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7412. On the other hand, when the lottery result command is not received (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the main effect management process (FIG. 75).

  Step S7412: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the lottery result command received in the process of the previous step S7410 corresponds to a big hit (winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the value of the referenced lottery result command is a value corresponding to the big hit (winning). As a result of the confirmation, if the received lottery result command corresponds to the big hit (winning) (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7414. On the other hand, when the received lottery result command does not correspond to the big win (winning) (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the main effect management process (FIG. 75).

  Step S7414: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the stop symbol is normal 1 for 2 rounds. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, refers to the value of the newly stored stop symbol command, and determines whether or not the referred value is a value corresponding to normal 1 for two rounds. Check. As a result of this confirmation, when the stop symbol is 2 rounds normally 1 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7416. On the other hand, when the stop symbol is not normally 1 for two rounds (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7440.

  Step S7416: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the back limiter value is the same value as 1. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the limiter value management buffer area of the RAM 130, refers to the back limiter value, and confirms whether or not the referenced value is the same value as 1. As a result of this confirmation, if the back limiter value is the same value as 1 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7430. On the other hand, if the back limiter value is not the same value as 1 (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7418.

  Step S7418: The production control CPU 126 executes a maximum addition production execution lottery process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 performs a process of selectively determining whether or not to execute the maximum addition effect based on the current variation. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7420.

  Step S7420: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the execution of the maximum extra effect is selected. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 refers to the result determined in the previous step S7418 and confirms whether or not the execution of the maximum addition effect is selected. As a result of this confirmation, when execution of the maximum addition effect is selected (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7430. On the other hand, when the execution of the maximum addition effect is not selected (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7440.

  Step S7430: The production control CPU 126 executes the maximum addition production content lottery. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 refers to the maximum addition production content lottery table (not shown) stored in advance in the ROM 128, and the maximum addition updated in the previous production random number update process (step S410 in FIG. 60). Based on the effect content lottery random number, any one of the plurality of maximum additional effect contents is selectively determined. Here, with regard to the maximum extra effect content lottery table, for example, as the content of the maximum extra effect, the content of the effect described in (v) to FIG. 54 (y) in FIG. 53, or (B) in FIG. The contents of the production described in (E) in 56 are defined in advance. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7432.

  Step S7432: The effect control CPU 126 sets the maximum extra effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 sets the execution of the maximum extra effect on the screen based on the content of the maximum extra effect determined in the previous step S7430.

  For example, as described with reference to (v) to (y) in FIG. 53, a press request effect that displays an image imitating the effect switch button on the screen and requests the player to press the effect switch button 45. , A movable body fall effect in which the movable body 40f of the heart-shaped ornament suddenly falls when the player depresses the effect switching button 45 (or the elapse of the effective time of pressing the effect switching button 45), “GAS STATION” The maximum surplus consisting of a chance revival effect in which the limiter remaining number meter M is added to the maximum by displaying an image imitating ", and a chance zone continuation effect that represents the joy of the female character and the chance zone continues. Make settings to execute the production.

  For example, as described in FIGS. 55B to 56E, a blackout effect in which the entire screen suddenly darkens (blackout), and a movable body 40f of a heart-shaped ornament suddenly falls. A fall effect, a chance number revival effect that indicates that the female character has appeared and the chance number is reset to 15 times, and a chance zone continuation effect that represents the joy of the female character and the chance zone continues. Set to perform the maximum extra effect.

  As described above, when the setting of the execution of the maximum addition effect is finished, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7434.

  Step S7434: The effect control CPU 126 resets the pre-reading effect scenario. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the buffer area of the RAM 130 and erases the stored content of the pre-reading added effect scenario. As a result, the pre-reading presentation scenario is in a blank state. When this process ends, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the main effect management process (FIG. 75).

  Step S7440: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the pre-reading effect scenario. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the buffer area of the RAM 130 and refers to the contents of the stored prefetched effect scenario. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7442.

  Step S7442: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not an additional effect pattern is set for the change. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 stores the added effect pattern (the number of added items and the category of the added effect) from the contents of the pre-read added effect scenario referred to in the previous step S7440 as a set with the fluctuation (number of the table meter). Check if it is. Whether or not the change is an effect corresponding to the meter look-ahead addition effect, that is, whether or not a meter look-ahead add-on effect by a balloon image in which a certain category is displayed on the meter that is turned off this time has been performed. You may check. As a result of this confirmation, when an additional effect pattern is set for the change (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7450. On the other hand, when the additional effect pattern is not set for the variation (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7444.

  Step S7444: The effect control CPU 126 executes an extra effect execution lottery process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 performs a process of selectively determining whether or not to execute an additional effect with the current fluctuation.

  In addition, in this process, when all the table limiter values are consumed (when all the limiter values are larger than 0) while the additional limiter exists (when the additional limiter value is larger than 0), the maximum additional production is forcibly performed. Set execution. For example, with respect to two fluctuations before reaching the limiter (fluctuations in which the second and third meters are consumed), a special probability change effect (for example, a chance zone end effect, in (q) to FIG. 52 in FIG. 51 ( Since u)) is executed, it is set not to execute the extra effect. Here, in the result of the internal lottery at the time of one of the two fluctuations before reaching the limiter, the winning symbol corresponds to 2 rounds of normal 1 and the additional limiter value and the back limiter value are set to 18 until the limiter is reached. There are also cases where the number of changes is reset. In such a case, by performing the same effect as when the limiter was reached when the last meter was consumed, the chance zone continued as if the winning symbol was won for the first round of 2 rounds as a winning symbol. It can be reminiscent of the player.

  As described above, when it is determined whether or not to execute the additional effect based on the current variation, or when the setting of forced execution of the maximum additional effect is performed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7446. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S7446: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the execution of the maximum extra effect when the table limiter value is consumed is set. Specifically, it is confirmed in step S7444 whether or not the setting for forcibly adding the maximum addition effect has been performed. As a result of the confirmation, when execution of the maximum addition effect at the time of consumption of the table limiter value is set (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the main effect management process (FIG. 75). On the other hand, when the execution of the maximum addition effect at the time of consumption of the table limiter value is not set (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7448.

  Step S7448: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not an extra effect pattern is set. Specifically, in the previous step S7444, it is determined whether or not an additional effect is executed based on the current change, and an additional effect pattern is set accordingly. As a result of this confirmation, when the additional effect pattern is set (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7450. On the other hand, when the additional effect pattern is not set (when it is determined not to execute the additional effect due to the change) (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7454.

  Step S7450: The effect control CPU 126 executes a bonus effect content lottery. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 refers to an extra production content lottery table (not shown) stored in advance in the ROM 128, and the maximum extra production updated in the previous production random number update process (step S410 in FIG. 60). Based on the random number for content lottery, any one of a plurality of additional production contents is selectively determined.

  Here, with respect to the extra effect content lottery table, for example, an extra effect category associated with the extra effect pattern of the content of the pre-read extra effect scenario referred to in the previous step S7440 from a plurality of extra effect content lottery tables prepared. Alternatively, an extra effect content lottery table corresponding to the extra effect category associated with the extra effect pattern set in the previous step S7444 may be selected.

  For example, for the extra effect content lottery table selected when the extra effect category is “treasure box”, the treasure box is displayed, and then the diamond image or the ring image is displayed. The contents of a plurality of additional effects such as are specified. Here, the contents may be selected corresponding to the number of additions associated with the addition effect pattern. For example, the content of the extra effect selected corresponding to the extra number may be set differently. In addition, when the content of the selected additional effect is actually executed, for example, a mode in which an image representing the number of additions such as “+3” is superimposed on the diamond image (for example, a mode in which the content is added to the content of the additional performance ( For example, it is executed at (l) in FIG.

  For example, for the extra production content lottery table that is selected when the extra production category is “female character”, a female character appears with an item (cherry, watermelon, etc.), and then the cherry The contents of a plurality of additional effects such as contents for displaying an image and contents for displaying a watermelon image are defined. In the same manner as described above, the content of the extra effect selected corresponding to the number of extras associated with the extra effect pattern may be set differently. Further, the image representing the number of additions is executed in a form of being superimposed on the content of the selected addition effect.

  For example, for the extra effect content lottery table selected when the extra effect category is “effect change button”, an image simulating the effect change button 45 is displayed, and then the player presses the effect change button 45. When the heart-shaped movable body 40f is triggered by (or the passage of the effective time of the effect switching button 45), the contents of a plurality of additional effects such as the contents of an image imitating the movable body 40f are defined. Yes. In addition, when the content of the selected addition effect is actually executed, for example, a form (not shown) in which an image representing the number of additions such as “+7” is displayed in an image imitating the movable body 40f. Will be executed.

  For example, regarding the extra production content lottery table that is selected when the extra production category is “Panda Character”, the panda character appears with an item (flower, earring, etc.), and then as that item The contents of a plurality of additional effects such as the contents of displaying a flower image and the contents of displaying an earring image are defined. In the same manner as described above, the content of the extra effect selected corresponding to the number of extras associated with the extra effect pattern may be set differently. Further, the image representing the number of additions is executed in a form of being superimposed on the content of the selected addition effect.

  For example, with respect to the extra production content lottery table selected when the extra production category is “? Mark”, a female character on the car is discovered, and then a dialogue about the number of additions (for example, “+1”) ), Etc., the contents of a plurality of additional effects are defined.

  Here, when the number of additions associated with the addition pattern is 0 and the addition category is “? Mark”, the contents of the extra gaze production for the gasse production for the extra production content lottery table to be selected There are multiple rules. For example, the contents (not shown) where a female character discovers something such as “?” And nothing has occurred thereafter are defined. In addition, when the added number is 0 and the added effect category is “treasure box” or “effect switching button”, an image in which a treasure box appears and nothing has occurred is displayed. The contents of a plurality of added gaze effects such as the contents (not shown) and the contents (not shown) in which an image in which nothing has occurred even when the effect switching button 45 is pressed are defined.

  As described above, when one content of the additional effect is selectively determined, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7452.

  Step S7452: The effect control CPU 126 sets an extra effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 sets the execution of the add-on effect (including the add-on gaze effect) in the screen based on the contents of the add-on effect determined in the previous step S7450.

  For example, when the additional effect category is “treasure chest”, as described in FIG. 49 (k) to FIG. 50 (m), an additional indicating that the treasure chest appears on the screen and the addition starts. Start effect, additional effect display effect of adding extra number display effect in which diamond with added number of times ("+3") appears when opening treasure box, and additional effect of adding additional number to limiter remaining number meter M Perform the settings to be performed.

  For example, although not shown, when the additional production category is “female character”, an additional start production indicating that a female character appears on the screen and the addition starts, and the female character adds up (“+1 “)” Is displayed to give an extra number display effect (not shown) for handing over the cherry displayed, and an extra effect consisting of an extra execution effect for adding the extra number to the limiter remaining number meter M.

  For example, although the illustration is not shown, when the addition effect category is “effect change button”, the addition start effect indicating that the effect change button appears on the screen and the addition starts, and the effect change button 45 is pressed. The number of times that an image imitating the movable body 40f on which the heart-shaped movable body 40f is dropped and the number of times of addition ("+7") is displayed when triggered by the effective time of pressing the effect switching button 45 is displayed. The display effect and the setting for executing the additional effect including the additional execution effect for adding the additional number to the limiter remaining number meter M are performed.

  For example, although not shown in the figure, when the additional production category is “Panda character”, an additional start production indicating that the panda character appears on the screen and the addition starts, and the number of additions of the panda character A setting is made to execute an extra effect comprising an extra number display effect (not shown) for handing over a flower with (“+2”) displayed, and an extra execution effect for adding the extra number to the limiter remaining number meter M.

  For example, if the add-on effect category is “? Mark”, the female character in the car discovers something like “?”, And then executes an effect that emits a dialogue about the number of additions (for example, “+1”) (Not shown). In addition, an additional gaze production consisting of an additional gaze start effect indicating that a female character in the car has discovered something like “?”, And an additional gaze execution effect indicating that nothing has occurred after that. Set to execute (not shown).

  As described above, when execution of the extra effect is set, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7454.

  Step S7454: The effect control CPU 126 updates the prefetching effect scenario. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the buffer area of the RAM 130 and deletes the stored prefetched effect scenario contents for the variation. For example, the fluctuation corresponds to the seventh table limiter value (the seventh limiter remaining number meter M displayed in the screen), and the added effect pattern is associated with the seventh table limiter value. In this case, the contents of the pre-reading on effect scenario regarding the seventh table limiter value are deleted. Note that the contents of the pre-reading effect scenario relating to the fourth to sixth table limiter values are stored as they are. As a result, the pre-read superimposing effect scenario is updated. When this process ends, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the main effect management process (FIG. 75).

[Maximum production execution lottery process]
FIG. 77 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the maximum addition effect execution lottery process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S7500: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the table limiter value is a value of 4 or more and a value smaller than 13. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the limiter value management buffer area of the RAM 130, refers to the table limiter value, and confirms whether the referenced value is a value of 4 or more and less than 13. As a result of the confirmation, if the table limiter value is a value of 4 or more and a value smaller than 13 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7502. On the other hand, if the table limiter value is 4 or more and is not a value smaller than 13, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the main effect management process (FIG. 75).

  Step S7502: The production control CPU 126 executes a maximum addition production execution lottery. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 refers to the maximum addition production execution lottery table (not shown) stored in advance in the ROM 128, and the maximum addition updated in the previous production random number update process (step S410 in FIG. 60). Based on the random number for effect execution lottery, it is selectively determined whether or not to execute the maximum addition effect. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7504.

  Step S7504: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the execution of the maximum extra effect is selected. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 refers to the result determined in the previous step S7502 and confirms whether or not the execution of the maximum extra effect is selected. As a result of this confirmation, when execution of the maximum addition effect is selected (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7506. On the other hand, when execution of the maximum extra effect is not selected (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the main extra effect setting process (FIG. 76).

  Step S7506: The effect control CPU 126 sets the prefetched effect scenario reset flag to ON. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130 and sets the value of the prefetched effect scenario reset flag to ON (sets to 01H).

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the main added effect setting process (FIG. 76).

[Additional effect execution lottery processing]
FIG. 78 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of an extra effect execution lottery process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S7530: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the extra limiter value is a value larger than zero. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the limiter value management buffer area of the RAM 130, refers to the additional limiter value, and confirms whether or not the referenced value is a value greater than zero. As a result of this confirmation, if the additional limiter value is a value greater than 0 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7532. On the other hand, when the additional limiter value is not a value larger than 0 (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the main additional effect setting process (FIG. 76).

  Step S7532: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the table limiter value is larger than 4 and smaller than 13. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the limiter value management buffer area of the RAM 130, refers to the table limiter value, and confirms whether the referenced value is larger than 4 and smaller than 13. To do. As a result of this confirmation, if the table limiter value is larger than 4 and smaller than 13 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7534. On the other hand, when the table limiter value is larger than 4 and not smaller than 13, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7540.

  Step S7534: The effect control CPU 126 executes an extra effect execution lottery. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an additional effect execution lottery table (not shown) stored in advance in the ROM 128, and executes the additional effect updated in the previous effect random number update process (step S410 in FIG. 60). Based on the random numbers for lottery, it is selectively determined whether or not to perform an extra effect. Here, the extra effect execution lottery table may be set so that execution of the extra effect is easily selected or equivalently corresponding to the extra limiter value or the table limiter value referred to in the previous step S7530 or step S7532. (In other words, the lottery probabilities for selecting the execution of the extra effect may be set differently or may be set equal). The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7536.

  Step S7536: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the execution of the extra effect is selected. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 refers to the result determined in the previous step S7534, and confirms whether or not the execution of the extra effect is selected. As a result of this confirmation, when execution of the extra effect is selected (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7542. On the other hand, when execution of the extra effect is not selected (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the main extra effect setting process (FIG. 76).

  Step S7540: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the table limiter value is the same value as 4. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the limiter value management buffer area of the RAM 130, refers to the table limiter value, and confirms whether or not the referenced value is the same value as 4. As a result of this confirmation, when the table limiter value is the same value as 4 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7542. On the other hand, if the table limiter value is not the same value as 4 (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7560.

  Step S7542: The effect control CPU 126 sets the added effect execution variation to the variation. Specifically, the fluctuation for executing the extra production for the content related to the extra production pattern, that is, the number of the limiter remaining number meter M displayed in the screen (the number of the table limiter value) is set as the number of the fluctuation. To do. For example, when the seventh limiter remaining number meter M is turned off in the variation, the seventh is set as the additional effect execution variation. That is, the table limiter value referred to in the previous step S7532 is set as the extra effect execution variation. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7544.

  Step S7544: The effect control CPU 126 executes an additional number lottery. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 sets the upper limiter value referred to in the previous step S7530 or the value that causes the table limiter value to be 15 when it is added as the maximum additional number, from 1 to the maximum additional number. To selectively determine the number to be added. It should be noted that with reference to an additional number lottery table (not shown) stored in advance in ROM 128, the additional number based on the additional number lottery random number updated in the previous effect random number update process (step S410 in FIG. 60). May be selectively determined. Here, the added number lottery table may be set so that the larger value of the added number can be selected more easily or equivalently corresponding to the added limiter value referred to in the previous step S7530 ( In other words, the lottery probabilities for selecting the additional number may be set differently or may be set equal). The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7546.

  Step S7546: The effect control CPU 126 executes an extra effect category lottery. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an added effect category lottery table (not shown) stored in advance in the ROM 128, and the added effect category updated in the previous effect random number update process (step S410 in FIG. 60). Based on the random numbers for lottery, the category of the extra effect is selectively determined.

  Here, as for the extra effect category lottery table, for example, as described above, as an extra effect category, “female character”, “treasure box”, “production switch button”, “panda character”, “? Mark” Etc. "is defined in advance. In addition, the added effect category lottery table may be set by selecting different categories corresponding to the added number determined in the previous step S7542. For example, if the number of extras is one, categories such as “female character”, “treasure box”, “? Mark”, etc. are set easily, or if there are 2 to 4 categories, “female character” , “Treasure chest”, “Panda character”, etc. categories are set easily, or if there are 5-7 categories, categories such as “Treasure chest”, “Panda character”, “Direction switching button” etc. If it is set so that it can be easily selected, or if there are 8 to 12, it may be set that categories such as “panda character”, “effect switching button”, etc. are easily selected.

  As described above, when the category of the extra effect is selectively determined, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7548.

  Step S7548: The effect control CPU 126 sets an additional effect pattern. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 sets the added effect execution variation, the added number, and the added effect category set or selected in the previous step S7542, step S7544, and step S7546 in the buffer area of the RAM 130. Is stored as an effect pattern. For example, an additional effect pattern to be executed in the buffer area of the RAM 130 from now on is set as an additional effect execution variation (table limiter value), an additional number is one, and an additional effect category is set as “female character”. Store as a pattern. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7550.

  Step S7550: The effect control CPU 126 sets the addition limiter value update flag to ON. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130 and sets the value of the extra limiter value update flag to ON (sets to 01H). The effect control CPU 126 returns to the main added effect setting process (FIG. 76).

  Step S7560: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the table limiter value is the same value as 1. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the limiter value management buffer area of the RAM 130, refers to the table limiter value, and confirms whether or not the referenced value is the same value as 1. That is, it is confirmed whether or not all the limiter remaining number meters M in the screen are extinguished due to the change even though the limiter value is added (greater than 0).

  For example, when the table limiter value is 2 or 3 (in the fluctuation when the second or third limiter remaining number meter M is turned off), it falls in the special symbol internal lottery, and the stop symbol 2 corresponds to normal 1 in round 2, it is assumed that the table limiter value is 1 even though there is an extra limiter value.

  As a result of the confirmation, if the table limiter value is the same value as 1 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7562. On the other hand, when the table limiter value is not the same value as 1 (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the main added effect setting process (FIG. 76).

  Step S7562: The production control CPU 126 executes a maximum addition production setting process when the table limiter value is consumed. Specifically, when the table limiter value is 2 or 3, (in the fluctuation when the second or third limiter remaining number meter M is turned off), it is a win in the internal lottery of the special symbol When the stop symbol corresponds to normal 1 for 2 rounds, the limiter remaining number meter M is as a result of the stop symbol corresponding to normal 1 for 2 rounds in the fluctuation (the front limiter value is 1 and the back limiter value is 16 or 17). When the limiter arrives such that the chance zone continues after being restored to the maximum (for example, 15th), the same effect is executed as in the case of 2 rounds of normal one. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the main added effect setting process (FIG. 76).

[Director setting process when reaching the limiter]
FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the limiter arrival time effect setting process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S7570: The production control CPU 126 executes the maximum addition production content lottery. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 refers to the maximum addition production content lottery table (not shown) stored in advance in the ROM 128, and the maximum addition updated in the previous production random number update process (step S410 in FIG. 60). Based on the effect content lottery random number, any one of the plurality of maximum additional effect contents is selectively determined. Here, with regard to the maximum extra effect content lottery table, for example, as the content of the maximum extra effect, the content of the effect described in (v) to FIG. 54 (y) in FIG. 53, or (B) in FIG. The contents of the production described in (E) in 56 are defined in advance. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7572.

  Step S7572: The effect control CPU 126 sets the maximum extra effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 sets execution of the maximum additional effect in the screen based on the content of the maximum additional effect determined in the previous step S75570.

  For example, as described with reference to (v) to (y) in FIG. 53, a press request effect that displays an image imitating the effect switch button on the screen and requests the player to press the effect switch button 45. , GAS STATIONATION is a movable body fall effect in which the movable body 40f of the heart-shaped ornament suddenly drops when the player depresses the effect switching button 45 (or the passage of the effective time of pressing the effect switching button 45). Displaying a simulated image, the limiter remaining number meter M is added to the maximum number of chances of revival effect, and the maximum addition effect consisting of chance zone continuation effect that represents the joy of female characters and the chance zone continues Set to execute.

  For example, as described in FIGS. 55B to 56E, a blackout effect in which the entire screen suddenly darkens (blackout), and a movable body 40f of a heart-shaped ornament suddenly falls. A fall effect, a chance number revival effect that indicates that the female character has appeared and the chance number is reset to 15 times, and a chance zone continuation effect that represents the joy of the female character and the chance zone continues. Set to perform the maximum extra effect.

  As described above, when the setting of the execution of the maximum addition effect is finished, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7574.

  Step S7574: The effect control CPU 126 resets the pre-reading effect scenario. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the buffer area of the RAM 130 and erases the stored content of the pre-reading added effect scenario. As a result, the pre-reading presentation scenario is in a blank state. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7576.

  Step S7576: The effect control CPU 126 sets the addition limiter value update flag to ON. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130 and sets the value of the extra limiter value update flag to ON (sets to 01H). The effect control CPU 126 returns to the main added effect setting process (FIG. 76).

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the main added effect setting process (FIG. 76).

[Meter effect setting process]
FIG. 80 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the meter effect setting process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S7610: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a lottery result command has been received. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a lottery result command related to the normal symbol is newly stored. As a result of the confirmation, if the lottery result command is received (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7612. On the other hand, when the lottery result command has not been received (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7620.

  Step S7612: The effect control CPU 126 executes meter consumption effect setting processing. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 performs setting for executing the effect of turning off one meter for the limiter remaining number meter M displayed in the screen. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7620.

  Step S7620: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not a symbol stop command has been received. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a symbol stop command is newly stored. If the symbol stop command is received as a result of the confirmation (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7622. On the other hand, when the symbol stop command is not received (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7640.

  Step S7622: The effect control CPU 126 executes meter update effect setting processing. Specifically, for the limiter remaining number meter M displayed on the screen, the effect control CPU 126 displays a table when the table limiter value confirmed by the effect control CPU 126 is different from the number of lights of the currently displayed meter. Based on the limiter value, a setting for performing an effect of turning on the meter is performed (for example, when a chance zone is entered or power is restored). The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S7640: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not an additional effect is being executed. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the additional effect is currently being executed in the main effect in the screen. As a result of this confirmation, when the additional effect is being executed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7642. On the other hand, when the additional effect is not being executed (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7650.

  Step S7642: The effect control CPU 126 executes a meter addition lighting effect setting process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 performs setting for executing the effect of newly turning on the limiter remaining number meter M displayed in the screen by the number corresponding to the currently executed additional effect. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7650.

  Step S7650: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the maximum addition effect is being executed. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the maximum additional effect is currently being executed in the main effect on the screen. As a result of this confirmation, when the maximum addition effect is being executed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7652. On the other hand, when the maximum addition effect is not being executed (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7670.

  Step S7652: The effect control CPU 126 executes a meter maximum addition lighting effect setting process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 performs setting for executing the effect of lighting all the meters for the limiter remaining number meter M displayed in the screen. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7670.

  Step S7670: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the prefetching effect adding flag is ON. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130, refers to the value of the prefetched effect addition flag, and whether or not the referenced value is the same as a value corresponding to ON (for example, 01H). Confirm. As a result of this confirmation, if the pre-reading addition effect addition flag is ON (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7672. On the other hand, when the pre-reading addition effect addition flag is not ON (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect process after starting the major role (FIG. 64).

  Step S7672: The effect control CPU 126 executes meter pre-reading effect setting processing. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 performs a setting for executing the effect of prefetching the meter prefetching such as newly displaying a balloon image for the limiter remaining number meter M displayed on the screen. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect process after starting the big role (FIG. 64).

[Meter consumption effect setting processing]
FIG. 81 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of meter consumption effect setting processing. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S7710: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the lottery result command relating to the normal symbol received in the process of the previous step S7610 corresponds to the winning. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the value of the referenced lottery result command is a value corresponding to winning. As a result of the confirmation, if the received lottery result command corresponds to winning (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7712. On the other hand, when the received lottery result command does not correspond to winning (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the meter effect setting process (FIG. 80).

  Step S7712: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the table limiter value. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the limiter value management buffer area of the RAM 130 and refers to the table limiter value. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7714.

  Step S7714: The effect control CPU 126 sets a meter consumption effect for the corresponding numbered meter. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 sets execution of an effect that consumes the corresponding number of meters based on the table limiter value confirmed in the previous step S7712.

  For example, when the confirmed table limiter value is 14, the execution of the effect of consuming the 14th meter, that is, the effect of turning off the 14th meter is set as described in FIG. In addition, when the confirmed table limiter value is 13, the execution of the effect of consuming the thirteenth meter, that is, the effect of turning off the thirteenth meter is set as described in FIG. To do.

  As described above, when the execution of the effect that consumes the meter with the number corresponding to the confirmed table limiter value is set, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the meter effect setting process (FIG. 80).

  In addition, when the chance zone end effect is executed (when the third to first meters of the limiter remaining number meter M are turned off), it corresponds to the normal pattern 1 for 2 rounds (the add-on effect is not executed). ), And then the case where it falls continuously in the special symbol internal lottery. Specifically, a case is assumed in which the second meter corresponds to the normal symbol 1 when the third meter is turned off and the second and first meters are turned off when the effect is turned off. In that case, the maximum addition effect is executed when the last meter is turned off. In this case, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game by adding the production to a very important scene such as whether or not the chance zone is ended.

[Meter update effect setting process]
FIG. 82 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of meter update effect setting processing. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S7720: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the table limiter value. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the limiter value management buffer area of the RAM 130 and refers to the table limiter value. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7722.

  Step S7722: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the number of lighting of the meter and the table limiter value are the same. Specifically, it is determined whether the number of meters lit in the limiter remaining number meter M displayed in the current screen is the same as the value of the table limiter value confirmed in the previous step S7720. Check.

  For example, since no meter is displayed on the screen before entering the chance zone, no meter is lit (the number of lighting = 0). However, when entering the chance zone, a new value is set for the table limiter value (for example, 14 or 15), so that the number of lighting of the meter and the table limiter value are not the same (No) in this processing. Can be confirmed. In addition, for example, even when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1 due to some cause such as a power failure and the power is supplied after that, no effects related to the meter are lit as the initial state (the number of lighting = In this process, it can be confirmed that the number of lighting of the meter and the table limiter value are not the same (No).

  As a result of the confirmation, if the number of lighting of the meter and the table limiter value are the same (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the meter effect setting process (FIG. 80). On the other hand, when the number of lighting of the meter and the table limiter value are not the same (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7724.

  Step S7724: The effect control CPU 126 sets a meter lighting effect corresponding to the table limiter value. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 performs setting to execute an effect of lighting the meters up to the number corresponding to the value of the table limiter value confirmed in the previous step S7720. For example, as described in FIG. 46A, since the table limiter value is set to 14 when the chance zone is entered, an effect of turning on the limiter remaining number meter M to the number corresponding to the value is executed. Set up. When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the meter effect setting process (FIG. 80).

[Meter addition lighting effect setting processing]
FIG. 83 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a meter addition lighting effect setting process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S7740: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not it is the execution timing of the meter addition lighting effect. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 confirms the progress degree of the production when the production production is being executed, and executes the execution timing of the meter production lighting effect (for example, the lighting number of the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen). It is confirmed whether or not the timing is to increase by one. As a result of the confirmation, if it is the execution timing of the meter-on lighting effect (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7742. On the other hand, when it is not the execution timing of the meter addition effect (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the meter effect setting process (FIG. 80).

  Step S7742: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the set up effect contents. Specifically, the contents of the extra effect currently being executed on the screen are referred to. The content of this extra effect represents the content set in the previous step S7452. Here, since the necessary information is the number of meters added in the additional effect, the additional number related to the additional effect pattern in the additional effect may be referred to in this process. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7744.

  Step S7744: The effect control CPU 126 sets a meter added lighting effect corresponding to the added effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 performs setting to execute the effect of lighting up to the number of meters corresponding to the number of added meters from the contents of the currently performed additional effect referred to in the previous step S7742.

  For example, as described with reference to (m) in FIG. 50, when the number of added meters is three, a setting for performing an effect of lighting three new meters is performed. In addition, the setting which performs the effect which lights a meter newly is performed according to the number of the meters added without being limited to three.

  As described above, when the setting for execution of the meter addition effect is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the meter effect setting process (FIG. 80).

[Meter maximum addition lighting effect setting processing]
FIG. 84 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the maximum metering lighting effect setting process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S7750: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not it is the execution timing of the meter maximum extra lighting effect. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 confirms the progress of the production when the maximum addition production is being executed, and the execution timing of the maximum addition lighting production (for example, lighting of the limiter remaining number meter M in the screen) It is confirmed whether or not it is the timing to increase the number to the maximum value (for example, 15). As a result of this confirmation, when it is the execution timing of the maximum addition lighting effect (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7752. On the other hand, when it is not the execution timing of the meter maximum addition effect (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the meter effect setting process (FIG. 80).

  Step S7752: The effect control CPU 126 sets a meter maximum addition lighting effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 performs setting to execute an effect of lighting the meter to the maximum value. For example, as described with reference to (x) in FIG. 53, (y) in FIG. 54, and (E) in FIG. 56, an effect is performed in which all the first to fifteenth meters of the limiter remaining number meter M are lit. Set up. Next, effect control CPU126 performs step S7754.

  Step S7754: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the prefetched effect scenario reset flag is ON. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130 and refers to the value of the pre-reading effect scenario reset flag, and whether or not the referred value is the same as the value corresponding to ON (for example, 01H). To check. As a result of the confirmation, if the pre-reading effect scenario reset flag is ON (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7756. On the other hand, when the pre-reading effect scenario reset flag is not ON (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the meter effect setting process (FIG. 74).

  Step S7756: The effect control CPU 126 ends the meter prefetching effect being executed. Specifically, when the meter pre-reading effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 126 is configured to end the execution of the meter pre-reading effect at the same time as the execution of the maximum metering lighting effect set in step S7754. Do.

  For example, although not shown in the drawing, the meter prefetching effect that was executed at the start of the change of the special symbol (for example, the balloon image in which the effect switching button is displayed from the fourth of the limiter remaining number meter M or the limiter remaining number meter M) 56) (the effect of displaying a balloon image in which the treasure box is displayed from the fifth and a balloon image in which the female character is displayed from the sixth in the limiter remaining number meter M) is added to the maximum of the meter described in FIG. Set to end at the same time as the lighting effect. That is, a setting is made to delete the plurality of balloon images MP of the displayed meter prefetching effect. Therefore, as described with reference to (E) in FIG. 56, this indicates that the meter look-ahead addition effect is not executed when the meter maximum addition lighting effect is executed.

  In addition, when the meter pre-reading effect is not executed, the effect control CPU 126 does not perform this process. When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the meter effect setting process (FIG. 80).

[Meter pre-reading stage setting process]
FIG. 85 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the meter prefetching effect setting process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S7775: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the pre-reading effect scenario. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the buffer area of the RAM 130, refers to the stored prefetching effect scenario, stores the prefetching effect newly added from the content of the referenced prefetching effect scenario, Confirm the number of the meter to be used and the category of the production effect. Next, effect control CPU126 performs step S7777.

  Step S7777: The effect control CPU 126 sets a meter pre-reading effect for the corresponding numbered meter. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 displays a balloon image corresponding to the added effect category on the corresponding numbered meter based on the target meter number and the added effect category confirmed in step S7775. Set execution of pre-reading production. In addition, with regard to the setting of execution of the pre-reading effect on the meter, once the balloon image is displayed on the target number meter, the target number meter is turned off and the additional effect is executed on the screen. The balloon image is displayed. As an exception, when the maximum addition effect (meter maximum addition effect) is executed in the screen, the execution of the meter pre-reading effect is ended in step S7756 as described above, so the meter of the target number is displayed. The displayed balloon image is deleted.

  For example, as described with reference to (g) in FIG. 48 to (j) in FIG. 49, when the target meter number is the fifth and the category of the additional effect is a treasure box, A setting for executing an effect such as displaying the balloon image MP displaying the treasure box from the fifth is performed.

  As described above, when the setting of execution of the meter prefetching effect is completed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S7779.

  Step S7779: The effect control CPU 126 sets the pre-read superimposition effect addition flag to OFF. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130 and resets the value of the pre-reading added effect adding flag to OFF (sets to 00H).

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the meter effect setting process (FIG. 80).

[Summary of production techniques]
According to the example of the production method described above, information useful to the player can be provided as production in accordance with the progress of the game flow in the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, (1) the necessity of “right-handed” has occurred per normal symbol, and (2) internal lottery (special figure fluctuation) due to winning at the variable start winning device 28 (start winning port 28a). (3) Winning in the internal lottery (with time reduction at the time of the first hit), (4) The game flow is changing to [F19] probability change or [F31] time reduction (rushing in) (5) [F19] The remaining “limiter count” decreases during certain changes, (6) “Limiter count” increases, (7) After reaching the limiter [F31] [F19] Information that the opportunity to return to the probability change has occurred, and (8) the fact that [F19] the probability change is ended by reaching the limiter and the game flow is returned to [F1] normal game, etc. Provide direct to the player by directing Teaching, it is possible to suggest). Further, regarding (3) above, it can be provided as information that the winning in the probable variation pattern was not obtained by the internal lottery.

  Thereby, the player can fully enjoy the game performance by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment while preventing the game from being performed indiscriminately while the progress of the game flow is not understood by the player. In addition, by clearly realizing from the contents of the production that the “limiter count” has actually increased in the game flow, it is possible to give the player his own game outcome ([F19] 2% normal win during probability change) The player can feel a certain level of satisfaction and achievement. Alternatively, by clearly realizing from the contents that the resurgence occurred after reaching the limiter in the game flow, the player's own game achievement (57% after the limiter was reached and the normal win was assigned) ) Realize it, so that the player can have a certain level of satisfaction and achievement.

  Further, the number of limiters to reach the limiter taught to the player is displayed in a small number (for example, the limiter number is displayed as 14 times of the limiter number of 17 times), and the remaining “limiter number” until reaching the limiter is displayed. In the midst of the decrease in the number of times, the player is forced to generate an additional “limiter count”, and the player has a certain level of satisfaction and accomplishment without having to feel a sense of disappointment. You can make it. Further, by selectively determining in advance the fluctuation that causes the addition of the “limiter count”, the addition of the “limiter count” occurs over a plurality of fluctuations until the addition of the “limiter count” occurs. It is possible to look ahead, and to make the player have a sense of expectation over a plurality of variations. Further, since the contents of the extra effect (for example, the effect category and the number of times of addition) are determined in advance, the effect based on the determined content can be executed at the pre-reading stage to change the expectation for the effect.

  In particular, in the internal game flow, the contents of the actual control processing are complicated for the mechanisms (6) and (7) above, but in the present embodiment, this is transmitted to the player in an easy-to-understand manner as performance information. In that respect, not only the game flow but also the production technique is excellent.

[Usefulness in game flow]
In addition, in the present embodiment, the original game flow itself has the following utility.
(1) For example, [F16] The right (possibility) to generate a loop during [F19] probability change continuously 17 times including the first time by winning the [F16] probability change symbol 1 and 2 from the normal game To do. Accordingly, the player can be given an opportunity to obtain a winning ball through the [F22] variable start winning device operation and the [F18] variable winning device operation for each loop, and the profit can be increased.

(2) Furthermore, if [F19] normal symbol 1 winning is assigned in the middle of [F19] probabilistic change loop, [F38] probable symbol 1 and 2 winning (98% probable change ratio) occurs after [F31] time reduction. It is easy to re-loop into [F19] probability change. In this case, since the “limiter count” is reset (reset) as described above, a new “limiter count” is added to the amount that has been digested in the previous loop. Become. As a result, the player can be given an opportunity to obtain a winning ball through the [F22] variable start winning device operation and the [F18] variable winning device operation, and the profit can be further increased.

(3) Also, even if [F19] no extra occurrence occurs in the loop under certain probability and the remaining “limiter count” reaches 0, [F43] normal symbol 1 win or [F45] Probability change symbol 1 win → compulsory normal symbol 1 (synthetic selection ratio 57%), it is possible to resume the loop [F19] change in probability after passing [F31] time. Also in this case, since the “limiter count” is reset (reset), a new “limiter count” is added to the amount that has been digested during the loop before reaching the limiter. . As a result, the player can be given an opportunity to obtain a winning ball through the [F22] variable start winning device operation and the [F18] variable winning device operation, and the profit can be further increased.

(4) In addition, since the profit of (2) or (3) may occur randomly according to the result of the special symbol (internal lottery), the above (2) and (3) occur in a chain. By doing so, it is possible to realize a game property that can add a ball to the ball each time.

(5) In addition, in this type of pachinko game, drawing a probabilistic symbol basically generates continuity of profit (so-called continuous chain). The common sense of gaming is that sex ends. However, in this embodiment, [F19] Draws regular symbols during probability change to generate continuity of profits, which is significant in that it achieves game characteristics using the concept of reversal from the conventional one. It is useful.

  The present invention can employ various modifications without being limited to the above-described embodiments. For example, the images and operations given as examples of various production methods are merely examples, and these can be modified as appropriate.

  In addition, the probability of the lottery and the variation time of the symbols mentioned in the embodiment (one embodiment and another embodiment), the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 and the variable winning device 30, the closing time, the number of times of opening, the number of winning balls, etc. The conditions are merely examples, and these may be modified as appropriate. Further, the arrangement of the various start gates 20 and 21, the variable start winning device 28, the variable winning device 30 and the like in the game area 8 may be variously modified.

  In the above embodiment, the limiter count is set to 17 in the case of a two-round probability variation symbol in the first-time (normal state or time-reduced) winning of the special symbol for the processing of the number of limiters. The limiter count set by 1 is subtracted every time (probable variation pattern). Then, the winning symbol is forcibly set to the normal symbol when the limiter count reaches zero when the limiter is reached. However, the processing of the limiter number is not limited to this, and the limiter number for the first time (the normal state or the time reduction state) is set to 0 in advance, and the limiter is applied when the two-round probability variation pattern is met in the first win. The number of times may be set to 1 and 1 may be added to the set number of limiters every time a winning (2 round probability variation symbol) is made. Then, the winning symbol may be forcibly set to the normal symbol when the limiter count reaches 18 when the limiter is reached. Further, if the winning is made in the middle (before reaching the limiter) and it corresponds to the normal pattern 1 of 2 rounds, the number of limiters may be reset to 0 and managed from the beginning. Specifically, in the special symbol stop display process (FIG. 22), step S4332 may not be executed, and the process of step S4340 may be set to a process of adding the number of limiters. In addition, about production control, you may change corresponding to each process with having changed the subtraction process into the addition process.

  In addition, the structure of the pachinko machine 1 and the board surface configuration are preferable examples including those shown in the drawings, and it goes without saying that these can be appropriately modified.

[Another embodiment]
Further, in the present embodiment, the number of times of transition to the gaming state (special state) advantageous to the player (special state transition number) is displayed on the state transition number display portion 278 of the data display device 270. The number of times of transition to the time reduction state after the end may be displayed. Specifically, when the data display device 270 receives an external information signal related to the number of short-time transitions in the ON state, the lottery result of the special symbol corresponds to winning, and after the big hit game to be performed after the winning is completed If the game state of the game corresponds to the winning symbol in which the time reduction state is reached, the count number of the state transition number display section 278 may be increased by one and displayed. For example, if a winning is made by a lottery of a special symbol executed by winning the variable start winning device 28 (start winning port 28a) in operation, and the winning symbol at that time corresponds to a game other than 2 round normal symbols 2, the gaming state May be shifted to a time reduction state, and the number of times of the transition may be displayed. Although not shown, by displaying “71” in the state transition number display section 278, the player may be informed that the transition to the time reduction state has been made 71 times. Therefore, as the number of times displayed in the state transition number display unit 278 is larger, the number of times that the pachinko machine 1 of the day shifts to the time shortening state and the lottery probability related to the normal symbol becomes a high probability state. This means that a lot of prize balls are paid out.

  Next, a process for controlling the main control CPU 72 when outputting the external information signal with respect to the number of short-time transitions displayed on the state transition display unit 278 of the data display device 270 will be specifically described. This process may be executed in place of the special state transition number information management process (step S704) described with reference to FIG. 23, or may be performed after the special state transition number information management process.

[Time-shift information management processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the time-shifted number information management process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S760: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the external information signal regarding the number of time shifts is set to ON. Here, the external information signal related to the number of times of short-time transition represents a signal corresponding to the number of times of transition to the time shortening state after the big hit game displayed on the time-shortest transition number display unit 276. This external information signal is represented by a binary value in the ON or OFF state, and when the data display device 270 receives the external information signal regarding the number of short-time transitions in the ON state, one count is added. It should be noted that the external information signal relating to the number of time-shifts is set to OFF when the pachinko machine 1 is activated.

  Specifically, in this process, the main control CPU 72 accesses the port output request buffer and confirms whether the state of the stored external information signal related to the number of times of short-time transition is ON or OFF. It is confirmed whether or not the external information signal regarding the number of times of transition is set to ON. As a result of this confirmation, when the external information signal regarding the number of time-shifts is set to ON (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S776. On the other hand, when the external information signal relating to the number of times of short-time transition is not set to ON (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S762.

  Step S762: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the special symbol stop display has been completed. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the special symbol variation display is finished, and then the stop display in a mode representing the winning or dismissal that is performed thereafter is finished. As a result of the confirmation, when the special symbol stop display is completed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S764. On the other hand, when the special symbol stop display has not ended (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the external information processing (FIG. 23).

  Step S764: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol has been won. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the special symbol stop display mode is a mode representing winning. As a result of this confirmation, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a win (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S768. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is not a win (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the external information processing (FIG. 23).

  Step S768: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the type of the winning symbol is normal 2 for two rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 selects “2 round normal 2” from “2 round normal variation 1”, “2 round probability variation 1”, “2 round normal variation 2” as the winning symbol type. It is confirmed whether or not. As a result of this confirmation, when the type of winning symbol is 2 in round 2 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the external information processing (FIG. 23). On the other hand, when the type of the winning symbol is not two rounds normally two (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S774.

  Step S774: The main control CPU 72 sets the external information signal relating to the number of time shifts to ON. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the port output request buffer and sets the state of the stored external information signal related to the number of short-time transitions to ON. When this process is finished, the main control CPU 72 returns to the external information processing (FIG. 23).

  Step S776: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the external information signal relating to the number of time-shifts was set to the ON state in the previous process (step S774). To do. As a result of the confirmation, when a predetermined time has elapsed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S778. On the other hand, when the predetermined time has not elapsed (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the external information processing (FIG. 23).

  Step S778: The main control CPU 72 sets the external information signal relating to the number of time shifts to OFF. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the port output request buffer and sets the state of the stored external information signal regarding the number of short-time transitions to OFF.

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the external information processing (FIG. 23). Note that the processing after the external information signal is set to ON, that is, the processing in step S776 and step S778 may not be executed when the I / O driver is installed. This is because the external information signal transmitted by the I / O driver is controlled from ON to OFF. Therefore, since the main control CPU 72 does not have to execute the process of setting whether or not the external information signal is ON in step S760, step S776, and step S778 and setting the external information signal from ON to OFF. The increase in capacity for the purpose can be suppressed.

  In addition, although not shown in the drawing, when the special symbol stop display is ended based on the fact that the special symbol lottery (probability of 1/2) was not won, the data display device 270 The number of counters (for example, “22”) is displayed as it is in the state transition number display section 278 without being changed. Thereby, in the data display device 270, the player is informed that there has been no transition to the time reduction state, that is, there has been no transition from the big hit game (normal state) in which the variable winning device 30 operates to the time reduction state. Can be taught.

  Accordingly, in the data display device 270, the number of counters is increased in the winning number display unit 277 (for example, “23” is displayed) and “22” is displayed in the state transition number display unit. If it is an expert who knows the game nature of the pachinko machine 1, it can be judged that the result in the internal lottery of the special symbol this time has fallen out, and a decrease in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

  Similarly, when the stop display of the special symbol is completed based on the fact that the winning symbol type related to the special symbol is “2 round normal 2”, the state transition count display unit 278 of the data display device 270 The counter number (for example, “71”) is displayed as it is without being changed. Thereby, in the data display device 270, the player is informed that there has been no transition to the time reduction state, that is, there has been no transition from the big hit game (normal state) in which the variable winning device 30 operates to the time reduction state. Can be taught.

  Therefore, in the data display device 270, the number of homes is increased in the winning number display part 277 (for example, “77” is displayed), and “71” is displayed in the state transition number display part. If it is an expert who is familiar with the playability of the pachinko machine 1, it can be determined that the result of the internal lottery of the special symbol has fallen to five times by the end of the chance zone of this time. Therefore, since the variable start winning device 28 is operated five times, this means that the number of prize balls can be acquired five times more than usual, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8 Game board unit 8a Game area 20 Middle start gate 21 Right start gate 28 Variable start prize device 30 Variable prize device 33 Normal symbol display device 33a Normal symbol operation memory lamp 34 Special symbol display device 42 Liquid crystal display device 70 Main control Device 72 Main control CPU
74 ROM
76 RAM
124 Production control device 126 Production control CPU

Claims (8)

First lottery execution means for executing the first lottery on condition that the first lottery opportunity occurs during the game;
The first lottery is executed by the first lottery execution means, a variable display of the first symbol preset according to the result of the first lottery is performed, and the result of the first lottery is displayed after the variable display A first symbol display means for displaying a stop of the first symbol in an aspect;
When the result of the first lottery by the first lottery execution means corresponds to winning, and when the first symbol display means is stopped and displayed in a winning manner after the variation of the first symbol is displayed, a game ball is placed in the winning opening. First opening operation means for performing a first opening operation that changes from a non-operating state in which it is difficult to enter a ball to an operating state that facilitates entry of a game ball into the winning opening;
A second lottery different from the first lottery on condition that a second lottery opportunity is triggered when a game ball enters the winning opening during the first opening operation by the first opening operation means Second lottery execution means for executing
The second lottery is executed by the second lottery execution means, and a variation display of the second symbol preset according to the result of the second lottery is performed. After the variation display, the second lottery is performed according to the result of the second lottery A second symbol display means for performing stop display of the second symbol in an aspect;
When the result of the second lottery by the second lottery execution means corresponds to winning, and when the second symbol display means is stopped and displayed in a winning manner after the variation of the second symbol is displayed, a game ball is placed in the big prize opening. Second opening operation means for performing a second opening operation that changes from an inoperative state in which it is difficult to enter a game to an operating state that facilitates entry of a game ball into the grand prize opening;
When the first opening operation is performed by the first opening operation means, the number-of-winning information external output means for outputting information related to the execution of the first opening operation as winning information;
A gaming machine, comprising: a transmission unit configured to transmit the winning information output by the winning number information external output unit to an external device. In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
A winning type determining means for determining at least whether the winning type is a normal winning type or a specific winning type when winning is obtained in the second lottery by the second lottery executing means;
If the winning type obtained by the second lottery is determined to fall under the specific winning type by the winning type determining unit, the second lottery executing unit is executed after the second opening operation by the second opening operation unit is completed. The lottery probability state of the second lottery executed by the second lottery state is compared with the second low probability state in which the winning of the second lottery is obtained with a normal probability. A second lottery high probability state setting means for setting the high probability state;
If the winning type obtained by the second lottery is determined to fall under the specific winning type by the winning type determining unit, the first lottery executing unit is terminated after the second opening operation by the second opening operation unit. The lottery probability state of the first lottery executed by the first lottery is compared with the first low probability state in which the winning of the first lottery is obtained with a normal probability. First lottery high probability state setting means for setting a high probability state;
When winning is obtained in the second lottery performed in the second low probability state, and when the winning type determining means determines that the specified winning type is applicable, the second state by the high probability state setting means The maximum number of consecutive times in the initial state that can be continuously determined that the winning type determination means corresponds to the specific winning type every time the winning is obtained in the second lottery performed after setting in the high probability state Continuous number of times setting means to be set to,
When winning is obtained in the second lottery performed while the second high probability state is set, and the winning type determining means determines that the selected winning type is applicable, the degree of winning A continuous number subtracting means for subtracting and setting the remaining number of consecutive times one by one;
Regarding the winning of the second lottery obtained while being set in the second high probability state, it is continuously determined that the winning type determining means corresponds to the specific winning type, and for each winning time, When the number of consecutive times does not remain as a result of the subtraction by the continuous number subtraction means, the winning type that can be determined by the winning type determination means for the winning obtained in the second lottery is restricted to the normal winning type The second lottery low probability for setting the lottery probability state of the second lottery executed by the second lottery executing means to the second low probability state after completion of the second opening operation by the second opening operation means And a state setting means. The gaming machine according to claim 2,
If the winning type obtained by the second lottery is determined to fall under the non-special winning type belonging to the normal winning type by the winning type determining unit, after the second opening operation by the second opening operation unit, First lottery low probability state setting means for setting the lottery probability state of the first lottery executed by the first lottery executing means to the first low probability state;
The first lottery high probability state setting means includes:
When it is determined that the winning type obtained by the second lottery corresponds to the specific winning type by the winning type determining means, or when it is determined to correspond to the special winning type belonging to the normal winning type, the second A gaming machine, wherein after the second opening operation by the opening operation means ends, the lottery probability state of the first lottery executed by the first lottery executing means is set to the first high probability state. In the gaming machine according to claim 2 or claim 3,
When the winning type obtained by the second lottery performed while being set to the first low probability state is determined by the winning type determining means to correspond to the specific winning type, or the normal winning type A remaining number display effect execution means for executing a remaining number display effect that teaches the remaining number of consecutive times within a range up to a predetermined upper limit value when determined to fall under the special winning type belonging to
When winning is obtained in the first lottery during execution of the remaining number display effect by the remaining number display effect executing means, 1 is subtracted from the remaining number of consecutive times taught in the remaining number display effect. A gaming machine, further comprising: a remaining number display effect content updating means for updating the content of the remaining number display effect. In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The winning number information external output means is:
The winning information is output from the time when the stop display in the winning mode by the second symbol display means is completed until the time when the winning of the game ball at the winning opening is valid. A gaming machine characterized by In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
The transmission means includes
A gaming machine, wherein the winning information including information obtained by adding 1 to the number of winnings representing the total number of times won by the gaming machine is transmitted to the external device. In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 6,
When it is determined that the winning type obtained by the second lottery corresponds to the specific winning type by the winning type determining means, or when it is determined to correspond to the special winning type belonging to the normal winning type, the first State transition information external output means for outputting, as state transition information, information regarding that the winning type obtained in the second lottery corresponds to the winning type for which the lottery probability state of the lottery is set to the first high probability state Further comprising
The transmission means includes
A gaming machine, wherein the state transition information output by the state transition information external output means is transmitted to the external device. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 7,
The gaming state currently being performed is a state where the first opening operation means is performing the first opening operation, and a state where the second opening operation means is performing the second opening operation. It is confirmed whether there is a special state satisfying at least one of the conditions that the lottery probability state of the first lottery is set to the first high probability state. Special state confirmation means,
Special state transition information external output means for outputting, as special state transition information, information relating to the special state when it is confirmed by the special state confirmation means that the current gaming state is the special state. ,
The transmission means includes
A gaming machine, wherein the special state transition information output by the special state transition information external output means is transmitted to the external device.